> This is part 1 of 2 of the full documentation (pages 1–100 of 130). > The content is paginated: fetch every part to see all of it. > Next part: https://docs.prestashop-project.org/v.9-documentation/llms-full.txt/1 > Page index: https://docs.prestashop-project.org/v.9-documentation/llms.txt # Agent Instructions This documentation is published with GitBook. GitBook is the documentation platform designed so that both humans and AI agents can read, navigate, and reason over technical content effectively. Learn more at gitbook.com. ## Querying This Documentation This site has an agentic ask interface you may use to query the documentation dynamically by asking a question. Perform an HTTP GET request on the following URL with the `ask` and `goal` query parameters: ``` GET https://docs.prestashop-project.org/v.9-documentation/index.md?ask=&goal= ``` `ask` is the immediate question: it should be specific, self-contained, and written in natural language. `goal` is what the user is ultimately trying to achieve, the reason they need the answer. Sharing it helps GitBook give you a better, more relevant answer. A goal is most helpful when it describes the outcome the user wants rather than restating the question. For example, with `ask=how do I create an API token`, a goal like `automate deployments from our CI pipeline` lets GitBook tailor the answer to that use case. The response will contain a direct answer to the question and relevant excerpts and sources from the documentation. --- # Contributing to the documentation Just like PrestaShop itself, the [documentation](https://docs.prestashop-project.org/) is open to everyone for suggestions, ideas, and modifications. Anyone is welcome and even encouraged, to contribute to **translate**, **update**, or **write** the PrestaShop 9 user documentation.
GitBook and GitHub are synchronized: if you change the content of any page on GitBook, your edits will be pushed to the GitHub repository. Conversely, commits pushed to GitHub are imported on GitBook. This means that both interfaces are open to contributions. ### Contributing on GitBook Gitbook is a tool to build documentation. It works like a text editor and might be the best solution if you are not really tech-savvy. To contribute to the PrestaShop documentation using GitBook, please send us an email to **** with a little introduction of yourself: Are you a merchant? In which language would you like to translate, update, or write? What motivates you to participate in this project? PrestaShop's Product Content Manager will onboard you and will give you access to the documentation as an editor. You will have to sign in with either a Gmail, GitHub, or GitBook account. Click here to[ create a GitBook account](https://app.gitbook.com/join). ### Contributing on GitHub Each documentation is synchronized with a repository on GitHub. Both interfaces are open to contributions. Click on your language to visit the corresponding repository: [English ](https://github.com/PrestaShop/user-documentation-en), [French ](https://github.com/PrestaShop/user-documentation-fr), [Spanish ](https://github.com/PrestaShop/user-documentation-es), [Italian ](https://github.com/PrestaShop/user-documentation-it), [Dutch ](https://github.com/PrestaShop/user-documentation-nl), [Farsi](https://github.com/PrestaShop/user-documentation-fa). #### Opening an issue An idea, a suggestion? Let the community know by submitting a [new issue](https://github.com/PrestaShop/user-documentation-en/issues)! This is a ticket-tracker for the user documentation repository and it is the best place to write a suggestion or request an improvement. For that, you will just need a GitHub account. #### Editing a file This option is particularly adapted if you are not used to working on GitHub yet. 1. Create your GitHub account, if you do not have one already. 2. Browse to the target file. 3. Click the "Edit" button and make your changes in the editor.‌ 4. Once you are done, go to the bottom of the page, enter a name and a description and click on "Create a new branch for this commit and start a pull request". 5. Finally, click on "Propose file change". GitHub will automatically create a new fork and branch on your own GitHub account, then suggest a pull request to this repository. 6. Once the pull request is submitted, just wait for the Product Content Manager to come back to you. {% hint style="warning" %} Please do not commit your changes directly to the master branch. It is important to create a pull request so that your work can be proofread first. {% endhint %} #### Forking the project This option is particularly adapted if you already work on GitHub or if you feel comfortable doing so. 1. Create your GitHub account, if you do not have one already. 2. Fork this repository to your Github account. 3. Clone your fork to your local machine. 4. Create a branch in your local clone for your changes. 5. Change the files in your branch. 6. Push the changed branch to your fork in your GitHub account. 7. Create a pull request for your changes. If you need help to make a pull request, read the GitHub help page about[ creating pull requests](https://docs.github.com/en/github/collaborating-with-issues-and-pull-requests/creating-a-pull-request). 8. Wait for the Product Content Manager to either include your changes in the codebase or comment on possible adjustments. Once you have chosen the way to contribute that suits you best, you are ready to participate in the PrestaShop open source project. Thank you for your contribution! ## License Content from this documentation is licensed under the[ Creative Commons Attribution-ShareAlike 4.0 International License](https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/4.0/). # Getting started with PrestaShop 9 ## Getting started with PrestaShop 9 This guide was written to help you download and install **PrestaShop 9.** Every step of the process is detailed, with tips and indications to help you get the most out of PrestaShop. Make sure to read the instructions at least once before proceeding with the installation. {% hint style="info" %} The presented chapters should be read one after the other: for instance, the chapter ["What you need to get started"](/v.9-documentation/getting-started/what-you-need-to-get-started) should be read first. **No instruction should be skipped,** as having the correct environment for your installation of PrestaShop is essential for its health and its growth. {% endhint %} You will find the following pages in this chapter: * [What you need to get started](/v.9-documentation/getting-started/what-you-need-to-get-started) * [Installing PrestaShop](/v.9-documentation/getting-started/installing-prestashop) * [Installing PrestaShop on your computer](/v.9-documentation/getting-started/installing-prestashop-computer) * [Installing PrestaShop using the command-line script](/v.9-documentation/getting-started/installing-prestashop-using-command-line-script) * [Uninstalling PrestaShop](/v.9-documentation/getting-started/uninstalling-prestashop) * [Misc. information](/v.9-documentation/getting-started/misc-information) # What you need to get started This page lists everything you need to start installing PrestaShop 9. ## Quick set-up instructions Here is a quick list of what you need to get started with the installation of PrestaShop 9. You will find more detailed instructions in the next sections. ## **System requirements:** * **System:** Unix, Linux, or Windows. * **MySQL:** 5.7 or later. * **PHP:** 8.1 or later. * **In your `php.ini` file:** * **Useful settings** * `allow_url_fopen` set to **"On" ✅**, * `register_globals` set to **"Off" ❌**, * `upload_max_filesize` set to **"16MB"** or more. * **Must have PHP extensions:** * **CURL:** the [Client URL extension](https://php.net/manual/en/book.curl.php) is used to download remote resources like modules and localization packages. * **DOM:** the [DOM extension](https://php.net/manual/en/book.dom.php) is needed to parse XML documents. * **Fileinfo:** the [File information extension](https://php.net/manual/en/book.fileinfo.php) is used to find out the file type of uploaded files. * **GD:** the [GD extension](https://php.net/manual/en/book.image.php) is used to create thumbnails for the images that you upload. * **Intl:** the [ICONV extension](https://www.php.net/manual/en/book.iconv.php) is used to convert character sets. * **Mbstring:** the [Multibyte string extension](https://www.php.net/manual/en/book.mbstring.php) is used to perform string operations everywhere. * **Zip:** the [Zip extension](https://php.net/manual/en/book.zip.php) is used to expand compressed files such as modules and localization packages. * **JSON:** the [JSON extension](https://www.php.net/manual/en/json.installation.php) is used to manage JSON format. * **Iconv:** the [ICONV extension](https://www.php.net/manual/en/book.iconv.php) is used to convert character sets. * **Useful server tools:** * Cron/[Crontab](https://crontab.guru/), [Memcached](https://memcached.org/). ## Recommended requirements: * **Hosting:** Unix or Linux. * **Web server:** Apache Web Server 2.4 (or any later version), or Nginx 1.0 (or later). Note that Apache 2.2 is compatible, but **not recommended** as it [reached its EOL in 2018](https://httpd.apache.org/)[.](https://httpd.apache.org/) * **Apache module settings are set as:** * `mod_rewrite` **enabled ✅**, * `mod_security` **disabled ❌**, * `mod_auth_basic` **enabled ✅**. * **Server RAM:** At least 512MB of RAM is dedicated to PHP. The more the better. * **Access codes** to your FTP server and MySQL database. These should be provided by your [web host](#finding-a-host) if you are not doing a local installation. * **Text editor:** Any * **FTP client:** Any * **Web browser:** Any modern Web browser (if using Internet Explorer: at least IE9). You also need to know which URL on your domain you want your store(s) to be accessible from. Once your set-up is in place, you can use the installation guide, available here: {% content-ref url="/pages/-MD-u9WRmjanUE835ori" %} [Installing PrestaShop](/v.9-documentation/getting-started/installing-prestashop) {% endcontent-ref %} ## Detailed set-up instructions PrestaShop is a web application. This means it needs to be installed on a web server to run, and that it needs a domain name that your visitors will use to access your store. ## Registering a domain name Before downloading or installing anything, you **need to provide a home for your PrestaShop online store**. That is made of two components: a **domain name**, and a **web server**. ### What's a domain name? A domain is the online identifier of your website, such as [`example.com`](http://example.com), [`myonlinestore.net` ](http://myonlineshop.net)or [`agreatbrand.store`](https://agreatbrand.store/). It is the **public face of your web server, and therefore, of your store.** You need to **buy a domain name for your store.** Some web hosting services might provide you with a domain name as many hosts offer a free domain with every new account. They might be free for a year, or for as long as you are a client of that web host. This makes it easier for you to get the full package (hosting + domain name) in one go. There can be an issue with host-provided domain names: if you find yourself not satisfied with the host's service, you will want to switch to a better host. **This means moving your files, data, and domain name to that other host.** The files and data are easy to move, but depending on the host, you might have a hard time getting your domain name back. Since your host bought the domain name for you, **technically the domain belongs to them**, and they can **either forbid you to transfer it to another host or make you pay for it.** Since the domain name is your brand, and your address on the web, **you must obey the web host's rules.** That is why it is often recommended to get your domain name from an independent domain name registrar (see: ). {% hint style="warning" %} Technically, **you can never buy a domain name; you can only rent it**, most of the time for a yearly fee. This gives you the right to use that domain name. **However, as soon as you stop paying for it, it is not yours anymore and anyone can grab it.** {% endhint %} In addition to paying for the domain name registration, you will also have to pay for web hosting. You remain free to move to a better host at any time, for no supplementary fee: you have to change the domain name’s DNS addresses. Within 24 hours, the change will spread worldwide. {% hint style="info" %} If you would instead get your domain name from an independent registrar, here are some that you can trust: * **Gandi:** [http://en.gandi.net](http://en.gandi.net/) * **Namecheap:** [http://www.namecheap.com](http://www.namecheap.com/) * **GoDaddy:** [https://www.godaddy.com](https://www.godaddy.com/) * **IONOS:** [https://www.ionos.com](https://www.ionos.com/) {% endhint %} ### Finding a host Now that you have a domain name, you **need to have it lead to PrestaShop**. This means that the PrestaShop files need to reside on a web server. You might have a web server of your own, but it is more likely that you have or will have your store hosted by an [Internet hosting service](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Internet_hosting_service), which provides you with an online home for a monthly or yearly fee. Before starting an online store, you will first need to **select a hosting provider**. Just about every web host can effectively handle the PrestaShop solution. However, **only a few hosting providers offer optimized servers for PrestaShop** (with 1-click install and an up-to-date version). You can find the list of the PrestaShop hosting partners [here](https://prestashop.com/prestashop-partners/?taxo_category_partner=hosting). {% hint style="info" %} When choosing your host, remember **it must provide you with support for:** * **PHP 8.1+**, which is the programming language with which PrestaShop is written, * **MySQL 5.7+**, which is the database system where PrestaShop stores all its data. Note that there are more requirements. See the **"Technical requirements"** section below. {% endhint %} ### Technical requirements PrestaShop is an application that runs on a web server and uses the PHP programming language. **It stores its data in a MySQL server.** [PHP](https://www.php.net/) is an open-source **programming language**, mainly used for web applications. Created in 1995, it has since become the most used programming language by web developers. It uses a C-like syntax, making it easy to learn. [MySQL](https://www.mysql.com/) is an open-source **database management system**. Also created in 1995, it's become the most used database system by web developers. It is based on the SQL language, the most widely used database language. No matter which hosting service you choose, **the following components will be installed on your web server:** * **System**: Unix, Linux, or Windows (Unix is highly recommended). * **Web server**: Apache Web server 2.4 or later (Apache 2.2 is compatible, but not recommended). * **PHP:** 8.1 or later. * **MySQL:** 5.7 or later. * **Server RAM:** At least `512MB`of RAM. {% hint style="info" %} PrestaShop can also work with [Microsoft's IIS Web server](https://www.iis.net/) 6.0 or later, and [Nginx](https://docs.nginx.com/nginx/admin-guide/web-server/) 1.0 or later. {% endhint %} ## Tools You will need two tools: * **a text editor** to edit text files, * **an FTP client** to transfer files from your machine to your server and vice-versa. ### **Text editor** Here are some well-known text editors, feel free to use whichever best suits your needs: * **Windows:** * Sublime Text: * **MacOS :** * Sublime Text: * BBEdit: * **Unix/Linux:** * Vim: * Emacs: {% hint style="warning" %} **Do not use a word processor** such as Microsoft Word or [OpenOffice](http://openoffice.org) Writer when editing text files. {% endhint %} ### **FTP client** **FTP** is short for "File Transfer Protocol", which is the standard way used to transfer files from a computer to a web host. #### Using Filezilla In this guide, we will use **Filezilla**, which is a great and free FTP client for Windows, MacOS, and Linux. {% hint style="info" %} **Download FileZilla** from and **install it.** Do not download FileZilla Server, only **FileZilla Client**! {% endhint %} Once FileZilla is installed, you will need to **configure it** with the connection parameters of your web server. Your host should have sent you these parameters. If not, ask them! Make sure to check your spam folder. You'll need these parameters: * **a hostname** or **an IP address**: the location of your hosting space's FTP server. * **a username**: your hosting account identifier, which is unique to you. * **a password**: a compulsory security measure. **Open** FileZilla, and open the **Site Manager tool**. You can do this in three different ways: * Press **Ctrl+S**, * Click the **"Open the Site Manager" icon**, at the top left corner, * Open the **"File" menu**, and select the **"Site Manager" option.** A window opens:

FileZilla's Site Manager page.

To **add your hosting space** to the Site Manager: 1. Click the **"New Site"** button. A new entry is created in the site list. Give it a recognizable name. 2. On the right side, in the **"General"** tab, enter the parameters your host provided you with (**Host**, **User**, and **Password**). You should not have to change the other default parameters unless your host tells you otherwise. 3. Once all the fields are properly filled, click the **"Connect"** button. This will save your site in the list and log you into your account so that you can make sure everything works right. {% hint style="info" %} If FileZilla does not suit you, here are a few other well-known FTP clients: * **Windows:** * CoreFTP: * WinSCP: * SmartFTP: * **Mac OS:** * Cyberduck: * Transmit: * Fetch: * **Unix/Linux:** * gFTP: * NcFTP: * Kasablanca: {% endhint %} ## Making a plan **You should decide right away where you want to host PrestaShop.** There are four possibilities relating to your domain name: * At the **root of the domain**: * In a **folder**: * In a **sub-domain**: * In a **folder of a sub-domain**: {% hint style="success" %} Thanks to the [multistore feature](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/advanced-parameters/multistore), you can have as many stores as necessary with a single installation of PrestaShop 9, each with its own specific domain name if necessary. You should take that into account when deciding what goes where. Whatever your plan is, the default store will always reside where PrestaShop itself is located. {% endhint %} ## Installing PrestaShop Now that all the requirements are in place, you're ready to begin installing PrestaShop! **➡️ Check out the installation guide here:** {% content-ref url="/pages/-MD-u9WRmjanUE835ori" %} [Installing PrestaShop](/v.9-documentation/getting-started/installing-prestashop) {% endcontent-ref %} {% hint style="success" %} *This page has been recently updated!* **🗣 What did you think of this article? Let us know!** Your feedback helps us improve PrestaShop's documentation for everyone! 🙌 You can use the emojis on the bottom right of this article to let us know what you think about this article ⬇️ {% endhint %} # Installing PrestaShop {% hint style="info" %} This chapter was written for those who intend to install PrestaShop on **their online web server.** \ If you wish to install PrestaShop on your own computer, you should first follow the instructions on this page: [Installing PrestaShop on your computer](/v.9-documentation/getting-started/installing-prestashop-computer)[.](https://docs.prestashop-project.org/v.8-documentation/v/english/getting-started/installing-prestashop-computer) If you have already read the instructions on that page, skip to the [**"Creating a database for your store"**](#creating-a-database-for-your-store) section of this current page. {% endhint %} ## Installation PrestaShop should not be hard to install. Once you've uploaded all your files on your web server, you should be able to start configuring your store in no less than 5 minutes in most cases: the installation process is very simple because the installer takes care of everything for you. Note that less experienced users might need between 10 and 20 minutes to complete the whole process. Before you get started, make sure you meet **all installation requirements:** * **you have enough server space at a hosting provider,** * **a domain name,** * **an FTP client,** * **a text editor.** Everything you need is listed on the **"What you need to get started"** page, available here: {% content-ref url="/pages/-MDydBVK7LqNfAZ7mOL3" %} [What you need to get started](/v.9-documentation/getting-started/what-you-need-to-get-started) {% endcontent-ref %} Our web hosting partner **IONOS** offers a 1-click install in order to save you time and get you started even faster. Using these can drastically reduce the installation time for inexperienced users: * [IONOS Hosting](https://www.ionos.com/ecommerce-solutions/prestashop-hosting?ac=OM.US.USs96K414029T7073a) You can also save time with our partner **InMotion**, and get PrestaShop pre-installed. It allows users with few technical skills to quickly start working on a scalable solution. * [InMotion Hosting](https://inmotion-hosting.evyy.net/c/1322143/260033/4222?u=https%3A%2F%2Fwww.inmotionhosting.com%2Fprestashop-hosting) Those web hosts mostly use the following script libraries: * [Installatron](http://installatron.com/apps?locale=en#cmd=browser\&display=prestashop) * [Softaculous](http://www.softaculous.com/apps/ecommerce/PrestaShop) Some of these scripts even support 1-click updates. Other hosts have their own installation scripts — check with your own host for more information. {% hint style="info" %} Be careful with 1-click updates provided by tools from hosting companies. It is recommended to check them on the copy of your store first. {% endhint %} ## Quick installation instructions Here's a quick set of instructions for those who are already comfortable with installing PHP/MySQL applications on a web server. If you need more details, you can find detailed instructions in the next section of this chapter. 1. **Download and unzip** the PrestaShop package if you haven't already. 2. **Create a database** for your PrestaShop store on your web server if possible. If no MySQL user has all privileges for accessing and modifying this database, you will need to create them. 3. **Upload** all available PrestaShop files to the chosen location on your web server, including the .zip file (it will unzip itself afterward). 4. **Run** the PrestaShop installation script by accessing the public URL for the chosen location in a web browser. This should be the URL where your uploaded PrestaShop files are available. 5. **Follow** the installer's instructions. 6. Once the installation is done, **delete the `/install` folder** and **write down a new name for your `/admin` folder,** which has been generated specifically for you (for security reasons). PrestaShop should now be installed and ready to be configured! Continue to the [First steps with PrestaShop 9](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/first-steps) chapter of the User Guide. ## Detailed instructions ### Downloading and unzipping the PrestaShop archive Starting with PrestaShop 9, the software download process has been centralized on the official website. To get the latest version of PrestaShop, visit [PrestaShop.com's Classic offer page](https://prestashop.com/prestashop-offers/classic/) and scroll to the download area.

PrestaShop Classic Offer release page.

Here, you can download the latest stable version, which is ready for all kinds of online stores. {% hint style="info" %} If you need to download any of the versions before version 9, go the [GitHub release page](https://github.com/PrestaShop/PrestaShop/releases) and find the version you wish to download. {% endhint %} On the **Classic offer page**, enter your email address, complete the short form, then click Download. The ZIP file will start downloading automatically. You should get a file named "prestashop\_edition\_classic\_version\_X.Y.Z.zip" (prestashop\_edition\_classic\_version\_9.1.0.zip for example, or an equivalent, depending on the version you download). The downloaded file is a zip archive. In order to continue, **you must uncompress the archive**. If your operating system does not natively support Zip files, you can download and install a dedicated tool, such as: | Windows | MacOS | | ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | |

7-Zip

|

iZip

| |

WinZip

|

WinZip

| |

WinRAR

| The recent MacOS versions allow you to unzip files natively. | Extract the content of the archive using your Zip utility to the location of your choice on your hard drive. You can extract it on your desktop if you wish. {% hint style="warning" %} **Do not upload a file named "prestashop\_edition\_classic\_version\_X.Y.Z.zip" directly to your web server**. **You must unzip it first.** {% endhint %} The Zip archive has a few items at its root : * **The "prestashop.zip":** which contains all the PrestaShop files that you will soon be uploading to your web server. * **The "Install\_PrestaShop.html" file:** opens the same page in your default browser. * **The index.php file:** launches the installation. {% hint style="info" %} "Install\_PrestaShop.html" **must not be uploaded on your web server.** {% endhint %} ### Uploading PrestaShop You should now have a hosting space at your disposal and a folder on your hard drive with the uncompressed PrestaShop archive. This step helps you upload the PrestaShop files on your hosting space. This is done by **connecting your computer to your server using a tool known as an "FTP client",** which you should have installed already. For this example, we will use FileZilla Client, a free FTP client, available here: [http://filezilla-project.org](http://filezilla-project.org/). 1. **Connect to your hosting space** using your FTP client, by using the connection details provided by your web host (if not, contact your host). 2. Once connected, **transfer the PrestaShop files** from your computer to your server. 3. In your FTP client, **browse your local folders** until you find the one that contains the PrestaShop files, and **keep it open** in the "Local site" section on the left, like this:
Local PrestaShop files visible in FileZilla. It's open in the "Local site" section.
4. In the "Remote site" section (on the right), **browse to the location where you want PrestaShop to be publicly available** (at the root of the domain, sub-folder, sub-domain, etc). This can change a lot, depending on both your host and your needs: #### **Your host:** * Some hosts may require you to place your files in a specific folder, such as `/htdocs`, `/public_html`, `/web`, `/www`, `/`[`yourdomainname.com`](http://yourdomainname.com), /domains/yourdomainname.com/public\_html/, etc. * Other hosts' FTP servers will simply log you directly into the proper upload space. #### **Your needs** * If you want your store to be **the main website for your domain name** (i.e., [http://www.example.com](http://www.example.com/)): * **Upload PrestaShop to the root folder** of the upload space (which may depend on the host). * If you want your store to be **in a sub-folder of your domain name** (i.e., [http://www.example.com/store](http://www.example.com/shop)): * **Create a folder** through FileZilla (right-click and choose "Create directory"), then **upload PrestaShop to that folder.** * If you want your store to be **in a sub-domain of your domain name** (i.e., [http://store.example.com](http://shop.example.com/)) 1. **Create a sub-domain.** 2. Once created, **browse to the sub-domain's folder**, and **upload PrestaShop there**. {% hint style="info" %} This step depends on your host. You might be able to create a sub-domain by adding a new folder with your FTP client, or you might have to create the sub-domain through your host's administration panel. Read your host's support documentation first. {% endhint %} On FileZilla's left side, you should now have the local folder where you keep the PrestaShop files previously extracted from the Zip archive. On the right side, you'll find the destination location. If you haven't uploaded it yet, it should be straightforward: 1. **Select** all PrestaShop release files from the local folder (you can use Ctrl+A on Windows or Cmd+A on Mac), 2. Either **drag & drop** your three files to the remote folder or **right-click** on the selection and choose **"Upload"** in the context menu. ### Creating a database for your store Before you install PrestaShop, you need to make sure your MySQL/MariaDB server has a database ready for PrestaShop's data. If not, **you must create one.** Creating a database can be done using any database administration tool. We will be using the free phpMyAdmin tool (). It should come pre-installed on most web hosting services. {% hint style="info" %} Some hosts prefer customers to use a graphic control panel, such as cPanel, Plesk, DirectAdmin, or a custom-made one. Make sure you read your host's documentation about handling MySQL databases, and create a database for your store by following their specific explanations. {% endhint %} **To create a database, connect to phpMyAdmin** using your account credentials, which your host provided you with. It should be accessible through a standard URL, tied to your domain name, or the host's domain name. ![phpMyAdmin's Dabatases page.](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/Cekm48oElknHC888xhqB/54264239.png) In the left column, you can see the databases currently available on your MySQL server. {% hint style="info" %} Some of them should be left alone because they are either used by phpMyAdmin or by the host, like **`phpmyadmin, mysql, information_schema, performance_schema`** and others. Read your host's documentation to know if one of these can be used as a default database. {% endhint %} 1. To **create a brand new database,** go to the "Database" tab and use the central form untitled **"Create new database"**. 2. Simply **enter a unique name**, and click **"Create"**. The name of the database will be added to the list on the left. You can now use your database to store PrestaShop's data. ### Launching the auto-installer Here comes the part where it all comes together: installing PrestaShop. The installation process is quite fast and straightforward, as it is streamlined by PrestaShop's auto-installer. You should be able to browse through it in a handful of minutes. Make sure to read each page thoroughly so as not to miss any information. To launch the installer: 1. **Browse to PrestaShop's location** on your web server: the script will automatically detect that PrestaShop is not yet installed, and will take you to the auto-installer. 2. At the same time, this will unzip the prestashop.zip file that you uploaded. 3. Now all the PrestaShop files are available on your webserver. {% hint style="info" %} Did you encounter any issues while trying to install PrestaShop? Find help using the Support page, available here: {% endhint %} From there on, you just have to read, click, and fill out a few forms. There are **6 steps**. At the top of the page, the installation assistant gives you a visualization of where you are in the process: the gray circles turn into green check marks after each step is completed. ## **Step 1: Welcome page** This page is a quick intro to the installation process. You can choose the language in which the installer will display its instructions.

PrestaShop's Installation Assistant, step 1: Welcome to the PrestaShop Installer.

**Select the language** in which you wish the installer to be, then click the **Next** button. This will also **set the default language for your PrestaShop** installation. Other languages will also be available for you to enable later on. {% hint style="info" %} You also get a link to the documentation site () and a link to our project's blog. You can visit the project's blog by going to . {% endhint %} ## **Step 2: PrestaShop's licenses** This second page is a simple requirement. PrestaShop is free and distributed under a certain set of open-source licenses. You simply cannot use this software if you disagree with the terms of the licenses, and this step requires you to explicitly acknowledge them.

PrestaShop's Installation Assistant, step 2: License Agreements.

**You must agree to both licenses** in order to install PrestaShop. To access the next step, you must check the **"I agree to the above terms and conditions"** box, then click **Next.** If you do not explicitly agree to the licenses, you cannot install PrestaShop as you will not be able to click on the Next button. {% hint style="info" %} Learn more about PrestaShop's licenses: * ***Open Software License 3.0*** for PrestaShop itself, which you can also read at . * ***Academic Free License 3.0*** for the modules and themes, which you can also read at . {% endhint %} ## **Step 3: System compatibility** The third page makes a quick check of all the server parameters on your host. In most cases, you will not see this page, because if nothing wrong is found, you are directly taken to the fourth page ("Store information"). If so, you can still go have a look at the third page by clicking on the "System compatibility" link in the left sidebar. {% hint style="info" %} If something goes wrong during the server check that happens in the third step, the installer displays the "System compatibility" page, where you can see all the checks that failed. {% endhint %} ### **System compatibility** This page checks that everything is OK with your server configuration: PHP settings, permissions on files and folders, third-party tools, etc.

PrestaShop's Installation Assistant, step 3: Checking system compatibility.

{% hint style="info" %} If anything goes wrong, the installer stops you here: you can see the few technical details that need fixing, be it changing the PHP configuration or updating the file permissions. {% endhint %}

PrestaShop's Installaton Assistant, step 3: System compatibility failed.

Here is a list of the checks that are performed during this third step: | PrestaShop checks: | How can I fix it? (check for...) | | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- | ------------------------------------------------------------------------ | | Is the minimum or newer compatible PHP version installed? | webserver | | Can PrestaShop upload files? | php.ini file (`file_uploads`) | | Can PrestaShop create new files and folders? | File browser / FTP client / command line | | Is the GD Library installed? | php.ini file (`extension=`[`php_gd2.so`](http://php_gd2.so)) | | Is MySQL support is on? | php.ini file (`extension=`[`php_pdo_mysql.so`](http://php_pdo_mysql.so)) | | Recursive write permission on \~/config/ | File browser / FTP client / command line | | Recursive write permission on \~/cache/ | File browser / FTP client / command line | | Recursive write permission on \~/log/ | File browser / FTP client / command line | | Recursive write permission on \~/img/ | File browser / FTP client / command line | | Recursive write permission on \~/mails/ | File browser / FTP client / command line | | Recursive write permission on \~/modules/ | File browser / FTP client / command line | | Recursive write permission on \~/override/ | File browser / FTP client / command line | | Recursive write permission on \~/themes/default\_theme\_name/lang/ | File browser / FTP client / command line | | Recursive write permission on \~/themes/default\_theme\_name/pdf/lang/ | File browser / FTP client / command line | | Recursive write permission on \~/themes/default\_theme\_name/cache/ | File browser / FTP client / command line | | Recursive write permission on \~/translations/ | File browser / FTP client / command line | | Recursive write permission on \~/upload/ | File browser / FTP client / command line | | Recursive write permission on \~/download/ | File browser / FTP client / command line | | Recursive write permission on \~/app/config/ | File browser / FTP client / command line | | Recursive write permission on \~/app/Resources/translations/ | File browser / FTP client / command line | | Can PrestaShop open external URLs? | [php.in](http://php.in) file (`allow_url_fopen`) | | Is PHP's "register global" option off? | php.ini file (`register_globals`) | | Is GZIP compression activated? | .htaccess file | | Is the Mcrypt extension available? | php.ini file (see ) | | Is PHP's "magic quotes" option deactivated? | php.ini file (`magic_quotes_gpc`) | | Is the Dom extension loaded? | `--enable-dom` compile time option | | Is the PDO MySQL extension loaded? | php.ini file (`extension=`[`php_pdo_mysql.so`](http://php_pdo_mysql.so)) | ### Updating file permissions {% hint style="info" %} Changing the PHP configuration can only be done on a case-by-case basis (depending on your level of access to your server) and, therefore, can't be explained in full detail. If your server doesn't meet requirements consider contacting hosting support. {% endhint %} {% hint style="warning" %} On most servers, you shouldn't be forced to change any permissions. Contact hosting support first to consult the configuration if you must do it. {% endhint %} Updating the file permissions, however, is easier to explain: Permissions are the way a filesystem grants access rights to specific users or user groups, controlling their ability to view or make changes to files and folders. The installer needs to make several changes to the files that you uploaded, and if the filesystem does not allow for these changes through proper permissions, then the installer cannot complete its process. If the installer shows that some files or folders do not have the right permissions, you have to change these permissions yourself. This will require you to access your files on your web server and, therefore, use your FTP client (such as FileZilla) or the command line. **To update your file permissions,** 1. **Log in** to your server account using your FTP client 2. **Browse** to PrestaShop's folder, and find the folders that are marked by the installer as **needing a permission change.** ### Updating CHMOD Changing file or folder permission on a Unix/Linux system is called a **"CHMOD"**. It's named after the command of the same name (see: ). If you wish to learn more, you can find an explanation on file permissions here:
Giving files or folders a "write permission" is called " a "CHMOD 775". The name can sometimes vary depending on your host. {% hint style="info" %} Some hosts might require you to use CHMOD 777, although **it is not recommended** for anything more than a one-time need. \ If you have to use CHMOD 777 in order to install PrestaShop, make sure to switch to a safer setting (for instance, 775 for folders and 664 for files) once you are done installing. Read your host's documentation carefully. {% endhint %} Thanks to FileZilla (and most FTP clients), you do not have to use any Unix command. Most FTP clients make it possible to change permissions easily and graphically. Once you have found a file or folder that needs such a change, * **Right-click on it**, and in the context menu choose **"File permissions"**. It will open a small window. ![FileZilla's "Change file attributes" page.](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/ZQQUxA1QimNsugLTjg4G/23038066%20\(2\)%20\(2\).png) Depending on your server configuration (which you can't always edit), you will need to check both the **"Read"** and **"Execute"** columns of boxes, and at least the **"Owner"** and **"Group"** rows for the **"Write"** column. {% hint style="danger" %} Some hosts might require you to have the public "Write" box checked. Be careful with that: **it is rarely a good thing to give anyone permission to edit your PrestaShop installation's content.** {% endhint %} Some folders might need to have all their files and sub-folders change permissions too. In that case, check the **"Recurse into subdirectories"** box. While changing permissions in your FTP client, you should regularly check that you have made the correct changes by running the installer's compatibility checks again. Click the installer's **"Refresh these settings"** button as often as necessary. **Once all indicators are green**, you can click **"Next"**. If you cannot have them all green, at least make sure the installer displays the **"PrestaShop compatibility with your system environment has been verified!"** message at the top of the page. ## **Step 4: Store information** This is where you can start customizing your store. You can give it a name, choose its main activity, and indicate the personal information of the store owner (which has legal bindings in most countries). {% hint style="warning" %} **Do not use a colon in your store's name,** as it might prevent some features from working (for instance, e-mail sending might fail). You can replace the colon with **a dash** if you need to have two sections in the title. For instance, use "MyStore – The best place for items to buy" instead of "MyStore: The best place for items to buy". {% endhint %}

PrestaShop's Installation Assistant, step 4: Information about your Store.

This is also where you choose the password to log in to the administration panel of your store - choose wisely so that you will remember it, but make sure it is secure too! Click **"Next"** to continue. ## Step 5: Content of your store This page provides a form that allows you to choose your theme, which modules to install with your store and opt-in or out of demo products.
## **Step 6: System configuration** This page contains a form that enables you to tell PrestaShop where the database server is, which database it should use, and some other details. All these details should be provided to you by your webhost.

PrestaShop's Installation Assistant, step 6: Database configuration.

**Fill all the fields** with the database connection information provided by your web host: * **Database server address:** The hostname of your MySQL server. It can be tied to your domain name (i.e. [http://sql.example.com](http://sql.example.com/)), tied to your web host (i.e. [http://mysql2.alwaysdata.com](http://mysql2.alwaysdata.com/)), or simply be an IP address (i.e. 46.105.78.185). * **Database name:** The name of the database where you want PrestaShop to store its data. This is either an existing database on your MySQL server or the one that you created using phpMyAdmin (or any other SQL tool) in the ["Creating a database for your shop"](#creating-a-database-for-your-store) section of this guide. * **Database login:** The name of the MySQL user that has access to your database. * **Database password:** The user's MySQL password. * **Tables prefix:** The prefix for your database tables. The default prefix is "`ps_`", resulting in the PrestaShop SQL tables having names such as "`ps_cart`" or "`ps_customer`". {% hint style="info" %} **We strongly recommend customizing your database prefix instead of using the default one.** If you need to install more than one instance of PrestaShop on the same database, then **you must use a different prefix for each installation**. However, we do recommend that you create one database per installation of PrestaShop if your web host allows it. Better yet: make one installation of PrestaShop, and enable the [multistore feature](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/advanced-parameters/multistore) in order to manage many stores from the same PrestaShop back office. {% endhint %} * **Drop existing tables:** This is only available in "Dev mode". When re-installing PrestaShop, you can choose to drop the existing PrestaShop database tables in order to start with a clean slate. 1. Click the **"Test your database connection now!"** button in order to check that you used the correct server information. 2. Click **"Next".** The installation assistant will start configuring your store, creating and populating the database tables, etc. This might take a few minutes, don't close this window.

PrestaShop's Installation Assistant, step 6: Database tables creation.

The installer does the following: * Create the configuration files and fill them with your settings. * Create the **database tables.** * Create the **default store** with its default languages. * Populate the **database tables.** * Configure the **store's information.** * Install the **selected modules**. * Install **demo data** (if you opt-in to it, products, categories, customers, CMS pages, etc.). * Install the **theme.** Once it is done, your store is installed and ready to be configured! ## Completing the installation As you can read right on the final page of the installation process, **there are a couple of last actions left before you can leave the installer.**

PrestaShop's Installation Assistant, final step: Installation complete.

An easy way to improve your installation's security is to delete some key files and folders. This is done using your FTP client, directly on the server. The items you can delete are: * The "/install" folder **(you must delete this folder).** * The "/docs" folder ***(you can delete this folder)***, unless you need to test the import tool with the sample import files that this folder contains. * The "[README.md](https://www.makeareadme.com/)" file ***(you can delete this file*****)**. Click on the **"Manage your store"** button to access your administration area. {% hint style="info" %} Another way to secure your installation is to use a custom name for the administration folder: change the "admin" folder for something unique to you, such as "4dmin-1537" or "MySecUReD4dm1n". {% endhint %} \ **Write down the new name for your new "admin" folder:** from now on, you will access your administration pages using this address. Finally, to shut any potentially malicious doors, use your FTP client to update the files and folders permissions to 664, or 666 if your host requires it. If it turns out low access rights prevent some modules from working, you should set permissions back to 755. ## **Congratulations, your PrestaShop installation is now complete!** To continue customizing your PrestaShop store, **log in to the PrestaShop back office** by going to your newly-renamed "admin" folder. You're free to: * [Fill your catalog with products](https://docs.prestashop-project.org/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-products), * Add [carriers](https://docs.prestashop-project.org/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/managing-shipping/carriers) and [shipping costs](https://docs.prestashop-project.org/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/managing-shipping), * Add [brands](https://docs.prestashop-project.org/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-brands) and [suppliers](https://docs.prestashop-project.org/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-suppliers), * Change your [theme](https://docs.prestashop-project.org/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/customizing-store-design/theme-and-logo). And configure the many settings to suit your tastes and needs. See the user guide's "[First steps with PrestaShop 9](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/first-steps)" chapter for more information. {% hint style="warning" %} You should regularly[ **back up your database and files**](https://devdocs.prestashop-project.org/9/basics/keeping-up-to-date/backup/), ideally on more than one computer, in case of problems related to hardware or security. {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" %} *This page has been recently updated!* **🗣 What did you think of this article? Let us know!** Your feedback helps us improve PrestaShop's documentation for everyone! 🙌 You can use the emojis on the bottom right of this article to let us know what you think about this article ⬇️ {% endhint %} # Installing PrestaShop 9 on your computer You may wish to install PrestaShop on your local machine, either to test it before investing money in a server and domain name — or to customize your store locally before you push your modifications to the PrestaShop installation that you may already have set up online. Locally installing any web application requires that you first install the adequate environment (namely the Apache web server), the PHP language interpreter, the MySQL database server, and ideally the phpMyAdmin tool. This is known as an **AMP: Apache+MySQL+PHP**. AMPs exist for many operating systems, which provides another letter for the acronym: WAMP (Windows+Apache+MySQL+PHP), MAMP (Mac OS X+...), and LAMP (Linux+...). ## Choosing an AMP package This is a bit technical. Luckily, there are many pre-built packages that you can easily install. It does not prevent you from having to get technical here and there, but they do provide a huge help. Since all of the items packaged are open-source, these installers are most of the time free. Here is a selection of free AMP installers: * EasyPHP: (Windows) * MAMP: [https://www.mamp.info/](https://www.mamp.info/en/windows/) (MacOS) * WampServer: (Windows) * XAMPP: (Windows, MacOS, Linux, Solaris) Choose the package that you feel the most comfortable with, and launch it. ## Checking that everything works {% hint style="info" %} Before continuing this PrestaShop installation tutorial, make sure that all of the components in your AMP package work. {% endhint %} * **The web server should be up and running:** You should be able to access it through your browser, by typing "127.0.0.1" in the address bar. [`http://127.0.0.1`](http://127.0.0.1/) is the "localhost", meaning "your computer": it is a loopback address that directs the browser to your local web server.\ As a [`http://127.0.0.1`](http://127.0.0.1/) and [`http://localhost`](http://localhost/) are synonymous: you can use one or the other interchangeably, and both send you to the root folder of your local web server. Some web servers might not be able to start because their connexion ports (typically, port 80) are already used by another application. * **The database server should be up and running**. MySQL is where all of PrestaShop's data is stored. The AMP package should provide you with a clear indicator of whether MySQL is running or not. * **The phpMyAdmin tool should be accessible**. This is the web application that helps you handle data stored in MySQL. Its location depends on which AMP packaging you chose: it can be found at [`http://127.0.0.1/phpmyadmin`](http://127.0.0.1/phpmyadmin) (XAMPP, WampServer, MAMP), [`http://127.0.0.1/mysql`](http://127.0.0.1/mysql) (EasyPHP), or maybe at another location. Check your package's documentation – it might even provide a phpMyAdmin button that would open the correct URL in your browser. ## Finding the root folder of the local web server Once you have checked that the package is correctly installed and that all of its parts are running, you need to find the **root folder of your local web server**. The root folder is the local folder where you will place your application's files. It can be compared to the root folder of your online server, only its content is accessed with [`http://127.0.0.1`](http://127.0.0.1/). The actual local location of the folder depends greatly on the AMP package, and can be customized: * **EasyPHP:** `C:\easyphp\www` * **MAMP:** `/Applications/MAMP/htdocs/` * **WampServer:** `C:\wamp\www` * **XAMPP:** `C:\xampp\htdocs` or `/Applications/xampp/htdocs` ## Finding the MySQL user information Finally, you need to know the root username and password for MySQL to install PrestaShop. {% hint style="info" %} **Most packages use the username "root" with an empty password**, including EasyPHP, MAMP, WampServer, and XAMPP. Read your package's documentation! {% endhint %} ## A final note before the installation tutorial With all that clear and done, you can follow up on the rest of this Getting Started guide and start installing PrestaShop. When you install PrestaShop locally, keep in mind that: * Files are **not to be uploaded via an FTP software** (such as Filezilla) **to a web server**: simply move them to the correct local folder, as indicated above. * You **do not have to create a local domain name**: PrestaShop is available through the loopback address indicated above, which is either [`http://localhost`](http://localhost/) or [`http://127.0.0.1`](http://127.0.0.1/) . PrestaShop itself is available at this address by adding its folder's name, for instance, [`http://localhost/prestashop`](http://localhost/prestashop) or [`http://127.0.0.1/prestashop`](http://127.0.0.1/prestashop) if PrestaShop is in the `/prestashop/` subfolder of the local root folder. When accessing this address for the first time, you should be automatically redirected to PrestaShop's install, at either [`http://localhost/prestashop/install`](http://localhost/prestashop/install) or [`http://127.0.0.1/prestashop/install`](http://127.0.0.1/prestashop/install) .
{% hint style="success" %} Have you read everything? Now follow the regular installation guide, starting directly at the "Creating a database for your store" section: [Installing PrestaShop](/v.9-documentation/getting-started/installing-prestashop). {% endhint %} {% hint style="success" %} *This page has been recently updated!* **🗣 What did you think of this article? Let us know!** Your feedback helps us improve PrestaShop's documentation for everyone! 🙌 You can use the emojis on the bottom right of this article to let us know what you think about this article ⬇️ {% endhint %} # Installing PrestaShop 9 using the command-line script PrestaShop also has an installer for command-line installations. ## What is it? {% hint style="info" %} This special installer makes it possible to install PrestaShop without the need to use a web browser: simply put the content of the zip archive on your web server, and you can install PrestaShop through your command-line interface (CLI). {% endhint %} Any CLI software can be used, as long as you can use it to interact with the server's commands: Bash, Windows PowerShell, OS X Terminal, PuTTY, etc. The point of having a CLI installer in addition to the regular in-browser installer is to give this option to cater to some advanced users, who often prefer command-line interfaces as they tend to provide a more concise and powerful means to control a program or operating system. ## How do I use it? The CLI installer is easy to use: from your terminal, **go to the `/install` (or `/install-dev`) folder** (meaning you have previously unzipped the prestashop.zip file), and **start the script with this command:** ``` $ php index_cli.php ``` This will display the various available options. ![The Options page on the CLI installer.](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/CMrgPtE0tcFnjpeMVEgg/54264260%20\(1\).png) All the options from the regular in-browser installer are available, with their default value listed. **Almost all default values can be left as is** because you can edit them all from the PrestaShop back office once the installation is done. {% hint style="info" %} The e-mail and password are the ones used to create the administrator's back office account. {% endhint %} To start the installation, **you need to 5 arguments:** * **domain**. The location where you want your store to appear. * **db\_server**. The database server address. * **db\_name**. The name of the database you want to use. * **db\_user**. The username for the database you want to use. * **db\_password**. The password for the database username used above. For instance: ``` $ php index_cli.php --domain=example.com --db_server=sql.example.com --db_name=prestashop --db_user=root --db_password=123456789 ``` ![The CLI installer showing an "Installation successful" message.](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/p4PeCMCiAHp0UuDyqc5D/53641264.png) {% hint style="info" %} If you also set the **`--email`** value to your own address, a recap e-mail will be sent to you once the installation is done. {% endhint %} ## List of arguments Here is the **list of arguments** for `index_cli.php` as of version 9: | Name | Default setting | Description | | ---------------- | -------------------- | ----------------------------------------------------- | | --step | process | | | --language | en | language iso code | | --timezone | localhost | | | --domain | localhost | | | --db\_server | localhost | | | --db\_user | root | | | --db\_password | (blank) | | | --db\_name | prestashop | | | --db\_clear | 1 (true) | Drop existing tables | | --db\_create | 0 (false) | Create the database if it does not exist yet | | --prefix | ps\_ | | | --engine | InnoDB | InnoDB/MyISAM | | --name | PrestaShop | Name of the store | | --activity | 0 | | | --country | fr | | | --firstname | John | | | --lastname | Doe | | | --password | 0123456789 | | | --email | | | | --license | 0 (false) | Show PrestaShop's license | | --newsletter | 1 (true) | Subscribe administrator to PrestaShop's newsletter | | --send\_email | 1 (true) | Send an email to the administrator after installation | | --all\_languages | 0 (false) | Install all the existing languages on the shop | |

--ssl

| 0 (false) | (From PS 1.7.4) Enable HTTPS on the shop | # Uninstalling PrestaShop 9 PrestaShop is very easy to uninstall: 1. **Delete all of PrestaShop's files** and folders on your web server, using your FTP client. 2. **Delete all the `ps_` tables** from PrestaShop's database, using phpMyAdmin. {% hint style="danger" %} **You will lose all information registered to your store: customers, orders, invoices, products, etc.** \ This cannot be undone! Make sure you have a proper backup of all your data. {% endhint %} # Misc. information This page lists additional information you may need to install PrestaShop 9. ## Keep a test version at hand! {% hint style="info" %} Right after you have completed setting up your store, but just before officially opening it to the public, we strongly recommend that you install a local test version on your personal computer, MAMP for Mac, or LAMP for Linux, or, for Windows, it is recommended to use [WSL2](https://learn.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/wsl/install), or elsewhere on your hosting server. {% endhint %} This second instance will be useful as a pre-production environment in which you can carry out all future changes to your PrestaShop store without affecting the live version. This way, if an error occurs, your live store remains intact and untouched. After you have confirmed that your test version works as it should, copy the test version over to the live version. It is best to do this after peak usage hours, and with your store properly and temporarily disabled from within the PrestaShop back office. To do so, you can use [Maintenance ](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/shop-parameters/general-settings/maintenance)mode. ## Checking for the GD library The [GD library](https://libgd.github.io/) enables PrestaShop to rework images that you upload, especially resizing them. On a default installation of PHP, the GD Library should be turned on, but if that's not the case for your installation, here are the standard Windows instructions: 1. In the root directory of your PHP folder, **open the `php.ini` file.** 2. **Uncomment the `extension=php_gd2.dll` line** by deleting the ";" at the start of the line. This line should be located about halfway through the file, in the middle of a long list of extensions. 3. **Restart the PHP services**. {% hint style="info" %} If you have no access to the `php.ini` file (which is often the case in shared hosting), contact your host about your hosting needs. {% endhint %} # User Guide PrestaShop 9 PrestaShop presents a comprehensive, intuitive user administration panel, and gives you hundreds of standard functions that can be adapted or personalized in order to respond to all of your needs. This user guide will help you familiarize yourself with all of PrestaShop’s features. You will also be able to efficiently manage your PrestaShop site. While the majority of it is aimed at store owners, the first chapter serves as an introduction to the front office interface, which can be helpful to everyone. You can post all of your questions directly on our forum: Chapters in this guide: * [Training](broken://pages/-MD-vw_9pg8FACcn_elO) * [Customizing your store](broken://pages/-MD-vwZjQdO1fJLsQPja) * [Connecting to the PrestaShop back office](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/connecting-back-office) * [Discovering the Administration Area](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/discovering-administration-area) * [First steps with PrestaShop 8](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/first-steps) * [Selling with PrestaShop](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling) * [Managing your Orders](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-orders) * [Managing your Product Catalog](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog) * [Managing your Customers](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-customers) * [Managing the Customer Service](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-customer-service) * [Understanding your statistics](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/understanding-statistics) * [Improving your store](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop) * [Managing your Modules](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/managing-modules) * [Customizing your store design](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/customizing-store-design) * [Managing Shipping](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/managing-shipping) * [Managing Payments](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/managing-payments) * [Going International](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/going-international) * [Configuring your store](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop) * [Configuring your Shop Parameters](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/shop-parameters) * [Configuring Advanced Parameters](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/advanced-parameters) * [Managing Multiple stores](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/managing-multiple-stores) * [The multistore interface](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/managing-multiple-stores/multistore-interface) * [Creating a new store group](broken://pages/-MD-zRuje4ax2Cq8uGfE) * [Creating a new store](broken://pages/-MD-zRuijCviw2JrnmVY) * [Setting a store's URL](broken://pages/-MD-zRuXAT5VnKoxmdJe) * [Sample Usages and Specifics](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/managing-multiple-stores/sample-usages-and-specifics) * [Complying with the European legislation](broken://pages/-MD-zRuab3WUV9HonL8o) * [Browsing the front office](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/browsing-front-office) * [Complying with the GDPR](broken://pages/-MD-zRuboH3Co1teiGgj) # Connecting to the PrestaShop back office The PrestaShop back office is the name used to describe the administration panel of your PrestaShop store in this user guide. You will spend most of your time in this panel, as everything that the user sees is handled directly through the back office: adding/editing/removing products, handling carriers, building packs, creating vouchers, keeping contact with customers, improving your shop, etc. During the install process, the `/admin` folder is renamed into something unique to your store (for instance, `/admin091anufki`), for security reasons. Use that new folder name to access your store (for example: ). The name change is done automatically by PrestaShop. Be careful to memorize that folder name the first time you access it after the installation! You will see the login page for your store's control panel.
Enter the e-mail address and password that you registered with when installing PrestaShop. Click on the "Log In" button, and you are taken to the back office's dashboard, a sort of welcome page for this control panel.
From this step onward, you can begin to configure your shop and sell products to your customers. Read the next chapter of this user guide, named "[Discovering the Administration Area](http://doc.prestashop.com/display/PS17/Discovering+the+Administration+Area)", to understand all the various sections of the back office. # First steps with PrestaShop 9 ## First steps with PrestaShop 9 You have to make sure every part of your future online store is properly set up, secured, validated and ready for business. PrestaShop is a very complete tool, and the number of possibilities can feel overwhelming. This chapter will therefore lead you through some basic actions to perform in order to set up your store before the big launch. A lot can and must be done before you launch your store, but these steps are the essential configuration steps of any store. ### Deactivate your store We will consider that you are still within the first hour following your installation of PrestaShop, in a single-store instance. Deactivating your shop means making sure that no one can access it while you are busy making changes, creating products, settings prices and taxes, installing payment modules and a new theme, setting carriers... This is called "putting your store in maintenance mode". ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/kXVO8o5MBEdabkMv4WTk/51185217%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) In your back office, go the "Shop Parameters / General" page. Maintenance options are on the second tab and it features three simple settings: * **Enable Store**. Simply set it to "No", and your front-end will display the maintenance page to your visitors, which simply states that your store will soon be back online. * **Maintenance IP**. This is where you must put your own IP address, so that you can still get access to your front page, and browse your store as if it was available to all. This is a must-do every time you put your store in maintenance mode, as you will always need to browse your front-end so as to make sure everything is in place as intended. \ Simply click on the "Add my IP" button. You can add more IP addresses by separating them with commas. * **Custom maintenance text**. You can display a message of your own on the maintenance page, to inform your visitors when the site will be back for instance.\
If you have already decided what your theme and products are, you can simply put your store in Catalog mode. This means that customers can browse your shop, but no price will be displayed, and they won't be able to add anything to their cart until you disable the Catalog mode. You can activate the Catalog mode by going to the "Shop Parameters" > "Products Settings" page, where it is the first option. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/JJvEpUno0wt8DVNWMSpV/51185218.png) ### Delete the content of the default store The default installation features a handful of products – mainly women's clothing. Their only use is to help you explore the organization of a real store. After you've learned the intricacies of the ties between products, categories, orders and customers, you should delete all these items in order to start your store with a clean slate. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/ALfBp7AQmMQAhJngenix/51185219%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) You must therefore delete all the default data, which means: * products and their... * categories * attributes * features * manufacturers * suppliers * image mappings * tags * orders * order messages * customers * customers shopping carts * carriers * price ranges * weight ranges * contact & stores (delete or adapt to your business' needs) * Pages (delete or adapt to your business' needs) ### Configure your store's information Now that you have a clean store, you can start making it your own, and that implies setting everything up to your likings, starting with your personal information and your preferences. #### The store's basic settings You should pay attention to the following settings, most of which are important because they are displayed in the front office, and therefore in plain sight of your customers. Some of these settings require you to configure a module instead of changing one of PrestaShop's preferences. Configuring a module is easy: 1. Go to the "Installed Modules" page under the "Modules" menu. 2. Type the name of the module (or part of it) in the module search box. It should display results as you type. 3. When the module is found, click its "Configure" button, and follow the instructions. For each module presented here, you should read their documentation for more information. | Setting | Description | Where to find it | | ---------------------- | --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- | | Store name | Defines your brand, most notably on search engines (Google, Yahoo!, Bing...). | "Shop Parameters" menu, "Contact" page, "Stores" tab, then in the "Contact details" section, edit the "Store name" option. | | Store logo |

Defines your brand visually. The default logo says "Classic", which is the name of the default theme.
Displayed at the top left of every page of your store, as well as in your invoices and other automatic e-mails.

| "Design" menu, "Theme & Logo" page, "Your current theme" section, then change the various default images to your logo. | | Default store currency | The currency in which you want to set the default price for your products. |

"International" menu, "Localization" page, "Configuration" section.
If the currency is not available, you must import a localization pack for its country first: use the "Import a localization pack" tool from the same page.

| | Store information | Several blocks presenting the phone number for your store, your contact address and the email for your store. These are displayed at various places in the front-offices. |

The information comes from "Shop Parameters" menu, "Contact" page, "Stores" tab, then in the "Contact details" section.

To disable it, refer to the "Contact information" module.

| | Image slider |

The slider presents several images, scrolling one after the other. It is a strong visual signature for your store and products.
Usually placed front and center of the homepage

| "Image slider" module. | | Pages |

The content of static pages, such as "About Us", "Delivery", "Legal Notice", "Terms and Conditions", and "Secure Payment". Some of them have default content, which you should adapt to your business; some others are empty, and you should paste your own text.
Displayed in the "Information" section of the footer.

| "Design" menu, "pages" page, then edit and create pages at will. | | Social networks |

A block presenting several icons to follow your company on social media. It won't display by default, so make sure you enter your social media links on the module.
When active, displays in the footer, right column.

| "Social media follow links" module. | | Social media sharing | On each product page, 4 buttons to share the page's URL on social media: Facebook, Twitter, Google + and Pinterest. | "Social media share buttons" module. | | Top menu | The top of the default theme uses a top menu to indicate categories that the visitor can go to, as well as links to other locations. | "Main menu" module. | | Reassurance | On the product page, a block allows you to display some reassurance details. Use it to give some details about your return policy ("Free returns!"), your security policy ("Secured payments"), etc., so that visitors will feel it's safe to order from your store. | "Customer reassurance" module. | | Homepage content | The default theme contains a lot of demo content: texts, images, links, etc. If you intend on using that theme for your own store instead of buying your theme, you should make sure to remove all the default content first. |

"Banner" module: change the image at the bottom of the home page.

"Custom text blocks" module: display your own messages at the bottom of the home page, below the banner.

Other modules available in "Installed Modules", "Theme modules" section will help you define the various settings for your front office, make sure you check them all!

| | Legal compliance | Some countries require you to give specific information to your customers, regarding your various policies. The "Legal compliance" module is here to help. | Please read the "[Complying with the European legislation](http://doc.prestashop.com/display/PS17/Complying+with+the+European+legislation)" page to know more about the changes you should make. | These are the most visible default settings on your front end – at least with the default theme.\ The "Where to find it" column enables you to see where you can find the interface to change these aspects of your store. This user guide will provide you with more details for each interface. #### Store languages PrestaShop is able to work with many languages, both in the front office and the back office. As soon as more than one language is enabled in your back office, each back office text field is accompanied with a language code selector, which indicates the current language, and which you can click in order to choose another language in which to write that field's content. The product page is functioning a bit differently. You won't find a language selector for each text field, but rather a general language selector at the top of the page. Once you've selected a language you can then change all the contents in this language. Make sure you're editing the right one! By default, PrestaShop is installed with two languages: the one used when installing the software, and the one attached to the default country at installation (if different). To manage the currently installed languages, go to the "Localization / Languages" page from the "International" menu. It presents you with a table of the available languages. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/VEffoewcd4QXj4u6jO1C/51185233%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) The currently enabled language(s) have a green check mark, while the others have a red cross. Click on a checkmark to disable the selected language; click on a cross to enable it back. You can install and enable many languages if you think your store needs them, but be aware that you will have to translate your content for all of the enabled languages: product names, descriptions, tags, category names and descriptions, static content (pages), module settings, etc. You can easily import many more languages in the "International / Translation" page ("Add/update a language), and then enable them in the "Localization / Languages" page. #### Employees information Should you have people helping you with your store (whether they are your family, your friends, or paid employees), you should make sure to create an employee account for each of them – if only to know who has performed which recent action. The other advantage is that you can give them specific profiles and specific access rights to the administration pages: for instance, you might not want everyone to have access to your statistics, your invoices or your payment settings.\ You can create as many profiles as needed. To create a new employee account, go to the "Advanced Parameters" menu, "Team" page, and click the "Add new employee" button. Give it a name, such as "Martin Doe" or "Shipping handler", and save. \ An account can be used for as many people as needed – but we do advise you to create one for each helping person. Now that you have a proper account for this employee, you should give that account specific permissions, tailored to the employee's tasks. By default, a new profile cannot do much. It is up to you to set exactly the parts of your store to which that profile should have access. It can be a tedious task, but it is an important one.\ To assign permissions to an employee account, you must use the "Profile" option in the account creation page: this menu lets you pick the account's profile (SuperAdmin, translator, etc.) You can edit these permissions this way: go to the "Permissions" tab, and select the profile you want to change. A long list of permissions appears: edit them at will. Your changes are saved automatically. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/i3FgSHzRD6U3aB7uXoae/23038245.png) ### Configure your payment methods Your store is meant to earn money, and this can only become a reality if you use at least one payment module. Several modules are already available in the default install, which you can install and configure (from the "Installed Modules" page under the "Modules" menu, in the "Payments & Gateways" category), and create restrictions for them (in the "Preference" page under the "Payment" menu). Many payment modules require you to first set up an account on the service they were built for. Check and bank wire are the only two payment methods that are enabled by default. If you choose to keep them, you **need** to configure them with your information: check order and address, account owner, and bank details (IBAN, BIC, etc.). These payment methods are configured through the "Wire payment" and "Payments by check" modules, which you can find in the "Installed modules" page. ### Configure carriers and shipment Products sold on your store must be shipped to your customers – unless you only sell downloadable products, in which case the "Shipping" menu will be of little use to you. Whether you are sending your products yourself by regular post office mail, or you have set up a contract with a carrier, you should set this information within PrestaShop. See the "Managing Shipping" chapter of this guide in order to learn about shipping and carriers. **Merchandise return is not enabled by default**. If you want to allow your customers to return products and get a refund or a voucher, you can do it in the "Merchandise return (RMA) options" of the "Merchandise returns" page, under the "Customer service" menu.\ Merchandise returns are explained in the "Managing the Customer Service" chapter of this guide. ### Choose your theme Your store should have its own theme in order to have a distinctive style, and therefore be more recognizable, separating it from the numerous other online shops. There are many themes to choose from on the PrestaShop Addons marketplace: . You can also choose to create your own theme, or have it created for you by a developer. Refer to the PrestaShop Designer Guide for help. Once your theme is installed, you should explore it fully in order to know it by heart and be able to help customers out of a situation. Read its documentation carefully. You can and should customize some of the theme's aspects, most notably its logo in various situations (header, mail, invoice, etc.). This is done using the "Theme & Logo" page, which you can find under the "Design" menu. ### Choose your modules PrestaShop comes bundled with more than a hundred modules. These are very varied: analytics, front office features, payment, shipping... You should explore the available modules in full, in order to know which ones you might want to enable, and which you'd rather keep disabled. You can also find many other modules on the Addons marketplace: Every time you activate and configure a module, make sure that it does work well within the confines of your theme, in case its features impact your shop's front end. ### Create your products and product categories This is described in detail in the "Managing Products" and "Managing Categories" chapters. ### Create your static content If you haven't done this already, you should take the time to write the content for the various static pages which are either already available in your PrestaShop installation, or ones that you feel are needed. Some pages already exist, but their content should really be triple-checked, as they can have a lot of impact on your shop's legal status, among other things. The default pages are "About Us", "Delivery", "Legal Notice", "Terms and Conditions of use", and "Secure Payment". Some of them have default content, which you should update; some others are empty, and you should paste your own text.\ To edit these pages, go to the "Design" menu, click the "Pages" page, then choose the page you want to edit, or create new ones. You can create as many pages as you feel are necessary. ### Build your top menu Now that you have product categories and static pages, you should arrange them in a logical and compelling way in the top menu. This is done using the "Main menu" module: go to the "Installed Modules" tab of the "Modules" page, type "menu" in the module search form, and you should find the module. Enable it if it is disabled, then configure it: remove the pages or categories you deem unnecessary, add other pages, and move the content around, until you are satisfied with your menu's hierarchy. ### Activate your store Now that all is set and done, you can finally open your store to the public. Go the "Shop Parameters / General" page, and change the two options in the "Maintenance" tab: * **Enable Store**: set it back to "Yes". * **Maintenance IP**: remove your IP from the list. This is optional: your store will still work if you leave the field as it is. Your store should now be fully ready to receive its first visitors... and take its first orders! # Selling with PrestaShop Your products, how your catalog is organized, your orders, your customers and how you communicate with them make the most of your daily activity as a merchant. You will find in this section everything you and your team need to handle every day to keep your business going. This chapter contains the following sections: * [Managing your Orders](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-orders) * [Managing your Product Catalog](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog) * [Managing your Customers](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-customers) * [Managing the Customer Service](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-customer-service) * [Understanding your statistics](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/understanding-statistics) # Managing your Product Catalog The foundation of a PrestaShop site is its catalog, which contains products and product categories. Building and improving your catalog is the main way you will make your website live in the eyes of the customer. This is where your shop becomes a reality, creating content, and thus giving value to your online presence. As the heart of your shop, your catalog deserves a great deal of your attention. Adding products does not only mean adding an image and some text, and then validating your content. It means knowing your product by heart: price, weight, size, features, specifications, details, brand, supplier and so much more. You should not start adding products to your Catalog without knowing exactly what you want to present to the customer, and thus need to have a set plan about your products and the way they will be displayed. This also means knowing your shop's front office like the back of your hand in order to properly fill in the required fields. The "Catalog" section can be accessed by opening the menu with the same name, which lists all the product-related pages. This is where you manage your products and their characteristics throughout your PrestaShop shop. This chapter contains the following sections: * [Managing Products](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-products) * [Managing Categories](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-categories) * [Monitoring your Catalog](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/monitoring-catalog) * [Managing Product Attributes](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-product-attributes) * [Managing Product Features](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-product-features) * [Managing Brands](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-brands) * [Managing Suppliers](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-suppliers) * [Managing Files](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-files) * [Managing Discounts](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-discounts) * [Managing Stock](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-stock) ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/TOJngq65jYgcpvQqem8g/51839831%20\(5\)%20\(9\).png) # Managing Products You can manage the products in your store using the **"Product"** page, in the **"Catalog"** menu. {% hint style="info" %} **PrestaShop 8.1 benefits from a brand-new product page**: read the documentation here if you wish to learn more: {% endhint %} {% content-ref url="/pages/dlQu0yphYFepSNdZDrSs" %} [New product page (PrestaShop 9.1)](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/new-product-page-prestashop-8.1) {% endcontent-ref %} ## **Sections in this chapter:** * [Introduction to the product page](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-products#ManagingProducts-Introductiontotheproductpage) * [Creating a product](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-products#ManagingProducts-Creatingaproduct) * [Creating a product with combinations](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-products#ManagingProducts-Creatingaproductwithcombinations) * [Creating a virtual product](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-products#ManagingProducts-Creatingavirtualproduct) * [Creating a pack of products](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-products#ManagingProducts-Creatingapackofproducts) ## Introduction to the product page To create a new product, from the "Catalog" page, click on "New product" (or type CTRL + P): it will open what is called the product page, where you can create new products or edit existing ones. ### Tabs In PrestaShop 8, the product page is organized into tabs: * **Basic settings**: it contains all you need to create a product quickly and easily. If however, you need to add more details to your product, then you should have a look at the other tabs. * **Quantities**, **Combinations,** or **Virtual product**: define your product quantities and other stock-related options. When your product has combinations the tab will be renamed Combinations. This is where you manage all your combinations. On the other hand, if you have a virtual product, this is where you upload its associated file if any. * **Shipping**: give details that can impact the delivery of the product. * **Pricing**: refine your pricing with specific prices or price per unit (among other pricing options). * **SEO**: manage the meta description or product URL to make sure it's optimized for search engines. * **Options**: additional functionalities to manage your product's visibility, specific references, attached files or suppliers. It is also here that you can set up the customization. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/zZrWKPME01ueZb7D8RhZ/51185085.png) ### Product Name The first field to fill is the product name, which will appear in the search engine results and in your product sheet's URL by default. Next to the field, you will find a language selector which enables you to choose the language into which you wish to edit or create the product. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/v3CKQQXggRgMIuHLRCh9/51185086%20\(2\).png) You **must** give the product a name in at least the default language before you can save it. You won't be able to save it until it has a name. Make sure to translate each field into every language that your store supports. In order to do that, click on the language selector next to the product type field, and choose the language in which you wish to edit the product ### Type of product This second option is an essential one: indicate whether the product is a pack (a combination of at least two existing products), a virtual product (downloadable file, service, etc.), or simply a classic, mail-sent product. For now, we will only explore the standard product with no combinations, and deal with products with combinations, packs and virtual products in their own sections of this chapter. ### Language You might have activated several languages in your store , to sell in more countries. If you wish to engage with your customers abroad, all your content (product description, captions, etc.) should be translated in these languages. To translate your product content in another language, just select in which language you would like to work next to the type of product selector. The product page will update with the content available in the selected language. You can switch from one language to another without saving your work in-between. Just make sure you are editing the content in the right language. By default, the product page will display content in your store's default language. To add new languages to your store, go to the International section. You can either add just a language in "Translations" or add a localization pack in "Localization". You will find more information in the international section of the documentation. ### Global Buttons ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/0XeYb9VkSu9UQSvEwsTS/51185087%20\(3\).png) * **Sales**. Redirects you to the "Product detail" page of the statistics dashboard ("Stats" menu), which gives you a graphic of both the visits to this product's page and also its sales. * **Product list**. Displays a list of all your products to allow you to quickly navigate from one product to another. * **Help**. Opens the contextual help in a column, with the page from the User Guide corresponding to the product page. At the bottom of the page, several actions are possible: * **Delete** (trash icon). Removes all the data for the current product and deletes it, including its images, combinations, features, etc. * **Preview**. Displays the front office page of your product. This is very handy, as it works even if the product is disabled. * **Online / Offline**. This is where you enable or disable your product. By default it is disabled, so your customers won't be able to see it in your store. * **Duplicate**. Save the current product, then creates an exact copy of the current product and takes you to the new product page. This is very useful when you'd rather use the current product's data as a template for another new product, and not have to create every data of the new product by hand. For instance, two products might be very different but could share the same associations, carriers, or supplier settings. Don't over-duplicate! If you need to create different versions of the same product, because of its variety of colors, capacity, size, etc., then you should create a product combination for the current product rather than duplicate it X times. See the "Combinations" option in the "Basic settings" tab, which is explained in the "Creating a product with combinations" section of this chapter. * **Go to Catalog**. This saves any change you have made to any of the data for the current product and takes you back to the product list. * **Add new product.** This saves any change you have made to any of the data for the current product and opens a new page to create a new product. * **Save**. This saves any change you have made to any of the data for the current product and keeps you on the current tab. This is particularly useful when you want to switch tabs without losing your changes to the current tab, or in order to see your changes get applied immediately. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/5PgmwCJLJd7Mf2V15QlG/51185088%20\(3\)%20\(2\).png) Keyboard shortcuts Some keyboard shortcuts have been introduced in PrestaShop 1.7 to help you save time when you create several products in a row. The behavior is the same as described above, and it works for the following options: * Duplicate: ALT+SHIFT+D * Enable/Disable on your store: ALT+SHIFT+O * Add a new product: ALT+SHIFT+P * Go back to the catalog: ALT+SHIFT+Q * Save: ALT+SHIFT+S * Preview: ALT+SHIFT+V ## Creating a product The product page makes it easier to create a product thanks to enhanced tabs. ### Basic settings ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/Tai6rRQmTuzKTrhbhWCR/57081940%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) The "Basic Settings" tab provides the main options required to create a basic product: in a few clicks, you'll be able to create a new product. From there you can also browse the other tabs to add further details to your product. #### Images The image section is on the top-left part of the "Basic settings" tab. You should upload all the images for this product, including all of its combinations (color, size, shape, etc.). **To add one or more images to your product:** Drag and drop your images directly from your folder, or click on "select files" (or anywhere in the image section in fact) to search and open the folder containing your images. You can select as many images as necessary by keeping the Ctrl-key pressed while selecting files, or you can make your selection one by one. The default maximal size for an image file is set by PrestaShop according to your server's PHP settings. This size can be lowered in the "Images" preference page, "Product images" section. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/tP8oMBHP9icuEF1b7DUP/51839124.png) **Cover image** The uploaded images appear as thumbnails. The first one will be your default/cover image for the product. That cover image will also appear automatically on the product page of your store. You can change which image is your cover image by clicking on the image's thumbnail: the settings for this given image will appear. There you can check or uncheck "Cover image" to define whether the image should be the cover or not. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/SDg443a2dsU4dT2NTyCn/51839131%20\(5\).png) **Zoom and Caption** When you click on "Zoom" the image will appear in its real format, in case you want to have a closer look at it. Each image can have a caption: use it to briefly describe the image (and the product). It is important for the SEO since it is considered as the alt attribute of the image, and therefore it helps search engines to better rank your product. If you have several languages, don't forget to translate it! **Sorting images** Once you have uploaded all your product images, you can modify their order by drag-and-dropping each image. You can also add more images by clicking on the "+" icon, or dropping it. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/E3rybZnqC1SMPLBEHxF2/51839715%20\(3\)%20\(3\).gif) #### Summary and Description Describing your product well is essential, both for the customer (the more information, the better) and search engines (it will help your store appear in more search requests). At the bottom of the screen, the two description fields each serve different purposes: * The **"Summary" field** enables you to write a short description that will appear in search engines and in the description for your product. \ This field is limited to 400 characters by default: if you exceed that limit, PrestaShop will warn you with a message in red below the field. You can change that limit in the "Products" preference page, where you will find the "Max size of product summary" option. * The **"Description" field** enables you to write a full description of your product, which will appear directly on the product page. The text editor offers a wide range of options for creating visually attractive descriptions (font, size, text color, etc.).\ While this second field has no limits, there is such thing as too much content: strive to provide the essential information in a compelling way, and your product should be good to go. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/k7iZLWB7NRBK3AYxBvL0/51185084%20\(3\)%20\(3\).gif) #### Feature Below the product descriptions, you can several options. The "Add a feature" option is for specifying your products' features (i.e. weight, material, country of origin, etc.). When you create features and values (i.e. wool knit and micro-fiber materials), you assign them to the products when it is appropriate. This means that you do not have to fill out the features fields for each of your products but instead simply fill in the necessary values and apply them later. Be aware that **contrary to the combinations, these values do not change, and are valid for the general product** (meaning: all your combinations will share these same features). **Adding a feature** Before adding a feature to a product, you must create it for general use in your store. You should go to the "Attributes & Features" page of the "Catalog" menu for this. Feature and feature value creation are explained in detail in the [dedicated section of the guide](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-product-features). ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/4uWryGmBa6hUaaVUhKYE/51839148%20\(5\).png) **Assigning a value to a feature** We will assume here that you have already set all your features and feature values. When clicking on "Add a feature", a drop-down menu appears, listing all of your store's features. Select which feature you want to add. Next, you can either assign one of the pre-defined values (as set when creating the feature) if there are any available or set a value manually in the "Customized value" field. If no value is available for a feature, the mention "No result found" appears. If you choose to use a custom value, do not forget to set it for every language that your store supports. Use the language code selector at the top of the page to change the language. If there are pre-defined values available, they will appear in a dropdown list. Simply click it and choose the correct value. Once you have set all the relevant features, save your changes to see them immediately applied in the front-page. Remember: If a feature does not have any value assigned to it, it will not be taken into account for this product, and will not be visible in your store. #### Brand In the same way you can add a feature, you can add a brand. Click on "Add a brand" and choose a brand in the drop-down menu. If the brand you want isn't available in the drop-down menu, go to the "Brands & Suppliers" page to create a new brand. A product can only be associated with one brand. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/t0CXGIqJBfrGbJ8xhQZZ/51185096.png) #### Related product The "Add a related product" field gives you the option of choosing relevant products to associate with this product and to suggest them to your customers when they visit the product's page (if the theme supports it). Click on "Add a related product", type in the first letters of the product, and select it. The product is then added at the bottom of the field. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/CAhDU9R4zg6InrQYby9X/51185097%20\(2\).png) You can associate a product with as many other products as you deem necessary. Click on the trash icon to delete the product association.\ An association goes one way only: the associated product will not feature an association to the current product in its setting page. #### Combinations ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/KvcXoaa8x3F6TfdvH18Z/51185098%20\(3\).png) You will often sell the same product under different versions: they share the same overall name, but they might differ by color, capacity, screen size, and other attributes. Most of the time, these attributes come together: you could have the red version of the product available with either 1 Gb capacity or 2 Gb, or with a 12'' screen or 15'' screen. This is why PrestaShop calls these versions "combinations": your stock of products can be made of several variations of a single product, which in effect are simply its attributes combined in specific ways. If you need combinations for your product, select "Product with combinations". The "Quantities" tab of the product page will be renamed "Combinations" and will allow you to create your various combinations. You cannot create combinations if you do not already have product attributes properly set in PrestaShop.\ Also, you should not create a combination of features that your customers should not be able to choose from. Attributes creation is done in the "Attributes & Features" page from the "Catalog" menu and is explained in detail in this [dedicated chapter of the documentation](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-product-attributes). To find out about Combinations, read the [dedicated section at the end of this chapter](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-products#ManagingProducts-Combinations). #### Quantity Indicate how many products are available for sale. This option will not be displayed if you're creating a product with combinations: quantities for combinations are managed in the "Combinations" tab, as each combination can have a different quantity value. More quantity options are available in the "Quantity tab". #### Price ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/z55VqyOTQTt8ofH2mexB/51185099%20\(3\)%20\(2\).png) Define how much you want to sell this product. * **Price – Tax excluded**. This is where you should set your price. It is independent of calculations, tax, and other prices. * **Price – Tax included.** Displays the price of the product with taxes included. You can edit the value, and it will automatically update the "Tax excluded" field according to the tax rule that you chose. * **Tax rule**. The tax is applicable to the product. Choose between the different rates that you have registered. When changing the tax rule, the tax included price will change accordingly. More pricing options are available on the "Pricing" tab. Whether you change your price in the "Basic Settings" or "Pricing" tab is just the same, as the tabs are synchronized. Tax rules can be managed in the "International" menu, "Taxes" page. #### Categories ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/yhe0DCI9av6KoH8orT3q/51185100%20\(5\)%20\(1\).png) The "Categories" section enables you to select in which category the product should appear. You can select more than one, but keep in mind that it is better for the customer if the category only contains equivalent and comparable products. Therefore, you should prevent selecting root categories, and prefer child categories.\ For instance, the "telephone" category can feature sub-categories of "brands" (Apple, Samsung, HTC, etc.) as well as "characteristics" (dual sim, Android, etc.). It is up to you to indicate the category most useful to your customers. **Associating existing categories** To associate a category to your product, you can either use the search bar or expand the category list and select the one you want to associate. **Using the search bar**. Type in the first letters of the category and the bar will display all the matching categories and the path to access it. Choose your category and click on it. It will be shown in the "Associated categories" section. **Using the category list**. By clicking on "Expand", you will see the category tree and from there you can select the categories you want to associate. In the list of associated categories, if you mouse over a specific category, you will see the path leading to the category. It can be helpful if you have several categories with the same name (like "Shoes" which can be under the "Children" and "Women" categories). **Main category** The "main category" selector is useful when an article is filed under several categories. It serves mainly to clarify which category to use in case your customer arrives at your site from a search engine since the name of the category will appear in the product's URL. **Creating a new category** If you feel you need to add a category, save the current state of your product before clicking the "Create new category" button. Click on "Create a category": and the category options will appear. Fill in the name of the category and select the parent category. By clicking on create, the new category will be created and it will automatically be associated with your product. Don't forget to go to the "Categories" page later to fill in the details for this new category. To read more about categories, [go to the related section of the documentation](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-categories). A new category will not automatically appear in your shop's menu. To display it, you should edit the menu with the "Main menu" module (when using the default theme), or any custom module you may have to manage the menu. At this point, you are done with the essential information for a basic product page. You can save it. To have it immediately available for sale on your shop, click on "Offline": its status will change to "Online" and it will be visible on your shop. However, you should keep reading, as there are many more details you can add to your product to make it more attractive to customers! ### **Quantities** Product quantities are managed in a single tab. PrestaShop will use this to determine when a product is soon out-of-stock or unavailable anymore. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/w9ki8bU1qL6gpdJtKRHp/57606479%20\(2\)%20\(1\).png) #### Standard Product For a standard product you only have four fields: * **Quantity.** Define how many products are for sale. It is the same value as the one in "Basic settings". * **Stock location.** We know it is always useful to be able to know where to find a product. So be this field. * **Minimum quantity for sale.** You might prefer this product to be sold in bulk. Use this field to set the number of items to be sold in bulk. It means customers will be able to purchase this product only when they reach this minimum quantity. * **Stock alerts.** You also can set a rule for low-stock products in this section. Indicate a threshold and check the box "Send me an email when the quantity is below or equals this level" to have an email sent to all the users who can run the stock page - permissions can be modified in [Advanced Parameters > Team](http://doc.prestashop.com/display/PS17/Team). #### Product with Combinations The way it works is quite easy: the page presents you with a table of all the combinations for the current product (if there are no combinations, the table simply has a single row). It is up to you to set the initial stock for all the combinations. For more information on product combinations, [read the dedicated section at the end of the page](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-products). Packs and virtual products have different stock settings, you will find all you need at the end of this chapter. #### **Availability preferences** **Out-of-stock behavior** The "Behavior when out of stock" option enables you to set PrestaShop behavior when the product is out of stock: * Deny orders (the product is not available for sale anymore). * Allow order (in essence, you are doing pre-sales). * Use default behavior (Deny orders). This third and default option simply uses the global default setting ("Preferences" menu, "Products" page, "Product Stock" section, "Allow ordering of out-of-stock products" option). **Labels** * **Label when in-stock**. Enables you to display a message to your visitors when your product is in stock, for example, "Item available". It reassures them that your shop can immediately send them the product. * **Label when out of stock and back-order active**. Enables you to display a message to your visitors when your product is out of stock but they can still order it (as set using the "**When out of stock**" selector), for example, "Pre-order now!". It reassures them that your shop will send them the product immediately once it is in stock. * **Availability date**. Indicate when the product will be back in stock. You can also configure the general settings applied to all of your products: the default option is to deny orders, but this can be modified under the "Products Settings" in the "Shop Parameters section" ("Allow ordering of out-of-stock products" option). ### **Shipping** The "Shipping" tab enables you to give some precious details about your product's package. It isn't available in the case of a virtual product. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/d2CxQG2LhIywNH3P49aD/51185106%20\(3\)%20\(5\).png) * **Package dimension (width, height, depth & weight)**. You should strive to fill each field because knowing the exact size and weight of a package is not only useful to you, but PrestaShop can also direct specific sizes/weights to specific carriers automatically, based on these settings. The order's final price will appear to the customer once PrestaShop (or the customer) has selected a carrier. These values use the default weight, volume, distance, and dimension units, as set in the "Localization" page of the "Localization" menu. These values do not have to be integers. If your products weigh less than 1 lb, you can simply use a period (.) to indicate the fractions: * 123 lbs * 1.23 lbs * 0.23 lbs (equals 3.68 oz) * etc.\
* **Shipping fees (Additional shipping fees)**. This can prove very useful to you for specific products that are particularly tricky to package, or really heavy. * **Available carriers**. You can choose to have the current product only be shipped by a selection of carriers. If no carrier is selected then all the carriers will be available for customer orders. ### **Pricing** The pricing tab makes it possible to refine your pricing strategy, either by using alternative prices (price per unit) or by creating some price rules specific to the product. #### **Retail price** The price of your product before taxes. * **Price – tax excluded**. This is where you can set an arbitrary price, independent of calculations and regular prices. Keep this field at "0" to use the default price. * **Price – tax included.** Displays the price of the product with taxes included. You can edit the value, and it will automatically update the "Pre-tax retail price" field according to the tax rule that you chose. * **Price per unit (tax excl.)**. The unit price for the product at the time of the addition. This is for valuation purposes. * **Tax rule**. The applicable tax to the product. Choose between the different rates that you have registered. A link will redirect you to the Tax rule pages if you wish to make some changes. [Read more about tax rules in this section](http://doc.prestashop.com/display/PS17/Tax+Rules). * **Display the "On sale!" flag on the product page and in the text found within the product listing.** Check that box to show that your product is on sale, both on the product page and in the text on the product listing. An "On sale" icon will appear under the product. You can modify this logo by changing the following file: `themes/default/img/onsale_en.gif` * **Final retail price**. This price, including the discount taken, will update as you type. You can fill out the "Price - tax excluded" field and choose the tax rate to apply, and the field will automatically calculate the retail price with taxes. The opposite operation is also available. #### **Cost price** Enter the price you paid for the product (how much it cost you to acquire or manufacture the product), it will allow you to compare it to your selling price in order to easily calculate your profit. The cost price should be lower than your retail price. #### Specific prices: Managing Discounts You can change the total price of the product depending on the number of products your customer buys, the user group, the country, etc. This is done with the "Specific prices" section of the "Pricing" tab. Click on the "Add a specific price" button to reveal the creation form: ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/oaDzsSZ9yk8qvqJFcZXu/51185109%20\(3\)%20\(7\).png) This is a very easy way to create a discount price for this product (and all its combinations). * **For**. This enables you to be very specific about the various groups to which this price applies, including currencies, countries, and even your customer groups (which we'll discuss in a later chapter). * **Customer**. You can choose to be even more specific and directly set at who the discount you are creating is targeted. Start typing the first letters of the client's first name or last name, and select the ones you want. * **Combinations**. You can choose to have this specific price apply to all of the product's combinations, or only one. If you wish to apply to more than one combination but not all of them, you will have to create a specific price for each combination. * **Available from/to**. Here you can define a range of dates between which the discount price is active. Clicking each selector will open a calendar, simplifying the process. * **Starting at \[] unit**. Contains the value from which the discount should be applied. The default is "1", which means any quantity. If you've selected one combination for which the specific price applies and that you define more than one unit, it means the customer will have to buy this quantity of this given combination to benefit from the discount. * **Product price (tax excl.)**. This is where you can set an arbitrary price, independent of calculations and regular prices. This will override the retail price. To enable this field, you must unclick "Leave initial price" first. * **Leave initial price**. Check this box to reset the "Product price" field and prevent yourself from editing it. * **Apply a discount of**. Use the selector to set the type of discount (either a specific amount in the default currency or a percentage of the default price). On the product sheet, the initial price will appear as crossed out next to the discounted price. Once you have chosen your values, click on "Apply": the summary of your discount settings appears below. The discount will be immediately visible on the store.\ If you wish to delete a value, click on the trashcan icon in the table. If you want to build more complex discounts, go read about the "Discounts" menu in the ["Managing Discounts" chapter of this guide](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-discounts). #### **Priority management** A customer might fit into multiple prices or discount rules, even when you have set detailed prices and quantity discounts, with custom groups and shops (if in a multistore context). PrestaShop, therefore, uses a set of priorities in order to apply a single price rule to such customers. You might want the user group to be more important than the currency, for instance. You can change PrestaShop default settings using the "Priority Management" section. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/186SpvvsTxRNqFGpcCtN/51185110%20\(3\)%20\(2\).png) The default order of importance is: 1. Shop (when in a multistore context). 2. Currency. 3. Country. 4. Group. A checkbox at the bottom enables you to update the settings for all products. If the checkbox remains unchecked, then your changes only apply to the current product. ### **SEO** To improve your product listing as well as increase your store's visibility we suggest that you carefully fill out the various SEO fields: meta titles, meta descriptions, keywords, and friendly URLs. "SEO" itself stands for "Search Engine Optimization. Read more on Wikipedia: Get to know the best SEO practices for e-commerce! Download and read PrestaShop's free "Complete Guide to SEO": To access the product's SEO information, go to the "SEO" tab. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/jzHhClCsGJ43Z5fEJRW8/57606471%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) #### Search Engine Optimization The fields on this page enable you to directly optimize your catalog's visibility on search engines. * **Preview**. With PrestaShop 1.7.5 released, you can now get a real-time preview of your search engine result to help you see how your page would be displayed. * **Meta title**. This is the most important field, as the title will appear on all search engines. Be very factual: you must convince the search engine user to click your link, not one from another site. Make sure the title is unique to this product within your site. * Good example: "Levi's 501® Original Jeans - Tidal Blue - Original Fit". * Bad example: "Item #02769869B bestseller". * **Meta description**. A presentation of the product in just a couple of lines (ideally, less than 155 characters), intended to capture a customer's interest. This will appear in results for some search engines, depending on the search request: some search engines might choose to display the searched keywords directly in the context of the page content. Make sure the description is unique to this product within your site. * **Friendly URL**. This is another extremely important field. It enables you to rewrite the web addresses of your products as you wish. For example, instead of having an address such as\ \ you can have:\ .\ All you need to do is indicate in the "Friendly URL" field the words that you wish to see appear instead of the default name, separated by dashes.\ The "**Reset URL**" button makes it easy to produce a proper friendly URL based on the product name. Once generated, you can edit the URL produced if necessary.\
Friendly URLs will only work if URL rewriting is enabled. You can do this in "SEO & URLs" preference page (in the "Traffic" menu), in its "Set up URLs" section. You will find more information on the "SEO & URLs" preference page in the ["Traffic" chapter of this guide](http://doc.prestashop.com/display/PS17/Traffic). #### Redirection page When your product is offline, its product page will no longer be available in your shop. You have to decide what you want to show to your visitors instead: * **No redirection (404).** This will display a "404 error - Not found" page. * **Permanent redirection (301).** This will permanently redirect the visitor to another product or category page. The current URL of your product page will no longer be indexed by search engines: it will be replaced by the URL of the product or category page of your choice. Choose which page you would like to display instead. Remember, this is permanent, so make sure you don't need this URL anymore before activating the 301 redirection! * **Temporary redirection (302).** This is a temporary redirection to another product or category page. Choose which product or category page you would like to display instead. Search engines will still index the page URL, so you can reuse it later easily, should you reactivate the product, for example. If you want to display a category page, you have to select what category you want to redirect to. ### **Options** The "Options" tab provides additional settings to manage product references, suppliers, product customization, visibility, and files. #### **Visibility** You can choose to have the product available through different channels: * **Everywhere**. Customers can get to the product by browsing the catalog, searching for the product's name, or directly using its URL. * **Catalog only**. Customers can get to the product by browsing the catalog or directly using its URL. * **Search only**. Customers can get to the product by searching for its name or directly using its URL. * **Nowhere**. Customers can only get to the product using its URL. They won't find it by browsing through the catalog or by searching for its name. This is great for creating private products, that only a few trusted visitors can access, even temporarily (you can change this setting at any time). **Options**. A couple of specific options. * **avoidingAvailable for order**. If you uncheck this box, customers will not be able to add this product to their cart. This makes it more like a single-product Catalog mode (in comparison with the "Catalog mode" preference). * **Show price**. If the "available for order" option above is unchecked, you can either choose to display the product's price nevertheless (even though visitors won't be able to buy it), or choose to not display it. * **Web-only (not sold in your retail store)**. If your business does have brick-and-mortar stores, this option will prove invaluable when a product is only sold online, not in-store – this prevents customers from checking a product's price online, then coming to your store hoping to buy it directly, and thus avoiding shipping costs. #### Tags Tags are terms and keywords that will help your customers easily find what they are looking for. When they use the search bar to browse your catalog, they will type some specific keywords. Choose the most relevant keywords to your product, to make sure the product shows in results when a visitor searches for it. To add several tags, simply separate them by a comma. For example: "dinner plate, dinnerware, stoneware" for a dinner plate. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/m2AvXHbceY4ZG12hUQoY/51185117%20\(3\)%20\(5\).png) All the tags can be seen on the "Search" page, under the "Shop Parameters" menu. You will find more information on tag management in this [dedicated chapter](http://doc.prestashop.com/display/PS17/Tags). Product tags are not the same as page keywords: they have no direct impact on search engine placement. #### Condition & References **Condition**. Not all shops sell new products and some marketplaces require this information from you. This option enables you to indicate the condition of the product: * **and New**. The product is brand new, and sealed in its original packaging. * **Used**. The product has been sold at least once before, and probably used by someone else (secondhand). It should come in its original packaging, which might be closed with tape. * **Refurbished**. The product has been returned for various reasons ("scratches, dents or other forms of cosmetic damage which do not affect the performance of the unit"). Read more on Wikipedia: . * **Reference code**. This is your own internal reference. It might be a number, or its reference from the storage location or its supplier, or anything that makes it unique. * **ISBN.** ISBN is used internationally to identify books and their various editions. If your products are books or entitled to have an ISBN number, enter it here. * **UPC barcode.** This standard for barcodes is mostly used in the United States, Canada, the United Kingdom, Australia, and New Zealand.
* **EAN-13 or JAN barcode**. These are the numbers of the product's barcode, which are used worldwide in order to identify it. You can use either an EAN-13 or a JAN number. * An EAN-13 is the product's 13-digit international article number. Order it on [GS1](https://www.gs1.org/) as soon as your product is created to be able to sell it with Google Shopping, or on marketplaces. Read more on Wikipedia: . * A JAN is specific to Japan but is compatible with the international EAN. Read more on Wikipedia: . * **MPN.** The MPN (Manufacturer Part Number) is a unique manufacturer reference. It allows you to easily match a product to the right manufacturer, which has multiple advantages for both the merchant and the customer. \ The merchants can easily differentiate similar products thanks to their identifier and manage product stock by the manufacturer. The product can also be found in the search engine with the identifier. \ The MPN is also useful for customers: the MPN can be indexed on Marketplaces and customers will therefore be able to find the product they are looking for faster. Customers are also sure to get the right product, which boosts their confidence! #### Customization PrestaShop makes it possible for your customers to customize the product that they will buy. Example: You are a jewelry retailer and your customers have the possibility to engrave their jewelry with a text or an image. Your customers can submit the text and/or the image when they place their order. The advantage of this function is that it offers your customers personal service, which they will without a doubt appreciate! Let's look at how to configure this function. Click on "Add a customization field" to indicate what type of context (file and/or text) can be personalized. You can put as many fields as you allow your customers to upload. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/H7zlWMVbek00uWFUZbt0/51185118%20\(3\)%20\(9\).png) For each customization field, you need to give two pieces of information: * **Label**. Fill it with the appropriate public label: this will be an indicator for the customer, so be very specific about what you expect. * **Type**. Indicate whether you want the customer to type in some text, or to provide a file.\
Example 1: the customer can personalize a book cover, by providing 3 images. You can have 3 customization fields : | Label | Type | | ---------------------------------------------- | ----- | | Front cover (20.95 x 27.31 cm, color) | Image | | Back cover (20.95 x 27.31 cm, black and white) | Image | | Spine (20.95 x 1.716 cm, color) | Image | Example 2: if customers can engrave words to a product, you could use the following: | Label | Type | | ------------------------------- | ---- | | First line (24 chars) | Text | | Second line (24 chars) | Text | | Last line, signature (16 chars) | Text | Once all the label fields have been filled, do not forget to save your changes. **On the customer's side** Once a product has customizable properties set, its front-end product page has a new blockb, below the description: "Product customization". The customer must choose the file(s) and/or add some text and save them before they add the product in the cart. The custom image(s) and text(s) will appear in the final cart. The rest of the purchase process is the same as usual. **On the merchant's side** Once the order has been validated by the customer, the merchant gets a notification of the order in the back office. He can then check on the order, which will indicate the image(s) and the text(s) in the list of products, for each product. The merchant then simply has to download the image(s) (simply by clicking on the image in the order) or copy/paste the text and use that in its customization tool. The rest of the order and delivery process is the same as usual. #### **Attaching a file** PrestaShop enables you to make some files available to your customers before their purchase. For example, let's say you sell electronics, and you would like to urge your customers to read a document on how a product works. You can upload a document for that purpose.\ You could also simply have the product's PDF manual directly available for download right on the product page. The customer can access it even if they didn't purchase the product. **Attached files** If you already uploaded some files to be attached, you will see here the list of the files available to be attached to the product. Simply select the file you want to attach to the product. **Attach a new file** If you haven't attached any file yet, you can upload a new file directly on this page: 1. Click on "Attach a file" 2. Click on "Browse" to select a file on your computer to upload. 3. Fill out the title of your attachment (it doesn't have to be the same as the original file name). 4. Give it a description. This will help you distinguish between your uploaded files with certainty and will give additional information to your customers. 5. Click on "Add". 6. The attachment appears in the "Attached files" list, already selected to indicate it will be attached to the product. 7. Save your product. A new tab will appear on the product's page, next to "Product Details", where your customers can download the file(s) that you just uploaded.. If you need to remove an attachment from this product page, you simply have to unselect it in the "Attached files" table. You can view all of your store's attached files, add some more and remove some, by going to the "Files" page under the "Catalog" menu. This also makes it possible to use the files that you already uploaded for other products: if you need to apply the associated file with many products, you will thus only have to upload it once. #### **Suppliers** Indicating the product's supplier is not really important to your customers (very much less so than its brand in any case), but it may turn out to be an essential part of your own internal management, not the least when managing your stock: you simply need to know who you bought the product from. The supplier of the current product is to be set from the "Suppliers" section of the "Options" tab. You cannot use this feature if you do not already have at least one supplier registered in your shop. Suppliers are created from the "Brands & Suppliers" page, under the "Catalog" menu. The complete supplier registration process is explained in details in a [dedicated chapter of this guide](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-suppliers). Associating the current product with one or more suppliers is really easy: simply check the box corresponding to the supplier, and save your changes. **Supplier reference(s)** The supplier's section also features a table that enables you to set the precise reference and unit price/currency for each product combination, per supplier. If the product has more than one supplier, the table will display each supplier one after the other. There are many more product-related options in the "Product settings" page from the "Shop parameters" menu: * Number of days for which the product is considered 'new'. * Default product order. * Enable advanced-stock management. * etc. You should really check that these global settings are set as you wish. ## Creating a product with combinations To enable product combinations, you must first choose the "Product with combinations" option from the "Basic Settings" tab. You will see the "Quantities" tab change to "Combinations", and this is where you will be able to manage your product combinations. Combinations cannot be created for packs of products or virtual products: it is only available for standard products. You cannot create combinations if you do not already have product attributes properly set in PrestaShop.\ Also, you should not create combinations for features that your customers should not be able to choose from. Attributes creation is done in the "Product Attributes" page from the "Catalog" menu and is explained in detail in the chapter of the same name of this guide. How your product attributes are combined into combinations is up to you, and PrestaShop gives you two methods to achieve this. ### Adding combinations #### Manual method This method helps you create combinations one after the other. Therefore, it is to be reserved for either products with few combinations, or products with very specific combinations that can't be created reliably using the automatic method (see next section). Adding a new variation to your product takes just a few steps. 1. In the combination bar, enter the combination of attributes you need to create, with their corresponding values. For example, if you need to create a combination for a t-shirt, size M and color red, you should enter "size m color red". As you type in, you will see suggestions appearing below the bar, simply select the attributes and values you need. You can add as many attribute-value pairs as necessary to one combination.\ You can only add one pair per attribute to one combination: it is impossible to have both "Color: Blue" and "Color: Red" in your pairs; if this is necessary, you will have to create new attributes, for instance, "Primary color" and "Secondary color". You can delete an attribute-value pair by clicking on the cross in its grey box. 2\. When you have all the needed attributes, click on "Generate" on the right. 3\. The combination will appear in the table below. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/5eU5I3mNRpioyoKwjqsc/51185209%20\(3\)%20\(5\).gif) #### Automatic method If you have too many different product versions or varieties, you can use the "Product Combinations Generator." This tool allows you to automatically generate all of the combinations and possibilities. Instead of typing each combination you want, you can use the selector on the right side of the page. It lists all the attributes and their corresponding values. Here's what you should do: 1. For each attribute, tick the values you want to add as combinations. You can select several values for each attribute to save some time. 2. It will automatically add the corresponding combinations in the bar on the left. 3. If you're happy with your selection, click on "Generate": it will automatically create your combination, with **all the possible combinations**. For a single combination, you can edit its quantity directly in the table, edit it (by clicking on the pencil icon) or delete it (with the trash icon). ### Managing combinations #### Default combination When you have several combinations available, you should choose which combinations will be the default combination. It will be the combination your customers see when they arrive on the product sheet. If they want to purchase another combination, they will have to select it themselves (by either changing the color, size, or any attribute you may have). #### Editing a combination Each combination can be further managed by clicking on the edit icon. It will open a small window when you can change the details for this specific combination. * Combination details * **Set as default combination**. Check this box if you want the combination you are creating to actually be the main one for this product. * **Quantity**. Enter the quantity available for sale for this combination * **Available date**. If the combination is out of stock, you can indicate when it will be available again. * **Minimum quantity for sale**. You might prefer this combination to only be sold in bulk. Use this field to set the number of items to be sold in bulk. It means customers will be able to purchase this product only when they reach this minimum quantity for this combination. * **Reference and Specific references (ISBN, EAN-13 & UPC)**. If necessary, indicate the combination's reference, ISBN EAN-13, and/or UPC numbers in each field, as if you were creating a brand new product in PrestaShop. These numbers may be used by your warehouse or your carrier, so make sure to fill these fields, they are often essential to your business. * Price and impact
* **Cost price**. This field is useful if the original price of the product changes simply because this is a combination. * **Impact on price/price per unit/weight**. If the combination is supposed to have an impact on the product's original price/weight/unit price, fill in the field that appears with the value of that impact (e.g. "-2" if the price should be decreased by 2). * **Image**. The images that are linked to the original product (as uploaded using the form in the "Images" tab on the left) are displayed. Check the box for the images that best represent this combination. Once you finished editing a combination, you can either: * go to the previous or next combination to edit it as well, by clicking on "prev. combination" or "next combination" * go back to the product by clicking on "back to product" at the end of the page #### Bulk actions You can change the details for all or several combinations at once. 1. Select the combinations you want to edit. Click right under "Select" to select them all. 2. Click on "Bulk actions" above the list of combinations. 3. Edit the settings you want to modified. It will be modified for all the combinations you have selected. 4. Click on "Apply" to edit the combinations. If you want to delete all the combinations you've selected, click on "Delete combinations". When you have set all of the combination's details, save your product changes using the "Save and stay" button. Your combination will appear in the attributes list at the bottom of the screen. ## Creating a virtual product Your shop may feature (partly or exclusively) virtual products – that is, products that are not shipped, but rather downloaded: entertainment tickets, e-books/PDF files, real-life services...\ PrestaShop makes it easy for you to create a virtual product. The process to do this is similar to the one for creating a simple product: * Go to the "Products" page, under the "Catalog" menu. * Click the "New product" button. * Next to the product name, change the product type to "Virtual Product". The page organization will change: * The "Quantities" tab becomes "Virtual Product". * The "Shipping" tab disappears. The "Virtual Product" tab only features one option at first: it asks if the virtual product you are creating has a file attached (i.e., if your customer will pay to download something). * If not, leave it at that: you are selling a service, and nothing needs to be downloaded. * If yes, click the "Yes" option. When you click "Yes", PrestaShop opens a new form within the tab, from which you can upload the file you intend to sell: ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/PKiTJbd3TPkU30wDw5cu/51185126%20\(3\)%20\(5\).png) * **File**. Click the "Browse" button to find the file on your hard drive. As soon as you have selected a file, the upload begins. The maximum file-upload size setting depends on your server's settings, and cannot be increased from PrestaShop. If you have access to your server's `php.ini` file, these are the values you should change: * `upload_max_filesize = 20M` * `post_max_size = 20M` If you do not have access to the `php.ini` file, contact your web host about this. * **Filename**. The name of the file. This field is automatically filled after the file has been uploaded. It is not recommended to change it to another value. You should compress your file in zip format, in order to avoid the browser misinterpreting `.exe` or `.jpg` file formats. Browsers automatically download zip files for the customer, no question asked. If you are selling a high resolution image, uploading it using this form does not prevent you from uploading its thumbnail in the "Images" tab on the left. * **Number of allowed downloads**. You can set the number of time the file can be downloaded once the customer has bought it. You might prefer to limit this to 1, or 5. If you want to keep it unlimited, set the text field to 0. * **Expiration date**. Virtual files can be of promotional nature, or lose their selling value after a certain date. If so, you can set the expiry date after which the product will not be available on your shop anymore. Leave it blank if there is no expiry date. * **Number of days**. You can set the number of days after which the download link becomes non-functioning. If there is no limit, set the text field to 0. Once you are done with the "Virtual Product" tab, you can edit all the other available tabs as if you would for a regular product. ## Creating a pack of products You may wish to sell a pack of products made of several items. I.e.: a computer start-up pack composed of the computer itself, a monitor, and a printer. PrestaShop makes it easy for you to create a "pack" product and add other products from your catalog to this pack. Packs enable you to simplify preparing orders. They also allow customers to take advantage of special prices and offers. You cannot currently add combinations or virtual products to a pack.\ If you need to have packs with combinations, you will have to create single products for each combination. This is a known limitation that will be fixed in a coming version of PrestaShop. You cannot add an existing pack within a new pack, or import the content of an existing pack into a new pack. The process to create a pack is similar to the one for creating a regular product: 1. Go to the "Products" page, under the "Catalog" menu. 2. Click the "New product" button. 3. Next the product name at the top, change the product type to "Pack of products ". This will change two things: * In "Basic settings" you can choose which products are part of the pack * In "Quantities" you can select how stocks should be handled. ### Adding products to your pack * The first field is used to search for products that are already registered in your shop. * The second field is used to indicate the quantity of chosen product should be added to the pack. * The button adds the product to the pack. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/LAQ4cudPPuj7KJnmIJAv/51185208%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) You can add as many products as you would like to the pack. You can remove a product from the pack simply by clicking the trashcan icon when you hover on it. ### Managing pack quantities When you are creating a pack of products, PrestaShop needs to know how to handle the stock. In the "Quantities" tab, under "Pack quantities", you must choose one of the following options: * **Decrement pack only** (default behavior). When a pack is sold, only the stock for the pack will be impacted. * **Decrement products in pack only**. When a pack is sold, only the stock for each product will be impacted. * **Decrement both**. When a pack is sold, both the stock for the pack and the stock for each product will be impacted. * **Default behavior**. This is the default behavior as set at the shop level in your Product Settings. By default you will have "Decrement pack only" but it will change according to your choice. Once you are done with the "Pack" tab, you can edit the content of all the other available tabs as if you would for a regular product. 12 essential tips to create an efficient product page Watch our short video with 12 tips on how to create a great product page:
# Managing Products You can manage the products in your store using the **"Product"** page, in the **"Catalog"** menu. ## **Sections in this chapter:** * [Introduction to the product page](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-products#ManagingProducts-Introductiontotheproductpage) * [Creating a product](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-products#ManagingProducts-Creatingaproduct) * [Creating a product with combinations](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-products#ManagingProducts-Creatingaproductwithcombinations) * [Creating a virtual product](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-products#ManagingProducts-Creatingavirtualproduct) * [Creating a pack of products](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-products#ManagingProducts-Creatingapackofproducts) ## Introduction to the product page To add a new product to your catalog, click on **"Add new product"** from the **Catalog > Products** page. A new window opens, displaying the **4 different types of products** you can add to your store. Selecting a specific type of product will change the different tabs displayed on the product creation page:
* **Standard product:** *A physical product that needs to be shipped.* The **Stocks** tab will be shown. Note that you **cannot add combinations to a standard product**. * **Product with combinations:** *A product with different variations (size, color, etc.) from which customers can choose.* The **Combinations** tab will be shown and the Stocks tab will disappear. * **Pack of products:** *A collection of products from your catalog.* The **Pack** tab will be shown and the Combinations and Stocks tabs will disappear. * **Virtual product:** *An intangible product that doesn't require shipping. You can also add a downloadable file.* The **Virtual product** tab will be shown and the Combinations, Stocks, and Pack tabs will disappear. Once you click on **"Add new product"**, you will be taken to the newly created product page. ### Changing the product type If you've selected the wrong product type, you can quickly change its type: * Click on the **product type** (under the product name field) * A window asking you to **select the new product type** is displayed:
{% hint style="warning" %} Note that by changing your product type, **all combinations will be deleted** and **your stocks will be reset.** {% endhint %}
### Tabs In PrestaShop 9, the product page is organized into tabs: * **Description**: it contains all you need to create a product quickly and easily. If however, you need to add more details to your product, then you should have a look at the other tabs. * **Details**: where you can add references, features, attach files or personalize the product. * **Stocks, Pack, Combinations,** or **Virtual product**: define your product quantities and other stock-related options. When your product has combinations the tab will be renamed Combinations. This is where you manage all your combinations. On the other hand, if you have a virtual product, this is where you upload its associated file if any. * **Shipping**: give details that can impact the delivery of the product. * **Pricing**: refine your pricing with specific prices or price per unit (among other pricing options). * **SEO**: manage the meta description or product URL to make sure it's optimized for search engines. * **Options**: additional functionalities to manage your product's visibility or suppliers. It is also here that you can set up the customization. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FZ8gTgsAEJwvQtmreF15G%2FManagingProductsScreen1.png?alt=media\&token=6fb0ae11-56d3-4f15-9d98-d75afcb19106) ### Product Name The first field to fill is the product name, which will appear in the search engine results and in your product sheet's URL by default. Next to the field, you will find a language selector which enables you to choose the language into which you wish to edit or create the product. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FpY4sR3lMfehB3Up5uWPb%2FManagingProductsScreen2.png?alt=media\&token=da4d13ed-ab8c-4b71-8b95-3b3c9a4cacc9) Make sure to translate each field into every language that your store supports. In order to do that, click on the language selector next to the product type field, and choose the language in which you wish to edit the product. **Online / Offline button:** right below the product name field, this is where you enable or disable your product. By default it is disabled, so your customers won't be able to see it in your store. ### Language You might have activated several languages in your store, to sell in more countries. If you wish to engage with your customers abroad, all your content (product description, captions, etc.) should be translated in these languages. To translate your product content in another language, just select in which language you would like to work next to the type of product selector. The product page will update with the content available in the selected language. You can switch from one language to another without saving your work in-between. Just make sure you are editing the content in the right language. By default, the product page will display content in your store's default language. To add new languages to your store, go to the International section. You can either add just a language in "Translations" or add a localization pack in "Localization". You will find more information in the [international section of the documentation](https://docs.prestashop-project.org/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/going-international). ## Header The header recaps everything you need to know about your products: types, references, stock, tax, etc.) You can easily find important information about your product at a glance. #### Color indicator Three colors indicate your stock status: * **Green "in stock":** when your stock is superior to your set low stock. * **Yellow "low stock":** when the stock is equal or inferior to set low stock * **Red "out of stock":** when the stock is inferior or equal to 0.
### Global Buttons ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2F7S9YhP9eQnVJZAvg4mFy%2FManagingProductsScreen3.png?alt=media\&token=979aec51-c245-4144-955a-bb4a9765c5c3) * **Sales**. Redirects you to the "Product detail" page of the statistics dashboard ("Stats" menu), which gives you a graphic of both the visits to this product's page and also its sales. * **Product list**. Displays a list of all your products to allow you to quickly navigate from one product to another. * **Help**. Opens the contextual help in a column, with the page from the User Guide corresponding to the product page. At the bottom of the page, several actions are possible: * **Delete** (trash icon). Removes all the data for the current product and deletes it, including its images, combinations, features, etc. * **Preview**. Displays the front office page of your product. This is very handy, as it works even if the product is disabled. * **Duplicate**. Save the current product, then creates an exact copy of the current product and takes you to the new product page. This is very useful when you'd rather use the current product's data as a template for another new product, and not have to create every data of the new product by hand. For instance, two products might be very different but could share the same associations, carriers, or supplier settings. Don't over-duplicate! If you need to create different versions of the same product, because of its variety of colors, capacity, size, etc., then you should create a product combination for the current product rather than duplicate it X times. See the "Combinations" option in the "Basic settings" tab, which is explained in the "Creating a product with combinations" section of this chapter. * **Go to catalog**. This saves any change you have made to any of the data for the current product and takes you back to the product list. * **New product.** This saves any change you have made to any of the data for the current product and opens a new page to create a new product. * **Save**. This saves any change you have made to any of the data for the current product and keeps you on the current tab. This is particularly useful when you want to switch tabs without losing your changes to the current tab, or in order to see your changes get applied immediately. * **Cancel.** Cancels the changes you made on the product page. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FeVxcHrfW6d8AQlycdTfi%2FManagingProductsScreen4.png?alt=media\&token=7cfab68f-2f5d-4f6d-9cc3-864f438fc71f) Keyboard shortcuts Some keyboard shortcuts have been introduced in PrestaShop 1.7 to help you save time when you create several products in a row. The behavior is the same as described above, and it works for the following options: * Duplicate: ALT+SHIFT+D * Enable/Disable on your store: ALT+SHIFT+O * Add a new product: ALT+SHIFT+P * Go back to the catalog: ALT+SHIFT+Q * Save: ALT+SHIFT+S * Preview: ALT+SHIFT+V ## Footer #### Footer wording In the footer's wording, the save button has two states: * **Save:** Saves your product when creating it or when the product is offline (not published) on your store.
* **Save and publish:** Saves your product and publishes it on your store.
This helps you better understand whether your changes are live on your store or not. ### Dynamic footer The footer is **dynamic and reacts to your actions.** Modifications can be **canceled, previewed, saved, or published**:
For example, if you have unsaved modifications, any action that would make you leave the current page is disabled: ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FLw9fc0qKGEHtfNUTztnz%2FProductScreen27.png?alt=media\&token=29b6b91e-6847-4109-9df8-c0ce719a1044) ## Creating a product The product page makes it easier to create a product thanks to enhanced tabs. ### Description tab ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2F4M936olzaCCUxvFKA9nj%2FManagingProductsScreen5.png?alt=media\&token=903d3129-e2a4-4e01-85a8-3daf2426ac24) The "Description" tab provides the main options required to create a basic product: with a few words and clicks, you'll be able to create a new product. From there you can also browse the other tabs to add further details to your product. #### Images The image section is on the top part of the "Description" tab. You should upload all the images for this product, including all of its combinations (color, size, shape, etc.). **To add one or more images to your product:** Drag and drop your images directly from your folder, or click on "select files" (or anywhere in the image section in fact) to search and open the folder containing your images. You can select as many images as necessary by keeping the Ctrl-key pressed while selecting files, or you can make your selection one by one. The default maximal size for an image file is set by PrestaShop according to your server's PHP settings. This size can be lowered in the "Images" preference page, "Product images" section. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FUIm798XjBgW1eBhka09G%2FManagingProductScreen6.png?alt=media\&token=23023a54-63bc-4bb0-b414-1ceab6a16cdc) **Cover image** The uploaded images appear as thumbnails. The first one will be your default/cover image for the product. That cover image will also appear automatically on the product page of your store. You can change which image is your cover image by clicking on the image's thumbnail: the settings for this given image will appear. There you can check or uncheck "Cover image" to define whether the image should be the cover or not. You can also select multiple images to zoom or delete the selection. The dropdown menu allows you to change the caption for different languages. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FFI7K8luh3uAtwg1TWHr0%2FManagingProductsScreen7.png?alt=media\&token=a7684a92-ecf2-482e-b53a-8f09974ae026) **Zoom and Caption** When you click on "Zoom" the image will appear in its real format, in case you want to have a closer look at it. Each image can have a caption: use it to briefly describe the image (and the product). It is important for the SEO since it is considered as the alt attribute of the image, and therefore it helps search engines to better rank your product. If you have several languages, don't forget to translate it, by selecting your language in the drop-down menu! **Sorting images** Once you have uploaded all your product images, you can modify their order by drag-and-dropping each image. You can also add more images by clicking on the "+" icon, or dropping it. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2F18NS8ldq4hU8cOpCukFf%2FManagingProductsScreen8.gif?alt=media\&token=cea0a477-0348-46e3-9806-e9d5d5986c32) ### Replacing an image You can replace a product image: simply select the image you wish to replace and click on the **"Replace selection"** button. Select an image on your computer and **make sure to save your changes.**
### Replacing images in bulk It is possible to replace a product image in bulk. You don't need to worry about losing image links and data anymore. **To replace images in bulk,** * **Select the combinations** you wish to edit, * Click on the **"Bulk actions"** button and select **"Edit X combinations"** * Go to the **"Images"** attribute and **Toggle the feature** to enable it. You can now **select the image** you wish to associate with your combinations.
### Deleting images in bulk It's possible to delete product images in bulk. To do so, select the images you wish to delete and click on the **"Delete selection"** button:
#### Summary and Description Describing your product well is essential, both for the customer (the more information, the better) and search engines (it will help your store appear in more search requests). At the bottom of the screen, the two description fields each serve different purposes: * The **"Summary" field** enables you to write a short description that will appear in search engines and in the description for your product. \ This field is limited to 800 characters by default: if you exceed that limit, PrestaShop will warn you with a message in red below the field. You can change that limit in the "Products" preference page, where you will find the "Max size of product summary" option. You can also have several languages, by selecting the language tab above the text field. * The **"Description" field** enables you to write a full description of your product, which will appear directly on the product page. The text editor offers a wide range of options for creating visually attractive descriptions (font, size, text color, etc.). You can also have several languages, by selecting the language tab above the text field.\ While this second field has no limits, there is such thing as too much content: strive to provide the essential information in a compelling way, and your product should be good to go. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2F2ke5X7HVqOMVIgdelJiW%2FManagingProductsScreen9.gif?alt=media\&token=e4a04f3f-b099-4041-ad4a-b61bcbab0678) #### Categories ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FjPppCzej2iKMoKdFApgK%2FManagingProductsScreen10.png?alt=media\&token=2d32b660-c0b7-4360-9362-07db57e283d7) The "Categories" section enables you to select in which category the product should appear. You can select more than one, but keep in mind that it is better for the customer if the category only contains equivalent and comparable products. Therefore, you should prevent selecting root categories, and prefer child categories.\ For instance, the "telephone" category can feature sub-categories of "brands" (Apple, Samsung, HTC, etc.) as well as "characteristics" (dual sim, Android, etc.). It is up to you to indicate the category most useful to your customers. **Associating existing categories** To associate a category to your product, you can either use the search bar or expand the category list and select the one you want to associate. **Using the search bar**. Type in the first letters of the category and the bar will display all the matching categories and the path to access it. Choose your category and click on it. It will be shown in the "Associated categories" section. **Using the category list**. By clicking on "Expand", you will see the category tree and from there you can select the categories you want to associate. In the list of associated categories, if you mouse over a specific category, you will see the path leading to the category. It can be helpful if you have several categories with the same name (like "Shoes" which can be under the "Children" and "Women" categories). **Main category** The "main category" selector is useful when an article is filed under several categories. It serves mainly to clarify which category to use in case your customer arrives at your site from a search engine since the name of the category will appear in the product's URL. **Creating a new category** If you feel you need to add a category, save the current state of your product before clicking the "Create new category" button. You can go to "Catalog" > "Categories" section, then click on "Add new category": and the category options will appear. Fill in the name of the category. Then in this "Categories" page, fill in the details for this new category. To read more about categories, [go to the related section of the documentation](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-categories). A new category will not automatically appear in your shop's menu. To display it, you should edit the menu with the "Main menu" module (when using the default theme), or any custom module you may have to manage the menu. At this point, you are done with the essential information for a basic product page. You can save it. To have it immediately available for sale on your shop, click on "Offline": its status will change to "Online" and it will be visible on your shop. However, you should keep reading, as there are many more details you can add to your product to make it more attractive to customers! #### Brand In the same way you can add a feature, you can add a brand. Choose a brand in the drop-down menu. If the brand you want isn't available in the drop-down menu, go to the "Brands & Suppliers" page to create a new brand. A product can only be associated with one brand. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FLFXXzfgXxibP8SRtPKD3%2FManagingProductsScreen11.png?alt=media\&token=f490647d-99e4-4de7-bed1-96ac8f27c671) #### Related product The "Related products" field gives you the option of choosing relevant products to associate with this product and to suggest them to your customers when they visit the product's page (if the theme supports it). In "Related products", type in the first letters of the product, and select it. The product is then added at the bottom of the field. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FLYLgtfxtC3yg1DpsSgeC%2FManagingProductsScreen12.png?alt=media\&token=8d4edb17-dd3f-490e-8370-56fc0ece447b) You can associate a product with as many other products as you deem necessary. Click on the trash icon to delete the product association.\ An association goes one way only: the associated product will not feature an association to the current product in its setting page. #### Details tab #### Condition & References * **Reference code**. This is your own internal reference. It might be a number, or its reference from the storage location or its supplier, or anything that makes it unique. * **MPN.** The MPN (Manufacturer Part Number) is a unique manufacturer reference. It allows you to easily match a product to the right manufacturer, which has multiple advantages for both the merchant and the customer. \ The merchants can easily differentiate similar products thanks to their identifier and manage product stock by the manufacturer. The product can also be found in the search engine with the identifier. \ The MPN is also useful for customers: the MPN can be indexed on Marketplaces and customers will therefore be able to find the product they are looking for faster. Customers are also sure to get the right product, which boosts their confidence! * **UPC barcode.** This standard for barcodes is mostly used in the United States, Canada, the United Kingdom, Australia, and New Zealand. * **GTIN or EAN-13 or JAN barcode**. These are the numbers of the product's barcode, which are used worldwide in order to identify it. You can use either an EAN-13 or a JAN number. * An EAN-13 is the product's 13-digit international article number. Order it on [GS1](https://www.gs1.org/) as soon as your product is created to be able to sell it with Google Shopping, or on marketplaces. Read more on Wikipedia: . * A JAN is specific to Japan but is compatible with the international EAN. Read more on Wikipedia: . * **ISBN.** ISBN is used internationally to identify books and their various editions. If your products are books or entitled to have an ISBN number, enter it here.
#### Feature Below the References section, you can find several options. The "Add a feature" option is for specifying your products' features (i.e. weight, material, country of origin, etc.). When you create features and values (i.e. wool knit and micro-fiber materials), you assign them to the products when it is appropriate. This means that you do not have to fill out the features fields for each of your products but instead simply fill in the necessary values and apply them later. Be aware that **contrary to the combinations, these values do not change, and are valid for the general product** (meaning: all your combinations will share these same features). **Adding a feature** Before adding a feature to a product, you must create it for general use in your store. You should go to the "Attributes & Features" page of the "Catalog" menu for this. Feature and feature value creation are explained in detail in the [dedicated section of the guide](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-product-features). ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FyxVd3cXp72rMKMKPNldo%2FManagingProductsScreen13.png?alt=media\&token=baebe864-cc90-48ed-9290-7ca3aa22e071) **Assigning a value to a feature** We will assume here that you have already set all your features and feature values. When clicking on "Add a feature", a drop-down menu appears, listing all of your store's features. Select which feature you want to add. Next, you can either assign one of the pre-defined values (as set when creating the feature) if there are any available or set a value manually in the "Customized value" field. If no value is available for a feature, the mention "No result found" appears. If you choose to use a custom value, do not forget to set it for every language that your store supports. Use the language code selector at the top of the page to change the language. If there are pre-defined values available, they will appear in a dropdown list. Simply click it and choose the correct value. Once you have set all the relevant features, save your changes to see them immediately applied in the front-page. Remember: If a feature does not have any value assigned to it, it will not be taken into account for this product, and will not be visible in your store. #### **Attaching a file** PrestaShop enables you to make some files available to your customers before their purchase. For example, let's say you sell electronics, and you would like to urge your customers to read a document on how a product works. You can upload a document for that purpose.\ You could also simply have the product's PDF manual directly available for download right on the product page. The customer can access it even if they didn't purchase the product. **Attached files** If you already uploaded some files to be attached, you will see here the list of the files available to be attached to the product. Simply select the file you want to attach to the product. **Attach a new file** If you haven't attached any file yet, you can upload a new file directly on this page: 1. Click on "Add new file" 2. Click on "Browse" to select a file on your computer to upload. 3. Fill out the title of your attachment (it doesn't have to be the same as the original file name). 4. Give it a description. This will help you distinguish between your uploaded files with certainty and will give additional information to your customers. 5. Click on "Save". 6. The attachment appears in the "Attached files" list, already selected to indicate it will be attached to the product. 7. Save your product. A new tab will appear on the product's page, next to "Product Details", where your customers can download the file(s) that you just uploaded.. If you need to remove an attachment from this product page, you simply have to unselect it in the "Attached files" table. You can view all of your store's attached files, add some more and remove some, by going to the "Files" page under the "Catalog" menu. This also makes it possible to use the files that you already uploaded for other products: if you need to apply the associated file with many products, you will thus only have to upload it once. **Condition**. Not all shops sell new products and some marketplaces require this information from you. This option enables you to indicate the condition of the product: * **New**. The product is brand new, and sealed in its original packaging. * **Used**. The product has been sold at least once before, and probably used by someone else (secondhand). It should come in its original packaging, which might be closed with tape. * **Refurbished**. The product has been returned for various reasons ("scratches, dents or other forms of cosmetic damage which do not affect the performance of the unit"). Read more on Wikipedia: . #### Customization PrestaShop makes it possible for your customers to customize the product that they will buy. Example: You are a jewelry retailer and your customers have the possibility to engrave their jewelry with a text or an image. Your customers can submit the text and/or the image when they place their order. The advantage of this function is that it offers your customers personal service, which they will without a doubt appreciate! Let's look at how to configure this function. Click on "Add a customization field" to indicate what type of context (file and/or text) can be personalized. You can put as many fields as you allow your customers to upload and choose language. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FFceATLwYQw32gLKxsEYV%2FManagingProductsScreen14.png?alt=media\&token=7b0acc93-4671-4f64-b3e7-4dc27cf3a120) For each customization field, you need to give three pieces of information: * **Label**. Fill it with the appropriate public label: this will be an indicator for the customer, so be very specific about what you expect. * **Language.** Choose the language of label. * **Type**. Indicate whether you want the customer to type in some text, or to provide a file.
Example 1: the customer can personalize a book cover, by providing 3 images. Taking only Label and Type into account, you can have 3 customization fields : | Label | Type | | ---------------------------------------------- | ----- | | Front cover (20.95 x 27.31 cm, color) | Image | | Back cover (20.95 x 27.31 cm, black and white) | Image | | Spine (20.95 x 1.716 cm, color) | Image | Example 2: if customers can engrave words to a product, you could use the following: | Label | Type | | ------------------------------- | ---- | | First line (24 chars) | Text | | Second line (24 chars) | Text | | Last line, signature (16 chars) | Text | Once all the label fields have been filled, do not forget to save your changes. **On the customer's side** Once a product has customizable properties set, its front-end product page has a new block, below the description: "Product customization". The customer must choose the file(s) and/or add some text and save them before they add the product in the cart. The custom image(s) and text(s) will appear in the final cart. The rest of the purchase process is the same as usual. **On the merchant's side** Once the order has been validated by the customer, the merchant gets a notification of the order in the back office. He can then check on the order, which will indicate the image(s) and the text(s) in the list of products, for each product. The merchant then simply has to download the image(s) (simply by clicking on the image in the order) or copy/paste the text and use that in its customization tool. The rest of the order and delivery process is the same as usual. #### Stock, Combinations, Virtual Products and Packs To find out about Stock, read the dedicated section in this chapter, right below. You will often sell the same product under different versions: they share the same overall name, but they might differ by color, capacity, screen size, and other attributes. Most of the time, these attributes come together: you could have the red version of the product available with either 1 Gb capacity or 2 Gb, or with a 12'' screen or 15'' screen. This is why PrestaShop calls these versions "combinations": your stock of products can be made of several variations of a single product, which in effect are simply its attributes combined in specific ways. Attributes creation is done in the "Attributes & Features" page from the "Catalog" menu and is explained in detail in this [dedicated chapter of the documentation](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-product-attributes). To find out about Combinations, read the dedicated section at the end of this chapter. For Virtual Products, read the dedicated section in this chapter. For Packs, read the dedicated section in this chapter. ## Stocks The stock is managed in a single tab. PrestaShop will use this to determine when a product is soon out-of-stock or unavailable anymore. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FMyq0EMU8qVJixpPP9x5y%2FManagingProductsScreen15.png?alt=media\&token=c58287e7-5ee7-4869-81bb-07ab7f88fdab) #### Standard Product For a standard product you only have five fields: * **Edit quantity.** Define how many products are for sale. * **Minimum quantity for sale.** You might prefer this product to be sold in bulk. Use this field to set the number of items to be sold in bulk. It means customers will be able to purchase this product only when they reach this minimum quantity. * **Stock location.** We know it is always useful to be able to know where to find a product. So be this field. * **Stock alerts.** You also can set a rule for low-stock products in this section. Indicate a threshold and check the box "Receive a low stock alert by email" to have an email sent to all the users who can run the stock page - permissions can be modified in [Advanced Parameters > Team](http://doc.prestashop.com/display/PS17/Team). * **Out of Stock.** What happens when the product is out of stock. #### Edit quantity A new stock system has been implemented in PrestaShop 9. To manage your stocks, simply **add a positive number** or **subtract a negative number** in the stocks quantity field to update your stocks:
{% hint style="success" %} Clients sometimes buy products while you're updating your stocks. An incorrect stock calculation will now be avoided as you can only update your stocks by adding or subtracting products. This way, you can ensure correct and reliable stock management in your store. {% endhint %} #### Recent stock movements To have a better look at your stock, a preview of the last 5 stock movements is displayed under the **"Recent stock movements"** part.
These stock movements also include order stock movements (the sales and product returns in between 2 stock movements). Stock movement of customer orders is regrouped to have a better summary of your stocks.
#### Product with Combinations The way it works is quite easy: the "combinations" tab presents you with a table of all the combinations for the current product (if there are no combinations, the table simply has a single row). It is up to you to set the initial stock for all the combinations. For more information on product combinations, [read the dedicated section at the end of the page](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-products). Packs and virtual products have different stock settings, you will find all you need at the end of this chapter. #### **Availability preferences** **Out-of-stock behavior** The behavior "When out of stock" option enables you to set PrestaShop behavior when the product is out of stock: * Deny orders (the product is not available for sale anymore). * Allow order (in essence, you are doing pre-sales). * Use default behavior (Deny orders). This third and default option simply uses the global default setting ("Shop Parameters" menu, "Product Settings" page, "Products Stock" section, "Allow ordering of out-of-stock products" option). **Labels** * **Label when in-stock**. Enables you to display a message to your visitors when your product is in stock, for example, "Item available". It reassures them that your shop can immediately send them the product. * **Label when out of stock**. Enables you to display a message to your visitors when your product is out of stock but they can still order it (as set using the "**When out of stock**" selector), for example, "Pre-order now!". It reassures them that your shop will send them the product immediately once it is in stock. * **Availability date**. Indicate when the product will be back in stock. You can also configure the general settings applied to all of your products: the default option is to deny orders, but this can be modified under the "Product Settings" in the "Shop Parameters" section ("Allow ordering of out-of-stock products" option). ### **Shipping** The "Shipping" tab enables you to give some precious details about your product's package. It isn't available in the case of a virtual product. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FL3HmATelJMyJU9nGEj4m%2FManagingProductsScreen16.png?alt=media\&token=32bff78d-dbe5-4905-bae2-892ff8e61b0c) * **Package dimension (width, height, depth & weight)**. You should strive to fill each field because knowing the exact size and weight of a package is not only useful to you, but PrestaShop can also direct specific sizes/weights to specific carriers automatically, based on these settings. The order's final price will appear to the customer once PrestaShop (or the customer) has selected a carrier. These values use the default weight, volume, distance, and dimension units, as set in the "Localization" page of the "Localization" menu. These values do not have to be integers. If your products weigh less than 1 lb, you can simply use a period (.) to indicate the fractions: * 123 lbs * 1.23 lbs * 0.23 lbs (equals 3.68 oz) * etc.
* **Delivery time.** Select the delivery time option for this product: None, Default delivery time (N/A - N/A if not configured), or Specific delivery time for this product. When selected, this last option allows for two fields to let you define custom messages: *Delivery time of in-stock products* and *Delivery time of out-of-stock products with allowed orders*. * **Shipping fees (Additional shipping fees)**. This can prove very useful to you for specific products that are particularly tricky to package, or really heavy. * **Available carriers**. You can choose to have the current product only be shipped by a selection of carriers. If no carrier is selected then all the carriers will be available for customer orders. ### **Pricing** The pricing tab makes it possible to refine your pricing strategy, either by using alternative prices (price per unit) or by creating some price rules specific to the product.
#### **Retail price: summary** The price of your product before taxes. * **Retail price – tax excluded**. This is where you can set an arbitrary price, independent of calculations and regular prices. Keep this field at "0" to use the default price. * **Tax rule**. The applicable tax to the product. Choose between the different rates that you have registered. A link will redirect you to the Tax rule pages if you wish to make some changes. [Read more about tax rules in this section](http://doc.prestashop.com/display/PS17/Tax+Rules). * **Retail price – tax included.** Displays the price of the product with taxes included. You can edit the value, and it will automatically update the "Tax excluded retail price" field according to the tax rule that you chose. * **Cost price.** To indicate how much your product costs, to calculate the margin in the same page. * **Retail price per unit (tax excl. and tax incl.)**. The unit price for the product at the time of the addition. This is for valuation purposes. Indicate also the unit (kilo, litre...) * Summary. Gives the information for your product's pricing. * **Display the "On sale!" flag on the product page and in the text found within the product listing.** Check that box to show that your product is on sale, both on the product page and in the text on the product listing. An "On sale" icon will appear under the product. You can modify this logo by changing the following file: `themes/default/img/onsale_en.gif` * **Final retail price**. This price, including the discount taken, will update as you type. You can fill out the "Price - tax excluded" field and choose the tax rate to apply, and the field will automatically calculate the retail price with taxes. The opposite operation is also available. ### Retail price: more in detail The Pricing tab features a simple tax calculator, allowing you to quickly and clearly calculate your tax-included retail price. To add a new tax rule to your retail price: * Enter your **initial retail price (without tax)**, * Then choose the **tax rule you wish to apply** from the list. The product's retail price (tax included) will automatically be calculated for your product.
{% hint style="info" %} **I can't find a specific tax rule in the list.** You can add tax rules for specific countries by clicking on "**Manage tax rules"** to manually add a tax rule. You can also [import a new localization pack](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/going-international/localization/localization-settings#localizationsettings-importalocalizationpack)'s taxes from the [Localization](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/going-international/localization) page: ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FdsiotsNCY63CBhmdm0Dy%2FProductpageScreen15.png?alt=media\&token=41327534-11df-46d6-a814-4b721d40ce04) {% endhint %} #### Price and tax calculator ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2F4rJ66YZ6zbu9bNbZbjLg%2FManagingProductsScreen17.png?alt=media\&token=6f15af24-29a9-4290-a301-f2257bd37697) Define how much you want to sell this product. * **Retail price – tax excluded**. This is where you should set your price. It is independent of calculations, tax, and other prices. * **Tax rule**. The tax is applicable to the product. Choose between the different rates that you have registered. When changing the tax rule, the tax included price will change accordingly. * **Retail price – tax included.** Displays the price of the product with taxes included. You can edit the value, and it will automatically update the "Tax excluded" field according to the tax rule that you chose. More pricing options are available on the "Pricing" tab. Tax rules can be managed in the "International" menu, "Taxes" page. ### Displaying retail price per unit Knowing your unit retail price is useful when selling items that need to be sold per kilo or liter or any other unit. For example, if you sell candies per kilo in your store, you can specify the **price per kilo** and it will be displayed in your summary, under the included and excluded tax price. Toggle the **"Display retail price per unit"** feature to display the retail price per unit on the summary.
#### **Cost price** Enter the price you paid for the product (how much it cost you to acquire or manufacture the product), it will allow you to compare it to your selling price in order to easily calculate your profit. The cost price should be lower than your retail price. ### Summary A summary of your product's cost is displayed so you can check your product's cost and price in detail at a glance.
As a reminder, the margin is calculated like so:
#### Specific prices: Managing Discounts You can change the total price of the product depending on the number of products your customer buys, the user group, the country, etc. This is done with the "Specific prices" section of the "Pricing" tab. Click on the "Add a specific price" button to reveal the creation form: ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2Fu6LBw9rnCXRujrSsx5Q4%2FManagingProductsScreen18.png?alt=media\&token=2dd51dfd-27ad-4d17-bcaf-9911d805f235) This is a very easy way to create a discount price for this product (and all its combinations). * **Apply to**. This enables you to be very specific about the various groups to which this price applies, including currencies, countries, and even your customer groups (which we'll discuss in a later chapter). * **Customer**. You can choose to be even more specific and directly set at who the discount you are creating is targeted. Start typing the first letters of the client's first name or last name, and select the ones you want. * **Minimum number of units purchased**. Contains the value from which the discount should be applied. The default is "1", which means any quantity. * **Duration**. Here you can define a range of dates between which the discount price is active. Clicking each selector will open a calendar, simplifying the process. * **Apply a discount to the initial price**. Use the selector to set the type of discount (either a specific amount in the default currency or a percentage of the default price). On the product sheet, the initial price will appear as crossed out next to the discounted price. * **Retail price (tax excl.)**. This is where you can set an arbitrary price, independent of calculations and regular prices. This will override the retail price. To enable this field, you must click "Set specific price" first. Once you have chosen your values, click on "Save and publish": the summary of your discount settings appears below. The discount will be immediately visible on the store.\ If you wish to delete a value, click on the trashcan icon in the table. If you want to build more complex discounts, go read about the "Discounts" menu in the ["Managing Discounts" chapter of this guide](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-discounts). #### **Priority management** A customer might fit into multiple prices or discount rules, even when you have set detailed prices and quantity discounts, with custom groups and shops (if in a multistore context). PrestaShop, therefore, uses a set of priorities in order to apply a single price rule to such customers. You might want the user group to be more important than the currency, for instance. You can change PrestaShop default settings using the "Priority Management" section. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FQwtocO6tgUhQK3CDAFd7%2FManagingProductsScreen19.png?alt=media\&token=ca8be708-1706-4fac-b7d0-8b385a87fcc3) The default order of importance is: 1. Group. 2. Currency. 3. Country. 4. Store (when in a multistore context). The "Set a specific order for this product" section enables you to update the settings. ### **SEO** To improve your product listing as well as increase your store's visibility we suggest that you carefully fill out the various SEO fields: meta titles, meta descriptions, keywords, and friendly URLs. "SEO" itself stands for "Search Engine Optimization. Read more on Wikipedia: To access the product's SEO information, go to the "SEO" tab. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FOGL5z6zV3hSdMicT804x%2FManagingProductsScreen20.png?alt=media\&token=10576f03-2e7d-455a-bca5-5dccbddb6ffa) #### Search Engine Optimization The fields on this page enable you to directly optimize your catalog's visibility on search engines. * **Preview**. This is a real-time preview of your search engine result to help you see how your page would be displayed. * **Meta title**. This is the most important field, as the title will appear on all search engines. Be very factual: you must convince the search engine user to click your link, not one from another site. Make sure the title is unique to this product within your site. * Good example: "Levi's 501® Original Jeans - Tidal Blue - Original Fit". * Bad example: "Item #02769869B bestseller". * **Meta description**. A presentation of the product in just a couple of lines (ideally, less than 155 characters), intended to capture a customer's interest. This will appear in results for some search engines, depending on the search request: some search engines might choose to display the searched keywords directly in the context of the page content. Make sure the description is unique to this product within your site. * **Friendly URL**. This is another extremely important field. It enables you to rewrite the web addresses of your products as you wish. For example, instead of having an address such as\ \ you can have:\ .\ All you need to do is indicate in the "Friendly URL" field the words that you wish to see appear instead of the default name, separated by dashes.\ The "**Generate URL from name**" button makes it easy to produce a proper friendly URL based on the product name. Once generated, you can edit the URL produced if necessary. Friendly URLs will only work if URL rewriting is enabled. You can do this in "SEO & URLs" preference page (in the "Traffic & SEO" menu in "Shop Parameters"), in its "Set up URLs" section. You will find more information on the "SEO & URLs" preference page in the ["Traffic" chapter of this guide](https://docs.prestashop-project.org/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/shop-parameters/traffic). #### Redirection page When your product is offline, its product page will no longer be available in your shop. You have to decide what you want to show to your visitors instead: * **No redirection (404).** This will display a "404 error - Not found" page. * **Permanent redirection (301).** This will permanently redirect the visitor to another product or category page. The current URL of your product page will no longer be indexed by search engines: it will be replaced by the URL of the product or category page of your choice. Choose which page you would like to display instead. Remember, this is permanent, so make sure you don't need this URL anymore before activating the 301 redirection! * **Temporary redirection (302).** This is a temporary redirection to another product or category page. Choose which product or category page you would like to display instead. Search engines will still index the page URL, so you can reuse it later easily, should you reactivate the product, for example. If you want to display a category page, you have to select what category you want to redirect to. #### Tags Tags are terms and keywords that will help your customers easily find what they are looking for. When they use the search bar to browse your catalog, they will type some specific keywords. Choose the most relevant keywords to your product, to make sure the product shows in results when a visitor searches for it. To add several tags, simply separate them by a comma. For example: "dinner plate, dinnerware, stoneware" for a dinner plate. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FEgFgJlGiqF9guyRv4b7f%2FManagingProductsScreen21.png?alt=media\&token=6bb09b7d-4e9e-4673-86aa-587b236347e1) All the tags can be seen on the "Search" page, under the "Shop Parameters" menu. You will find more information on tag management in this [dedicated chapter](http://doc.prestashop.com/display/PS17/Tags). Product tags are not the same as page keywords: they have no direct impact on search engine placement. ### **Options** The "Options" tab provides additional settings to manage suppliers and visibility. #### **Visibility** You can choose to have the product available through different channels: * **Everywhere**. Customers can get to the product by browsing the catalog, searching for the product's name, or directly using its URL. * **Catalog only**. Customers can get to the product by browsing the catalog or directly using its URL. * **Search only**. Customers can get to the product by searching for its name or directly using its URL. * **Nowhere**. Customers can only get to the product using its URL. They won't find it by browsing through the catalog or by searching for its name. This is great for creating private products, that only a few trusted visitors can access, even temporarily (you can change this setting at any time). **Options**. A couple of specific options. * **Available for order**. If you uncheck this box, customers will not be able to add this product to their cart. This makes it more like a single-product Catalog mode (in comparison with the "Catalog mode" preference). * **Show price**. If the "available for order" option above is unchecked, you can either choose to display the product's price nevertheless (even though visitors won't be able to buy it), or choose to not display it. * **Web-only (not sold in your retail store)**. If your business does have brick-and-mortar stores, this option will prove invaluable when a product is only sold online, not in-store – this prevents customers from checking a product's price online, then coming to your store hoping to buy it directly, and thus avoiding shipping costs. #### **Suppliers** Indicating the product's supplier is not really important to your customers (very much less so than its brand in any case), but it may turn out to be an essential part of your own internal management, not the least when managing your stock: you simply need to know who you bought the product from. The supplier of the current product is to be set from the "Suppliers" section of the "Options" tab. You cannot use this feature if you do not already have at least one supplier registered in your shop. Suppliers are created from the "Brands & Suppliers" page, under the "Catalog" menu. The complete supplier registration process is explained in details in a [dedicated chapter of this guide](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-suppliers). Associating the current product with one or more suppliers is really easy: simply check the box corresponding to the supplier, and save your changes. **Supplier reference(s)** The supplier's section also features a table that enables you to set the precise reference and unit price/currency for each product combination, per supplier. If the product has more than one supplier, the table will display each supplier one after the other. There are many more product-related options in the "Product settings" page from the "Shop parameters" menu: * Number of days for which the product is considered 'new'. * Activate new products by default. * etc. You should really check that these global settings are set as you wish. ## Creating a product with combinations To enable product combinations, you must first choose the "Product with combinations" option from the **"Add new product" button** from the **Catalog > Products** page. You will have a "Combinations" tab, and this is where you will be able to manage your product combinations. Combinations cannot be created for packs of products or virtual products: it is only available for standard products. You cannot create combinations if you do not already have product attributes properly set in PrestaShop.\ Also, you should not create combinations for features that your customers should not be able to choose from. Attributes creation is done in the "Attributes & Features" page from the "Catalog" menu and is explained in detail in the chapter of the same name of this guide. How your product attributes are combined into combinations is up to you, and PrestaShop gives you two methods to achieve this. ### Adding combinations: how to get started This method helps you create combinations one after the other. Therefore, it is to be reserved for either products with few combinations, or products with very specific combinations that can't be created reliably using the automatic method (see next section). Adding a new variation to your product takes just a few steps. 1. In the combination bar, enter the combination of attributes you need to create, with their corresponding values. For example, if you need to create a combination for a t-shirt, size M and color red, you should enter "size m color red". As you type in, you will see suggestions appearing below the bar, simply select the attributes and values you need. You can add as many attribute-value pairs as necessary to one combination.\ You can only add one pair per attribute to one combination: it is impossible to have both "Color: Blue" and "Color: Red" in your pairs; if this is necessary, you will have to create new attributes, for instance, "Primary color" and "Secondary color". You can delete an attribute-value pair by clicking on the cross in its grey box. 2\. When you have all the needed attributes, click on "Generate combination" on the right. 3\. The combination will appear in a dedicated table. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FNQ70gb37wdPFs9RSa4o8%2FManagingProductsScreen22.gif?alt=media\&token=9125986c-3a37-4ca0-b2d0-fab9f24eadd7) ## Creating a product with combinations: more in detail In PrestaShop 9, the combination page has been reworked. A combination generation modal now appears when clicking on the "**Combinations" > "Manage product combinations"** tab. To select single values, **click on an attribute** to expand it and **select the values** you want to add to your product.
To select all combinations for each attribute, **click on the checkbox** on the left of your chosen attribute(s):
{% hint style="info" %} You can also manually search for an attribute using the **"Search for attributes..."** field to find specific attributes. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FYBGm7Lv7v36V3beNg54y%2FProductpageScreen6.png?alt=media\&token=a09a878b-ee3a-4618-8a7b-2e30c2e3aca3) This feature can be useful if your catalog has a lot of different attributes. {% endhint %} ## Generating combinations If you select every value for the "Size" and "Color" attributes, you can generate up to 56 combinations in your catalog. Once you have selected your attributes, click on **"Generate X combinations"** to generate combinations. When using **multistore mode**, you can generate attributes for all stores by checking the dedicated **"Generate combinations for all stores"** option, next to the "Cancel" button:
### Managing combinations #### Default combination When you have several combinations available, you should choose which combinations will be the default combination. It will be the combination your customers see when they arrive on the product sheet. If they want to purchase another combination, they will have to select it themselves (by either changing the color, size, or any attribute you may have). #### Editing a combination Each combination can be further managed by clicking on the edit icon. It will open a small window when you can change the details for this specific combination. * Combination details * **Default combination**. Check this box if you want the combination you are creating to actually be the main one for this product. * **Quantity**. Enter the quantity available for sale for this combination * **Availability date**. If the combination is out of stock, you can indicate when it will be available again. * **Minimum quantity for sale**. You might prefer this combination to only be sold in bulk. Use this field to set the number of items to be sold in bulk. It means customers will be able to purchase this product only when they reach this minimum quantity for this combination. * **Reference and Specific references (ISBN, EAN, UPC...)**. If necessary, indicate the combination's reference, ISBN, EAN, and/or UPC numbers in each field, as if you were creating a brand new product in PrestaShop. These numbers may be used by your warehouse or your carrier, so make sure to fill these fields, they are often essential to your business. * Price and impact
* **Cost price**. This field is useful if the original price of the product changes simply because this is a combination. * **Impact on price/price per unit/weight**. If the combination is supposed to have an impact on the product's original price/weight/unit price, fill in the field that appears with the value of that impact (e.g. "-2" if the price should be decreased by 2). * **Image**. The images that are linked to the original product (as uploaded using the form in the "Images" tab on the left) are displayed. Check the box for the images that best represent this combination. Once you finished editing a combination, you can either: * go to the previous or next combination to edit it as well, by clicking on "previous combination" or "next combination" * go back to the product by clicking on "Save" at the end of the page * close the combination window ## Managing combinations ### Using combination filters PrestaShop 9 introduces combinations filters on the **"Combinations" > "Manage product combinations"** page, allowing you to quickly manage combinations in your store:
## Pagination {% hint style="info" %} The product page includes a pagination feature. It allows you to easily browse through your store's products and display up to 100 items per page. {% endhint %}
With the implementation of the pagination feature in PrestaShop 9, page loading time has been greatly reduced. This means you can have as many combinations as you want and you don't have to worry about your back office's performance. ## Bulk actions {% hint style="info" %} You can use bulk actions to remove or edit quickly some or all product combinations at once. {% endhint %} To select multiple elements at once, you can use filters and select the attributes you wish to edit or remove. You can also use the checkmark list on the left side of the product table to manually select your chosen items. ### Editing attributes in bulk To edit a field in bulk, **select the combinations you wish to edit** and click on the **"Bulk actions"** button:
Then, click on the dropdown list for each category (for example, "Retail price") and select the element you wish to edit. You can then enable the field using the slider button (enable/disable) and **type in your desired value.**
{% hint style="info" %} By default, the set value for **every field is 0.** To reset a field, you can **toggle it** and manually set its **value back to 0.** {% endhint %} This way, changes will only be applied to **your selected combinations.** ### Removing attributes in bulk You can remove attributes in bulk by selecting multiple elements at once through filters or checkmarks, then click on **"Bulk actions" > "Delete X combinations"** ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2F3tKMFXvVvapZwxsfyzmG%2FProductpageScreen11.png?alt=media\&token=1e794ef2-a70a-4f2c-be77-cb0fac43a1e0) A window is displayed asking you to **confirm your choice.** ## Creating a virtual product Your shop may feature (partly or exclusively) virtual products – that is, products that are not shipped, but rather downloaded: entertainment tickets, e-books/PDF files, real-life services...\ PrestaShop makes it easy for you to create a virtual product. The process to do this is similar to the one for creating a simple product: * Go to the "Products" page, under the "Catalog" menu. * Click the "Add new product" button. * Next, click on "Virtual product". The page organization will change: * The "Stock" tab becomes "Virtual product". * The "Shipping" tab disappears. The "Virtual product" tab offers the possibility to attache a file (i.e., if your customer will pay to download something). * If not, leave it at that: you are selling a service, and nothing needs to be downloaded. * If yes, click the "Yes" option under "Add downloadable file". When you click "Yes", PrestaShop opens a new form within the tab, from which you can upload the file you intend to sell: ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FJe7rZNPPhR3QtLWymSdq%2FManagingProductsScreen23.png?alt=media\&token=165b08e0-1ac0-4296-a2cf-6b772dbc07ce) * **File**. Click the "Browse" button to find the file on your hard drive. As soon as you have selected a file, the upload begins. The maximum file-upload size setting depends on your server's settings, and cannot be increased from PrestaShop. If you have access to your server's `php.ini` file, these are the values you should change: * `upload_max_filesize = 20M` * `post_max_size = 20M` If you do not have access to the `php.ini` file, contact your web host about this. * **Filename**. The name of the file. This field is automatically filled after the file has been uploaded. It is not recommended to change it to another value. You should compress your file in zip format, in order to avoid the browser misinterpreting `.exe` or `.jpg` file formats. Browsers automatically download zip files for the customer, no question asked. If you are selling a high resolution image, uploading it using this form does not prevent you from uploading its thumbnail in the "Images" tab on the left. * **Number of allowed downloads**. You can set the number of time the file can be downloaded once the customer has bought it. You might prefer to limit this to 1, or 5. If you want to keep it unlimited, set the text field to 0. * **Expiration date**. Virtual files can be of promotional nature, or lose their selling value after a certain date. If so, you can set the expiry date after which the product will not be available on your shop anymore. Leave it blank if there is no expiry date. * **Number of days**. You can set the number of days after which the download link becomes non-functioning. If there is no limit, set the text field to 0. Once you are done with the "Virtual product" tab, you can edit all the other available tabs as if you would for a regular product. ## Creating a pack of products You may wish to sell a pack of products made of several items. I.e.: a computer start-up pack composed of the computer itself, a monitor, and a printer. PrestaShop makes it easy for you to create a "pack" product and add other products from your catalog to this pack. Packs enable you to simplify preparing orders. They also allow customers to take advantage of special prices and offers. You cannot currently add combinations or virtual products to a pack.\ If you need to have packs with combinations, you will have to create single products for each combination. This is a known limitation that will be fixed in a coming version of PrestaShop. You cannot add an existing pack within a new pack, or import the content of an existing pack into a new pack. The process to create a pack is similar to the one for creating a regular product: 1. Go to the "Products" page, under the "Catalog" menu. 2. Click the "Pack of products" button. Compared to other products, there are two main differences in the "Pack" tab: * Under "Pack of products" you can choose which products are part of the pack * In "Pack stock behavior" you can select how stocks should be handled. ### Adding products to your pack * The first field is used to search for products that are already registered in your shop. * The second field is used to indicate the quantity of chosen product should be added to the pack. * Once you are finished creating your pack, click "Save". ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2Fy1MCxFHWW978UBrJ8qRe%2FManagingProductsScreen24.png?alt=media\&token=504f7e76-3f9d-46b8-b4d8-466d0eef6a0f) You can add as many products as you would like to the pack. You can remove a product from the pack simply by clicking the trashcan icon when you hover on it. ### Managing pack quantities When you are creating a pack of products, PrestaShop needs to know how to handle the stock. In the "Pack" tab, under "Pack stock behavior", you must choose one of the following options: * **Use pack quantity** (default behavior). When a pack is sold, only the stock for the pack will be impacted. * **Use quantity of products in the pack**. When a pack is sold, only the stock for each product will be impacted. * **Use both, whatever is lower**. When a pack is sold, both the stock for the pack and the stock for each product will be impacted, whichever is lower. * **Default**. This is the default behavior as set at the shop level in your Product Settings. By default you will have "Use pack quantity" but it will change according to your choice. Once you are done with the "Pack" tab, you can edit the content of all the other available tabs as if you would for a regular product. # Managing Categories Categories are essential, they enable you to group equivalent products. This helps customers find their way through the variety of your catalog, and narrow down their search when looking for a specific type of product. You should create a new category from the moment you have at least two products with equivalent attributes. Products in a category should be comparable, if not interchangeable. Keep this idea in mind when adding new products and creating new categories. Categories are determinant of how people will navigate on your site and search for your products. You should focus on your category tree and how categories are organized even before you start creating product sheets. Categories are managed in the "Categories" page of the "Catalog" menu. This page displays a table with the currently existing categories, with the main information displayed. In order to display sub-categories, click on the parent category or select "View" in the action menu. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2F74s4Hexsz8WBK6vymzqb%2FManagingCategoriesScreen1.png?alt=media\&token=5dd6381b-0359-4a54-86bc-5e8908acd3fc) Thanks to the button in the "Displayed" column of the table, you can indicate the ones you want to hide from the customer by clicking on the green icon, thus turning it into a gray button. All the categories are actually sub-categories of the "Home" category. And to edit the "Home" category (or any currently selected category), click on "Edit category". If you want to create a new category (or a sub-category of an existing category), click on the "Add new category" button from any level of categories. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2Ff0HJppUD6iH8ZQq02Yq3%2FManagingCategoriesScreen2.png?alt=media\&token=6640206c-6ac7-48b3-8f00-b88f6f24f7e2) Translate your categories! Make sure to translate each field in every language that your shop supports. In order to do that, click on the language button next to the field, and choose the language in which you wish to edit the text. First of all, you must enter a set of general information: * **Name**. Give your category a name. Make it very short and descriptive, and choose your words wisely: your customers will rely on it when browsing your shop. * **Description**. You should fill this field, because not only will it be useful to you or your employees, but some themes might also make use of it, displaying it to your customers. * **Additional description**. This field is usually displayed after the product list on the category page. It's a good place to put longer SEO related content. * **Enabled**. Indicate if it is "enabled" (i.e., whether or not it will be available to your customers). For example, you may want to postpone displaying a new category to your customers because you have not quite completed it. * **Category cover image**. Click on "Browse" to upload an image from your computer which will represent this category. It will appear on the category's page. * **Category thumbnail**. Displays a small image in the parent category's page, if the theme allows it. * **SEO preview.** Display directly how your SEO configuration will look in search engine results. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FXzqhCuY6JpBtBvjinbOi%2FManagingCategoriesScreen3.png?alt=media\&token=2dff2590-dc2d-4a41-9f83-6838ab2035c4) * **Meta title.** The title that will appear on the search engines when a request is made by a customer * **Meta description**. A presentation of your category in just a few lines, intended to capture a customer's interest. This will appear in the result pages of search engines. * **Friendly URL**. Enables you to rewrite the addresses of your categories as you wish. For example, instead of having an address such as , you can have . In this case, all you would need to do is indicate in the field marked "Friendly URL" the words that you wish to see appear instead of "name-of-the-category" separated by dashes. * **Redirection when not displayed.** Choose what visitors see if this category is disabled or hidden (e.g., a 404 page or a redirect to another page like a different category). * **Group access**. Restricts access to the category and its products to certain shoppers. To see these categories, your shoppers must belong to a user group. For more information, check out the "Groups" tab in the "Customers settings" page, from the "Shop Parameters" menu. * **Parent Category**. *Does not appear when creating a root category.* If you wish to create a subcategory belonging to a category other than the home page, choose the category under which it will appear. The form is the same when creating a root category or a sub-category. The only difference is that when clicking "Add new category" from a sub-level of categories, PrestaShop understands that you want to create a sub-category, and therefore sets the "Parent category" option accordingly.\
The root category is very useful in multistore mode. Imagine you have 3 stores with different or partly different products and categories: you might want to use a different root category for each store. The root category thus reflects the "home" category of each store so if you do not want to have the same products in the homepage category of each store, you need different root categories. This way it is easier to assign categories to each store and you can have different products in the home category. Once you have finished configuring your category, save it, and you are ready to fill it with products. A new category will not automatically appear in your shop's menu. To display it, you should edit the menu with the "Main menu" module (when using the default theme), or any custom module you may have to manage the menu. ## Navigating and editing categories The "Edit category" button in the button bar enables you to edit the parent category of the currently-displayed sub-categories. This means that when you are viewing the main sub-categories, clicking the "Edit category" button will enable you to edit the "Home" category. You can click on any category in the table: this will open that category, and display all of its sub-categories. In effect, this will change the context of the interface: clicking the "Edit category" button will edit the current parent category, and clicking the "Add new category" button will open the category creation form with the "Parents category" option set to the current parent category. ## Importing and exporting categories Besides the "Add new category" and the "Edit category" buttons, the settings wheel also features two important options: * **Export.** Enables you to download the list of all categories, in CSV format. * **Import.** Opens the "Advanced Parameters > Import" page, with the expect data type set to "Categories". Go to the "Understanding the Advanced Parameters" chapter to learn more about importing files. You will need your file to follow this format: ``` ID;Name;Description;Position;Displayed; 3;iPods;Now that you can buy movies from the iTunes Store and sync them to your iPod, the whole world is your theater.;1;1; 4;Accessories;Wonderful accessories for your iPod;2;1; 5;Laptops;The latest Intel processor, a bigger hard drive, plenty of memory, and even more new features all fit inside just one liberating inch. The new Mac laptops have the performance, power, and connectivity of a desktop computer. Without the desk part.;3;1; ``` The category identifier is the ID, not the category's name. More import options are available in the "Import" page of the "Advanced parameters" menu. ## Adding products to a category In order to add a product in a category, you must open the product configuration page and go to its "Categories" sections, on the "Description" tab. This is where you can set the categories to which the product belongs. The "Home" category is a special category, where you can highlight/promote products from any other category by making them appear in the "Popular products" block. By default, you can only display 8 products on the homepage. The "Popular products" block depends on the "Featured products" module. If you want more (or less) products on the homepage, configure this module (from the "Modules" tab in "Module Manager" under "Modules" menu). Note: you do not have to remove a product from its original category in order to put it on the homepage. A product can have as many categories as needed. # Monitoring your Catalog The "Monitoring" page lists the sections of your shop to which you must pay the most attention in order to best manage your catalog, and make sure nothing goes out of control. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FOkk75zX4MJpwLGnf4rQE%2FMonitoringCatalogScreen1.png?alt=media\&token=3e94d920-7966-44c1-90c1-16f870898060) Seven sections are shown: * **List of empty categories**. Gives you the categories that do not have any products. You should either delete these empty categories or fill them with at least one product. This prevents customers from finding themselves in an empty category in your shop. * **List of products with combinations but without available quantities for sale**. Gives you which products are no longer for sale. If you do not see any good reason for them not being for sale, then put them back online * **List of products without combinations and without available quantities for sale**. Likewise, gives you which products are no longer for sale. Find the reason why, or put them back up. * **List of disabled products**. Gives you the products that have been disabled in the store and that aren't visible to your customers. Consider either enabling them (maybe after restocking them) or deleting them from your catalog. * **List of products without images**. Indicates the products for which no images have been uploaded yet. Make sure you upload some nice images for these products so that customers will have a good look at what they are buying! * **List of products without description and summary**. People (and search engines!) like to read detailed information / witty descriptions / great stories about the products they buy. Descriptions are an essential part of your products sheets, don't neglect them. * **List of products without price**. Obviously you should pay attention to this section as it can save you some troubles if you realize in time that some products without any price can be added to your customers' carts. Unless you deliberately set these prices at 0, you should closely monitor your prices. The "Monitoring" page should be checked regularly in order to improve your catalog management. # Managing Product Attributes Attributes are the basis of product variations (or "combinations" in PrestaShop's interface): you can only create variations of a product if at least one of its attributes changes. You should think of attributes as properties of a product that may change between variations while still keeping the same product name: color, capacity, size, weight, etc. You can use anything that varies between versions of the same product, except the price. The difference between an attribute and a feature depends on the product itself. Some products might share the same property, one being an attribute built for building product variations, another one being simply an invariable feature. For instance, a customer can buy an iPad variation based on attributes (color, disk space) but not on features (weight, size). Likewise, another shop might sell t-shirts variations based on attributes (color, size, gender) but not on features (weight). In your shop, features are displayed in a table, giving additional information about the product; while attributes make it possible to select among product combinations. Attributes are configured on a per-product basis, from the "Products" page under the "Catalog" menu. However, they must first be registered on your shop using the tool on the "Attributes" tab of the "Attributes & Features" page, under the "Catalog" menu. This page presents a list of all your currently registered attributes. You can edit or delete each one using the actions on the right of the table, or display their values by clicking on the "magnifying glass" action, which opens a new table. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FrlhQmpo9CkEWOgIHMvtr%2FManagingProductAttributesScreen1.png?alt=media\&token=abfb97da-2ff4-49ee-b018-10ec42cdd7ac) You can also set the attributes front office presentation order by clicking on the arrow icons, or by drag-and-dropping each row when the mouse hovers the "Position" column. ## Creating attributes To add an attribute, or in other words, to add a group of variation possibilities (colors, capacity, material, etc.), click on "Add new attribute". A new page appears. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2Fp9SxoPOKU24DwHPnvVxZ%2FManagingProductAttributesScreen2.png?alt=media\&token=85bc5f7c-fad7-4ed9-a70b-e14da635c4b1) Fill out the form: * **Name**. The exact description of the attribute. This needs to be short but precise, so as to not confuse it with another attribute. * **Public name**. The attribute name, as displayed to the customers on the product page. Since some attributes might have the same name for varying content, this field enables you to still present it correctly within the product's context, while being able to easily tell an attribute from another with a similar name but different meaning. * **URL.** Define the URL of the attribute's page. * **Meta title.** Give this page a title. * **Indexable.** Activate to index this page in the Faceted Search module. * **Attribute type**. Enables you to choose whether the product's page should display this attribute's values as a drop-down list, a radio button list, or a color (or texture) picker. Save your new attribute to return to the attributes list. You must now add values to your attribute. ## Creating a new value Click on "Add new value". A new page appears. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2F18QCWJe1Go8vHsqPejME%2FManagingProductAttributesScreen3.png?alt=media\&token=729938c6-408f-47ff-98e9-029546dbe984) Fill out the form: * **Attribute group**. From the drop-down list, select one of the available attributes. * **Value**. Give a value to the attribute: "Red", "16 Gb", "1.21 gigawatts", etc. * **URL.** Define the URL of the attribute's value's page. * **Meta title.** Give this page a title. The Color and Texture fields are only shown if the attribute is a color type. * **Color**. If the attribute is a color, you can enter its value in HTML color code (i.e. "#79ff52" or "lightblue"), in RGB or HSL, or use the color picker to precisely show the correct hue. * **Texture**. If your product does not use a solid color but rather a textured one (i.e. tiger stripes), you can upload a small image file that will be displayed on the product's page. Note that this will replace the HTML color from the field above. Click on the "Save" button is order to start the upload.\ You can also use this option to let the customer choose the color variety from a picture of your product rather than a color. How it is displayed on the front-end depends on the theme you are using... You can add more values for the same attribute type by saving your changes with the "Save then add another value" button. Once your attributes are in place and their values are set, you can create product variations (or "combinations") in each product's "Combinations" tab, from the "Products" page under the "Catalog" menu. # Managing Product Features Features are a product's intrinsic characteristic: they remain the same throughout the product's variations (or "combinations"). You should think of features the same way you think of product attributes, with the notable difference that you cannot create product variations based on features. The difference between an attribute and a feature depends on the product itself. Some products might share the same property, one being an attribute built for building product variations, another one being simply an invariable feature. For instance, a customer can buy an iPad variation based on attributes (color, disk space) but not on features (weight, size). Likewise, another shop might sell t-shirts variations based on attributes (color, size, gender) but not on features (weight). In your shop, features are displayed in a table, giving additional information about the product, while attributes make it possible to select among product combinations. Features are configured on a per-product basis, from the "Product" page under the "Catalog" menu, but they must first be registered on your shop using the tool on the "Features" tab under the "Attributes & Features" page from the "Catalog" menu. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FalnaESDolBO5yDsTX3uj%2FManagingProductFeaturesScreen1.png?alt=media\&token=4c9afcc1-4962-497a-b96f-d4c9d1ed5187) You can set the features' order using the arrows in the "Position" column. The "Actions" column gives an Edit action, a Delete action and a View action which you can select by clicking on the magnifying glass. From there, you can sort, edit and delete values if you need to. ## Adding a feature Click on "Add new feature". A very simple form appears. This is where you name the feature itself: for example, the types of headphones provided with a music player. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2Fq0AQmnCQTAy69SXIQ1HL%2FManagingProductFeaturesScreen2.png?alt=media\&token=a4e179b2-188a-42ec-9f2f-607a39c69a09) Give a name to this new feature, an URL and define its meta title. If you want to make this feature available for the Faceted Search module, select its indexation. Save your new feature to return to the attributes list. ## Adding a value to a feature Click on "Add new feature value". Another form appears. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2Fvev22z2oo2aNAfYE9eJl%2FManagingProductFeaturesScreen3.png?alt=media\&token=6f3b571a-7c14-4bc2-bfa7-b5c9b55621ac) Fill out the form: * **Feature**. From the drop-down list, select one of the available features. * **Value**. Give a value to the attribute: "5 lbs", "27 cm", etc. * **URL.** Give this feature value a URL. * **Meta title.** And give a title to this page. Well done, you can now save your feature value... and add more values for the same feature type by saving your changes with the "Save then add another value" button! # Managing Brands Unless you make your products yourself, you should always register your products' brands in PrestaShop. Brands used to be called manufacturers in previous versions of PrestaShop The behavior of a brand is exactly the same as the one of a manufacturer in PrestaShop 1.6: only the denomination has changed. Mostly to make it easier for customers to navigate through your catalog, as it is more common to be looking for a specific brand, rather than a specific manufacturer. If you still wish to use "manufacturer" instead of "brand", then you should customize your front-office translations. If you sell your own products, you must at least create your company as a brand: this helps your customer find what they are looking for, and this can bring some valuable search engine points. On the front-end of your store, brands are sorted alphabetically. You cannot change that order. New brands are automatically disabled. You must enable them in order to have them appear online – even if they do not contain any product yet. By entering information about the brands, your site's visitors can have rapid access to all of a given brand's products. This makes navigating around your site easier for them. In terms of visibility, filling out these fields will improve your position in search engines. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FLckFkGGupbOiSzUgCpe0%2FmanagingBrandsScreen1.png?alt=media\&token=4522f367-6f3d-4639-bfa2-f22a6921baa2) ## Creating a brand Click on the "Add new brand" button, and a creation form appears. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FF4tCWvYU6W5uUq2lqfD3%2FManagingBrandsScreen2.png?alt=media\&token=4d97e872-927e-4eb2-be4d-1ee290d94321) Fill out all of the fields: * **Name**. Indicate the name of the brand in order to simplify your visitor's searches. * **Short description**. The description that will appear on the search engines when a user makes a request. * **Description**. Add a more complex description of your brand, its activity, and products. You can detail their specialties and promote the quality of their products. The brand's description will be shown in your store among the others. * **Logo**. Having a brand logo is essential: it leads the customers' eyes to trust your shop almost as much as they would trust that brand's shop. * **Meta title**. The title that will appear on the search engines when a request is made by a customer * **Meta description**. A presentation of the brand in just a few lines, intended to capture a customer's interest. This will appear in search results. * **Enabled**. You can disable a brand, even temporarily. This will only remove it from the list of brands on your shop's front-end. Save your changes in order to be taken back to the brand's list. From there, you can: * Click on a brand's name or logo, and get a list of all the products associated with it. If there are none, then you need to associate products to that brand, working on a per-product basis, from the "Products" page under the "Catalog" menu. The same result is achieved by clicking the "Magnifying glass" icon on the right of the current page. * Disable the brand, by clicking on the green button. Once disabled, a gray button appears in its place: click to re-enable the brand. * View / Edit / Delete the brand by clicking on the respective buttons on the right of the row. ## Adding a brand's address At the bottom of the "Brands" page is an "Addresses" section. Each brand can have its own address registered with PrestaShop. This serves mainly as a reminder for yourself: this way, you'll always have the contact address for a brand available directly within PrestaShop. Click on the "Add new brand address" button to open the creation form. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FqeGg9Pt8RXHyRVXIxa1S%2FManagingBrandsScreen3.png?alt=media\&token=4228ee64-f329-41b9-9031-3d93162a3a9e) Make sure to choose the correct brand, and to fill as many fields as possible. # Managing Suppliers Having suppliers registered is optional if you already have brands who directly supply you with their products. It all depends on your needs, but if your product supplier is not the same as the product brand, then you should make sure to have both registered in your system, and associated with each product. In PrestaShop, a supplier is a company which provides you with a product. Even if you sell your own products, you must at least create your company as a supplier. Just as for brands, your site's visitors can have rapid access to all of a supplier's products. This makes navigating around your site easier for them. In terms of visibility, filling out these fields will improve your position in search engines. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FG7ILAEJAyC5L94JlhzJx%2FManagingSuppliersScreen1.png?alt=media\&token=79a4f2f4-bca5-4235-b0bd-6102626b275d) Click on "Add new supplier" in the Suppliers tab of "Brands & Suppliers" under the Catalog menu, and a creation form appears. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FcBD81X9rp2YFIDOCReHg%2FManagingSuppliersScreen2.png?alt=media\&token=3af2054a-113d-444a-b56f-99ff335c0eee) Fill out all of the fields: * **Name**. Indicate the name of the supplier in order to simplify your visitor's searches. * **Description**. Add a more complex description of your supplier and their activity and products. You can detail their specialties and promote the quality of their products. The supplier's description will be shown within your shop. * The **contact details** fields (*Phone*, *Mobile phone*, *Address*, *Zip/postal code*, *City*, *Country*). The *State* field only appears for relevant countries. * **DNI**. It's the supplier's fiscal or legal identification number (e.g. NIF, SIRET, VAT number). Usage varies by country. Leave empty if not applicable. * **Logo**. Having a supplier logo is essential: it leads the customers' eyes to trust your shop almost as much as they trust that supplier/brand. * **Meta title**. The title that will appear on the search engines when a request is made by a customer. * **Meta description**. A presentation of the supplier in just a few lines, intended to capture a customer's interest. This will appear in search results * **Enabled**. You can disable a supplier, even temporarily. This will only remove it from the list of suppliers on your shop's front-end. Save your changes in order to be taken back to the suppliers' list. From there, you can: * Click on a supplier's ID or logo, and get all the products associated with it. If there are none, then you should work on a per-product basis, from the "Options" tab of the "Products" page under the "Catalog" menu. The same result is achieved by clicking the view icon on the right. * Disable the supplier, by clicking on the green button. Once disabled, a grey button appears in its place: click to re-enable the supplier. * View / Edit / Delete the supplier by clicking on the respective buttons on the right of the row. # Managing Files PrestaShop enables you to make some files available to your customers before their purchase. For example, let's say you sell electronics, and you would like to urge your customers to read a document on how a product works. You can upload a document for that purpose. You can also simply have the product's PDF manual directly available for download right on the product page. Each product can have files, which can be individually set in the "Details" tab, under "Attached files". That page gives you access to all the attached files of the shop: if you need to apply the associated one file with many products, you will thus only have to upload it once. You can also upload files on their own, before associating them with products. This is done from the "Files" page, under the "Catalog" menu. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2F4YY5HpyGk1tXGx9xcFq6%2FManagingFilesScreen1.png?alt=media\&token=7aa04ebf-524c-474e-bb17-cff6d52db7eb) The process to register a new file to your shop is straightforward: 1. Click on the "Add new file" button. A form appears. 2. **Filename**. Give your file a name, in all the needed languages. It will be seen by your customers. 3. **Description**. Give it a quick description, also in as many languages as needed. 4. Click on "Choose file(s)" or "Browse" to select a file on your computer to upload. 5. Click on "Save".\
![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FPJFz0mlkykDSWDZ8IvTN%2FManagingFilesScreen2.png?alt=media\&token=a6903618-b058-432c-841a-fbb833fad70e) You are then redirected to the list of files, where your file now appears. It is now available to all products, through their "Attached files" option. Now the "Attachments" tab will appear in your online shop and your customers can download that file if needed. # Managing Discounts ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/YXjlyG6ClBARyUJ34JJn/51839844%20\(5\)%20\(5\).png) Discounts and vouchers play an important role in your daily relationships with your customers. Typically, customers like two things when shopping: * Feeling special, unique. * Getting good prices. Both can be achieved with customized discounts, and this is precisely where vouchers come into play – or more precisely, price rules. "Price rules" can take two forms: * **Cart rules**. It enables you to create per-customer voucher codes, but also much more. * **Catalog price rules**. Enables you to assign price reductions by category, brand, supplier, attribute or feature.\ \ For instance, you can set a rule that would say that Spanish customers belonging to the "Good clients" group would get 10% off on your electronics category and all Sony products for the first week of July. This chapter contains the following sections: * [Cart Rules](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-discounts/cart-rules) * [Catalog Price Rules](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-discounts/catalog-price-rules) # Cart Rules The "Cart rules" page, found under "Discounts" in the "Catalog" menu, gives you access to an advanced tool to create very precise vouchers. When this guide mentions vouchers, we are actually talking about cart rules – which, in themselves, are quite different to credit slips. Differences between a credit slip, a voucher and a cart rule A **credit slip** is first and foremost a written proof that a product has been returned. Most of the time, the user can use it as a voucher. A **voucher** is a discount code which does not have to be tied to a merchandise return or a refund, and which can take more forms than a simple credit slip: * A discount on an order (percentage). * A discount on an order (amount). * Free shipping. You can apply a voucher to all customers, a group of customers, or a single customer; you can set its expiration date. A **cart rule** is basically an advanced version of a voucher: * Name the discount. * Allow the customer to use only a portion of the discount. * Assign priorities between cart rules. * Set the compatibility between cart rules. * Have the discount only work with some carriers. * Have the discount only work with a selection of products and/or categories and/or brands and/or suppliers and/or attributes... or all of these at the same time if necessary! * Have the discount be applicable for free shipping and/or a discount on an order and/or a free gift... or all of these at the same time if necessary! In this user guide, "cart rule" and "voucher" are synonymous and interchangeable. The "Cart rules" page lists the currently existing cart rules and vouchers, which you can enable or disable by clicking on the icons in the "Status" column. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FxBJHktZPXLpiCYgYCxAZ%2FCartrulesScreen1.png?alt=media\&token=667d357a-3521-452e-9c63-365b65d4ceb6) ## Creating a new cart rule A voucher can be created automatically after a product return, but you can create a new voucher at any time manually, and be very specific about its properties. For this, click on "Add new cart rule". The creation form has three tabs, enabling you to precisely build new rules and vouchers. ### Information Tab The first tab, "Information", contains the rule's identifiers and main settings. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FKbSgYd63IcZwYJSGc35S%2FCartrulesScreen2.png?alt=media\&token=87456169-9067-43d1-9ee3-376938f706fd) * **Name**. The name is public, so you should keep it casual. * **Description**. The description is not public. It helps your shop employees understand why the rule was created. * **Code**. Give your rule a unique code. You can either create one manually (and therefore use readable words, like 1VOUCH4JOE), or have PrestaShop generate one unique string by clicking the "Generate" button. Of course, you can also use any other string generator (such as ).\ Note that if no code is set, the rule will apply to any customer fitting the other conditions: * If there is a code, then customers have to enter it during the ordering process. * If there is no code, then the rule is automatically applied to benefiting customers at checkout. * **Highlight.** If enabled, PrestaShop will let the user know that a voucher corresponding to the items in the cart is available and can be added. * **Partial use**. If disabled, the rule/voucher can only be used once, even if it is not completely used. If enabled, a new voucher is created when the current one is not completely used. * It is only applicable if the voucher value is greater than the cart total. If you allow partial use, a new voucher will be created with the remainder. * If you do not allow partial use, the voucher value will be lowered to the total order amount. * **Priority**. If a customer (or group of customers) is eligible for more than one voucher, or if more than one voucher can be applied to an order, then PrestaShop applies said voucher one by one in the alphanumerical order. You can change that order by placing a lower priority on your voucher. By default, they all have a priority of 1. If you set it to a higher number, the voucher will be applied after vouchers with a lower number. * **Status**. You can disable and enable a rule whenever you feel is necessary. ### Conditions Tab The second tab, "Conditions", contains a large set of possibilities, enabling you to target precisely who should be able to benefit from this rule. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2F7i8lmPoQfupiZsDbBc8s%2FCartrulesScreen3.png?alt=media\&token=02c371b9-107d-4cd7-bd9f-072b3058af9a) * **Limit to a single customer**. This is where you indicate that the voucher you are creating is for one customer only. For instance, if you had a delivery delay and you want to make a gesture of goodwill, you can create a voucher for this customer that only he or she can access. To quickly find the customer, type in the first few letters of their first name, last name or e-mail in the text field.\ If empty, PrestaShop will understand that any customer can use it... unless you have added a customer group as a further condition (see "Customer group selection" checkbox below). * **Validity**. The default validity is one month, but you can reduce that to one week or even one day. * **Minimum amount**. The minimum order amount from which the voucher is applicable. Your voucher will only be applicable if the customer's order is above the given amount. You can choose if that amount should include taxes and/or shipping costs. * **Total available**. Set a quantity of available vouchers: either "1" if it is intended for a single customer, or any number if the voucher is for whoever uses one first. * **Total available for each user**. You can set the number of times a voucher can be used for each user. That number must be at least equal to the quantity of available vouchers above ("Total available" field). * If that number is inferior to the total quantity of available vouchers, then one single customer will not be able to use all of them. * Keeping it to "1" makes sure that each of your customers can only use the voucher once. In that case, make sure the voucher applies to a group rather than a customer... The checkboxes at the bottom of the section are very important, as they help you further filter to what or to whom the rule is to be applied. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FogyJ2kGJ2GfzXJnR4B5i%2FCartrulesScreen4.png?alt=media\&token=045fbe72-b378-45eb-898c-1c0bd614394b) * **Country selection.** By default, the cart rule applies to all countries. To restrict it to specific countries, select them from the Unselected countries list and click Add to move them to the Selected countries list. To remove a country, select it from the Selected countries list and click Remove. If the "Selected countries" list is empty, the rule applies to all countries without restriction. * **Carrier selection**. You can make it so that the customer will have a discount if he or she chooses a specific carrier for the package delivery. * **Customer group selection**. This is very useful. Thanks to PrestaShop's group creation tool, you can create discounts that apply to a range of users, and build other conditions on top of that discount thanks to the cart rule creation tool. * **Compatibility with other cart rules**. By default, an order can benefit from any number of cart rules. With this option, you can tell PrestaShop that this rule cannot be combined with a selection of other rules. This option only appears if you have more than one cart rule. * **Product selection**. Another very useful tool, which enables to create automatic vouchers for a cart which contain specific products. The tool is explained in more detail below. * **Shop selection**. When the multistore mode is enabled, by default a cart rule applies to all your stores. With this option, you can make it so that a rule only applies to a selection of your stores. The "Product selection" option brings a whole new form and enables you to create not only per-product vouchers, but also per-categories, per-brands, per-suppliers and even per-attribute ones. As a bonus, you can combine all these in order to specify your customer target as much as possible. For instance, you can create automatic vouchers for your customer in the form "Buy at least 3 Apple product, get free shipping!". This is really a tool within the cart rule too, and its configuration is quite specific. You can add as many product selections as needed, following this path: 1. Click the "Product selection" link to add a new section. 2. Indicate the number of products needed for the discount to activate. 3. Add at least one rule, of the type you want: products, attributes, categories, brands, suppliers. You can add as many rules per product selection as you want, even one for each type if necessary. 4. Clicking the "Add" button adds a new line in the selection. For each type, you must give details on the content the rule applies to. Click the "Choose" link and a window opens, listing the content available for this type (products, categories...). Move the content from the left panel to the right one by clicking on the "Add" button, and close the window by clicking on the "X" at the top right. If only one content is selected, the content field will give its name; otherwise, it will indicate the number of selected content. You can add as many rules within a selection as necessary. These rules are cumulative: either they all apply, or the discount is not granted. Product selections are independent: you can add as many as needed, and they will not influence each other. This enables you to create a whole range of products to which the cart rule will apply. ### Actions Tab The third and last tab, "Actions", is where you choose what the discount actually consists of. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FVi29QWihy8Tx6TXkAeHD%2FCartrulesScreen5.png?alt=media\&token=800ec308-7118-49cd-864e-09dd099ffa03) * **Free shipping**. The rule treats benefiting customers to free shipping. * **Apply a discount**. * *Percent (%).* The rule applies to a percentage of the order total. For instance, let's say the order is valued at $200 before taxes. The rule has a value of 15%. Customers who benefit from this rule will only have to pay $170 (before taxes and shipping costs). * *Amount.* The rule applies a monetary discount on the order total. For instance, let's say the order is valued at $200 before taxes. The discount offers $20 off the purchase. Customers who benefit from this rule will only pay $180 (before shipping costs). You can choose whether taxes are applied to the discount or not. * *None.* The rule does not offer any discount on the order. Choosing this option makes the next section, "Apply a discount to", disappear. * **Exclude discounted products**. By default, the voucher applies to any kind of product, whether it is already discounted or not. By enabling this feature, the voucher you are creating will not be applied to a product or a combination if it is already on sale. * **Send a free gift**. You can choose to offer a gift for some conditions (and skip the discount altogether). A field appears: type the first letters of the product, and choose from the list of matching names. Once everything has been saved, you can send your voucher code to your customers, or let the system handle the cart rules automatically, depending on your settings. Your voucher will appear in the "Cart Rules" tab. You can delete or edit it at any time. If the voucher was set to a specific group or customer, then it will appear in the front office, in the customer's "Vouchers" section of his account as well as in the cart (if you chose to), where they can choose which one to apply to their order. ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2F1aPrssnIz1HUA3aGPPIj%2FCartrulesScreen7.png?alt=media\&token=bcc97f38-8845-45d4-aea0-df8f70585b0e) ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2Fk4WnMQU5Mdli7f9NCTyQ%2FCartrulesScreen6.png?alt=media\&token=da728e5e-e8ab-451a-85fa-60d5d60d37cf) Cart rules that are set to apply to all customers do not appear in the customer's "My vouchers" page: he or she has to know about them in order to use them. It is up to you to let them know about these public discounts. In order to apply the cart rule, the customer needs to visit his cart and enter the voucher in the "Have a promo code?" field and click "Add". The customer will not be able to apply the voucher if the check-out is already validated. Once applied, the cart summary displays the voucher's impact on the order's amount. # Catalog Price Rules Catalog price rules enable you to assign price reductions by category, brand, supplier, attribute or feature. As its name implies, this type of rules applies to a range of products; it cannot be used for a single product. If you need a discount applied to a single product, you must create a cart rule instead or create a specific price (in the "Pricing" tab of the product's edition page). For instance, you can set a rule that would say that for Spanish customers belonging to the "Good clients" group would get 10% off on your electronics category and all Sony products for the first week of July. The "Catalog price rules" page lists the currently existing rules, which you can edit or delete by clicking on the action buttons. If you need to disable a rule, simply change its end date to the day before. ## Creating a new catalog price rule The creation form page has two sections, enabling you to precisely build new rules. ### Catalog price rules The first form is easy to understand. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/Bvsomav3O0QphkacicRq/51839309.png) This is where you set who should benefit from the rule, what the discount should be, and other details. * **Name**. The name is public, so you should keep it casual. * **Shop**. *Multistore mode only!* The rule applies to customers who buy through a specific shop. Only available if you have at least two shops. * **Currency**. The rule applies to customers who set to pay with a specific currency. * **Country**. The rule applies to customers from a specific country. * **Group**. The rule applies to customers who belong to a specific customer group. * **From quantity.** The rule applies if the order has at least a specific number of matching products. * **Price (tax excl.).** The new price for the product selection. Here you can set the public price of the products that match the rules that you are putting in place. By default, the rule applies to the price initially set. * **From and To**. The rule applies in this time frame. * **Reduction type.** The discount can either be an amount of money or a percentage of the order total. * **Reduction with or without taxes.** The discount can either include the tax or leave the tax as is. * **Reduction**. The value of the reduction. Depending on the "Reduction type" above, putting "10.0" in the field can either mean "$10 off" (depending on the default currency) or "10% off". Of course, you can combine all of these rules. ### Conditions The "Conditions" section is where you set the products to which the category price rule applies. It only appears if you click on the "Add a new condition group" button. If no conditions are set, the price rule will apply to ALL products of your catalog. Be careful not to forget the conditions! ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/CApABRrey5fNp4joZp97/51839310%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) Conditions are built around condition groups, meaning that your data from the "Catalog price rule" section above can be applied to many different ranges of products. Conditions are grouped in an inclusive manner: all conditions of the group have to apply for the catalog price to apply. Hence the "AND". Meanwhile, condition groups are exclusive: only one group has to apply for the catalog price to apply. Hence the "OR". The default condition group is empty. You can add conditions to it using the drop-down menus in the lower part of the section: * Choose a category or any other type of selection, and then click on the "Add condition" button. * The condition will appear in the condition group. You can put many conditions in a condition group. * Once a group is completed and you want to create a new condition group, click on the "Add new condition group". A new group will then appear, which you can fill in the same way. By default, new conditions are added to the condition group that was created last. If you need to add conditions to a previous group, click on that group to highlight it, and then add your conditions. You cannot currently delete a condition group. # Managing Stock * [Stock Overview](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-stock/stock-overview) * [Stock Movements](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-stock/stock-movements) You can manage your stock in your shop using the "Stock" page, in the "Catalog" menu. No set-up is required to activate stock management. The stock management page consists of two tabs: "Stock" and "Movements". By default, when you open the stock management page, the "Stock" tab is the opened tab. Inside this tab, you can have an overview of the stock of products in your catalog and manage their quantities. The "Movements" tab gives you an history of all the changes in quantities. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/azdriFhIBFtFjL6fBE3h/54266288%20\(3\)%20\(5\).gif) # Stock Overview This tab contains a table presenting your products' stock, as well as search options and allows you to directly edit your products' quantities. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/wq1WrtQYY8SOXKt5RHo3/56688695%20\(3\).png) A table allows you to have an overview of your catalog stock at a glance. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/cy5G7eYoxphxVQtbIHob/56688697%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) Each line represents a product (either standard, virtual or bundle) or one of its combinations. The only difference is that combination attributes are displayed just below the product’s name. The table contains the following columns: * Image thumbnail, to help fast visual recognition. * Product’s name and when it’s a combination, its attributes’ values. * Product reference. In case a combination has its own reference then it’ll be used instead of the parent’s reference. * Supplier. In case several suppliers are assigned to a product, only the default supplier will be shown here. * Status, to know if the product is enabled or not. * **Physical stock**, which represents the quantity you actually have physically in your storage. * **Reserved stock**, which represents the quantity of products that are currently in an open customer order that has not been shipped yet. * **Available stock**, which is the quantity available for sale. * Edit quantity. This input allows modifying the quantity manually. See [below](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-stock/stock-overview#Stockoverview-qty_edition). Understanding the notions of physical, reserved and available stockStarting from version 1.7.2.0, PrestaShop introduces three different notions of stock, which are different from the ones used in Advanced Stock Management in the 1.6 versions. * **Physical stock** represents the quantity you actually have physically in your storage. You may add or remove physical stock, for instance when receiving a supply order or when doing an inventory adjustment. * **Reserved stock** represents the quantity of products that are currently in an open customer order that has not been shipped yet. In other terms, these products are physically in your storage but are not available for sale anymore. You cannot change directly the reserved stock. The reserved stock only depends on customer orders. * **Available stock** is the quantity available for sale. Unlike with Advanced Stock Management in version 1.6, you cannot directly modify the available stock unless you change the physical stock as well. This is the quantity displayed in the ["Product" page](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-products). Relation between physical, reserved and available stock At any time, these 3 notions of stock are linked by the following equation: *Physical stock - Reserved stock = Available stock* Editing the physical stock will also affect the available stock, and vice-versa. By default, products are sorted by decreasing product\_id, meaning that the most recently created product will be on top. If there are more than 100 products and combinations, then the table is paginated. ### Edition of quantities Quantities can be modified directly in the "Stock" tab, with the input field located in the end-right column of the stock overview table. #### Simple edition To edit a single product's stock, simply enter the desired quantity change in the input field. What you’re typing in this input is a quantity delta, meaning it’s not the desired final stock value but the quantity you’re adding or removing. You can either type in the quantity to add or to remove (with a minus sign), or use the up and down arrows to adjust the quantity.\ ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/0FLE2Ti9sqtYcCaSLEAE/54268490%20\(5\).gif)To validate the new stock, simply click on the blue "Check" button inside the input field, or use the "Apply new quantities" button at the top of the stock overview table. While editing the quantity, you’ll see an overview of the resulting final stock:![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/lXXeFJCuD5ePl5c7Nlnt/56688698%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png)This feature is here to help you see at the same time the starting point, the endpoint and the difference between those before validating. Remember that since physical and available stock are always linked by the equation showed earlier, you'll edit both at the same time. #### Multiple edition If you want to edit multiple quantities at the same time, you can also edit the quantities of several products and then validate it all with the “Apply new quantity” button.![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/ehkgHuBejWqlKqRyfQPJ/54266290%20\(3\)%20\(5\).gif) #### Bulk edition Since PrestaShop 1.7.3, product stock information can now be updated in bulk instead of one by one. And it is very easy, all you have to do is check (in the left column) all the products you want to edit, enter the quantity to add or subtract to the already available stock and confirm! ### Low stock alerts Also, when a product is low on stock, you can ask PrestaShop to send you alerts. You can configure the low stock threshold as well as toggling the notification either globally in the "[Product](http://doc.prestashop.com/display/PS17/Managing+Products)" page or per product. And then, in this stock overview page, products with a quantity under the low stock level are now highlighted. A quick filter has been added too, which allows you to quickly see products low on stock by placing them at the top of the list. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/ZYYRLa5jBTkYBifwPzsf/55607508%20\(4\)%20\(3\).png) ### Search and filter options At the top of the tab, you’ll find two features to quickly look for any product. The search bar is designed for use-cases where you know which product you’re looking for because you either have in mind its reference, name or supplier. While the advanced filters allow you to browse more options to fine-tune your search. #### Search bar The search bar looks for: * product’s name * product’s reference * supplier * attributes’ values. This allows you to look for a specific attribute value like color. When typing ‘green’, you’ll see all products which share this color attribute value. This is still in beta though, and might not work with too short attribute values like with sizes: ‘S’, ‘M’, ‘L’. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/X0tZxxcg01Ch9sRpxoO9/54266294%20\(3\)%20\(5\).gif) #### Advanced filters In the ‘Stock’ tab, advanced filters contain: * a supplier filter, which allows you to quickly browse available suppliers and choose one or several. * a category filter with an expandable tree. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/QHaGdFinayLKVdXPjSKL/56688700%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) ## Import / Export Because your shop deals with a lot of data, PrestaShop allows you to import or export the information displayed in the Stock Overview page in a CSV file. Why? So that you can work on it with your computer, connect to your own stock management system… you name it! You just need to click on the blue cloud icons on the right-hand side of the screen and you’ll be on your way to the import/export system. ## Multi-store This new stock management system is compatible with multi-store. For obvious reasons, if you have multiple shops inside a group where stocks are not shared, you cannot manage your stock in “all shops” or “group” context. If you try to do so, you might see the following error message: ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/uYIuK5etX6XDgUkgLhkx/56688701%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) Instead you have to select a shop in which you can work to edit its stock.
If you’re using a group of shops that share the same quantities, you’ll also have to select a unique shop context instead of a group but any change you make in a shop will also affect the other shops. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/C1GkhPSEhZ15qFlplyta/56688702.png) # Stock Movements The table of stock movements provides you with a log of all the stock changes. Because it’s a history of previous stock movements, this table only has an informative role and therefore cannot be edited. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/BSSLmGizdUFuZkEuX3wI/56688704%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) ## Movements overview ### Structure The structure looks similar to the stock table but here each line corresponds to a change in physical quantity for a product or combination. It contains the following columns: * Image thumbnail, to help fast visual recognition. * Product’s name and when it’s a combination, its attributes’ values. * Product reference. In case a combination has its own reference then it’ll be used instead of the parent’s reference. * Movement type. It represents the reason why a product’s physical quantity has changed. * Quantity added or removed. This delta is formatted with a + or - label to facilitate visual recognition. * Date and time, which is the exact server timestamp when the change occurred. * Employee, which is the name of the person responsible for the change. \ By default, stock movements are sorted by descending date, so that the most recent stock movements are on the top. ### Stock movement types As of version 1.7.2.0, three movement types can be created when triggered by the following events: * Manual edition by an employee, when for instance you modify a product’s quantity inside the stock table. * Customer order, when an order switches from a status equivalent to ‘not shipped’ to another status equivalent to ‘shipped’ (and vice-versa). For instance, when you ship an order that was under preparation, this will create a stock movement, as the physical quantity of items shipped literally leaves your warehouse. * Returned products, when you refill a product’s stock after receiving and accepting the merchandise return. In the last two cases, the movement type in the table becomes a hyperlink to the corresponding customer order, so you have more context about this type of movement and don’t have to cross-check timestamps between the stock movements and orders tables. ## Search and filter options ### Search bar The search has exactly the same behavior as in the "[Stock](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-stock/stock-overview)" tab. ### Advanced filters In the ‘Movements’ tab, advanced filters contain: * a movement type filter, which allows you, for instance, to look for stock movements related to customer orders. * an employee filter. * a date range filter, if you’re looking for stock movements which happened during a specific period. * a category filter, like in the ‘Stock’ tab. * a status filter. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/QfY3w8jLB3aLuITXq6lP/56688706%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) # New product page (PrestaShop 9.1) ## Adding a new product ~~To add a new product to your catalog, click on **"Add new product"** from the **Catalog > Products** page.~~ ~~A new window opens, displaying the **4 different types of products** you can add to your store. Selecting a specific type of product will change the different tabs displayed on the product creation page:~~
* ~~**Standard product:** *A physical product that needs to be shipped.* The **Stocks** tab will be shown. Note that you **cannot add combinations to a standard product**.~~ * ~~**Product with combinations:** *A product with different variations (size, color, etc.) from which customers can choose.* The **Combinations** tab will be shown and the Stocks tab will disappear.~~ * ~~**Pack of products:** *A collection of products from your catalog.* The **Pack** tab will be shown and the Combinations and Stocks tabs will disappear.~~ * ~~**Virtual product:** *An intangible product that doesn't require shipping. You can also add a downloadable file.* The **Virtual product** tab will be shown and the Combinations, Stocks, and Pack tabs will disappear.~~ ### ~~Changing the product type~~ ~~If you've selected the wrong product type, you can quickly change its type:~~ * ~~Click on the **product type** (under the product name field)~~ * ~~A window asking you to **select the new product type** is displayed:~~
{% hint style="warning" %} ~~Note that by changing your product type, **all combinations will be deleted** and **your stocks will be reset.**~~ {% endhint %}
## ~~Creating a product with combinations~~ ~~In PrestaShop 9, the combination page has been reworked. A combination generation modal now appears when clicking on the "**Combinations" > "Manage product combinations"** tab.~~ ~~To select single values, **click on an attribute** to expand it and **select the values** you want to add to your product.~~
~~To select all combinations for each attribute, **click on the checkbox** on the left of your chosen attribute(s):~~
{% hint style="info" %} ~~You can also manually search for an attribute using the **"Search for attributes..."** field to find specific attributes.~~ ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FYBGm7Lv7v36V3beNg54y%2FProductpageScreen6.png?alt=media\&token=a09a878b-ee3a-4618-8a7b-2e30c2e3aca3) ~~This feature can be useful if your catalog has a lot of different attributes.~~ {% endhint %} ## ~~Generating combinations~~ ~~If you select every value for the "Size" and "Color" attributes, you can generate up to 56 combinations in your catalog. Once you have selected your attributes, click on **"Generate X combinations"** to generate combinations.~~ ~~When using **multistore mode**, you can generate attributes for all stores by checking the dedicated **"Generate combinations for all stores"** option, next to the "Cancel" button:~~
## ~~Managing combinations~~ ### ~~Using combination filters~~ ~~PrestaShop 9 introduces combinations filters on the **"Combinations" > "Manage product combinations"** page, allowing you to quickly manage combinations in your store:~~
## ~~Bulk actions~~ {% hint style="info" %} ~~You can use bulk actions to remove or edit quickly some or all product combinations at once.~~ {% endhint %} ~~To select multiple elements at once, you can use filters and select the attributes you wish to edit or remove. You can also use the checkmark list on the left side of the product table to manually select your chosen items.~~ ### ~~Editing attributes in bulk~~ ~~To edit a field in bulk, **select the combinations you wish to edit** and click on the **"Bulk actions"** button:~~
~~Then, click on the dropdown list for each category (for example, "Retail price") and select the element you wish to edit.~~ ~~You can then enable the field using the slider button (enable/disable) and **type in your desired value.**~~
{% hint style="info" %} ~~By default, the set value for **every field is 0.**~~ ~~To reset a field, you can **toggle it** and manually set its **value back to 0.**~~ {% endhint %} ~~This way, changes will only be applied to **your selected combinations.**~~ ### ~~Removing attributes in bulk~~ ~~You can remove attributes in bulk by selecting multiple elements at once through filters or checkmarks, then click on **"Bulk actions" > "Delete X combinations"**~~ ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2F3tKMFXvVvapZwxsfyzmG%2FProductpageScreen11.png?alt=media\&token=1e794ef2-a70a-4f2c-be77-cb0fac43a1e0) ~~A window is displayed asking you to **confirm your choice.**~~ ## ~~Pagination~~ {% hint style="info" %} ~~The product page includes a pagination feature. It allows you to easily browse through your store's products and display up to 100 items per page.~~ {% endhint %}
~~With the implementation of the pagination feature in PrestaShop 9, page loading time has been greatly reduced. This means you can have as many combinations as you want and you don't have to worry about your back office's performance.~~ ## ~~Pricing~~
### ~~Retail price~~ ~~The Pricing tab features a simple tax calculator, allowing you to quickly and clearly calculate your tax-included retail price.~~ ~~To add a new tax rule to your retail price:~~ * ~~Enter your **initial retail price (without tax)**,~~ * ~~Then chose the **tax rule you wish to apply** from the list.~~ ~~The product's retail price (tax included) will automatically be calculated for your product.~~
{% hint style="info" %} ~~**I can't find a specific tax rule in the list.**~~ ~~You can add tax rules for specific countries by clicking on "**Manage tax rules"** to manually add a tax rule.~~ ~~You can also~~ [~~import a new localization pack~~](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/going-international/localization/localization-settings#localizationsettings-importalocalizationpack)~~'s taxes from the~~ [~~Localization~~](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/going-international/localization) ~~page:~~ ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FdsiotsNCY63CBhmdm0Dy%2FProductpageScreen15.png?alt=media\&token=41327534-11df-46d6-a814-4b721d40ce04) {% endhint %} ### ~~Summary~~ ~~A summary of your product's cost is displayed so you can check your product's cost and price in detail at a glance.~~
~~As a reminder, the margin is calculated like so:~~
### ~~Displaying retail price per unit~~ ~~Knowing your unit retail price is useful when selling items that need to be sold per kilo or liter or any other unit.~~ ~~For example, if you sell candies per kilo in your store, you can specify the **price per kilo** and it will be displayed in your summary, under the included and excluded tax price.~~ ~~Toggle the **"Display retail price per unit"** feature to display the retail price per unit on the summary.~~
## ~~Image management~~ ### ~~Replacing an image~~ ~~You can replace a product image: simply select the image you wish to replace and click on the **"Replace selection"** button. Select an image on your computer and **make sure to save your changes.**~~
### ~~Replacing images in bulk~~ ~~It is possible to replace a product image in bulk. You don't need to worry about losing image links and data anymore.~~ ~~**To replace images in bulk,**~~ * ~~**Select the combinations** you wish to edit,~~ * ~~Click on the **"Bulk actions"** button and select **"Edit X combinations"**~~ * ~~Go to the **"Images"** attribute and **Toggle the feature** to enable it.~~ ~~You can now **select the image** you wish to associate with your combinations.~~
### ~~Deleting images in bulk~~ ~~It's possible to delete product images in bulk.~~ ~~To do so, select the images you wish to delete and click on the **"Delete selection"** button:~~
## ~~Stocks~~ #### ~~Edit quantity~~ ~~A new stock system has been implemented in PrestaShop 9. To manage your stocks, simply **add a positive number** or **subtract a negative number** in the stocks quantity field to update your stocks:~~
{% hint style="success" %} ~~Clients sometimes buy products while you're updating your stocks. An incorrect stock calculation will now be avoided as you can only update your stocks by adding or subtracting products. This way, you can ensure correct and reliable stock management in your store.~~ {% endhint %} #### ~~Recent stock movements~~ ~~To have a better look at your stock, a preview of the last 5 stock movements is displayed under the **"Recent stock movements"** tab.~~
~~These stock movements also include order stock movements (the sales and product returns in between 2 stock movements).~~ ~~Stock movement of customer orders is regrouped to have a better summary of your stocks.~~
## ~~Header~~ ~~The header recaps everything you need to know about your products: types, references, stock, tax, etc.) You can easily find important information about your product at a glance.~~ #### ~~Color indicator~~ ~~Three colors indicate your stock status:~~ * ~~**Green "in stock":** when your stock is superior to your set low stock.~~ * ~~**Yellow "low stock":** when the stock is equal or inferior to set low stock~~ * ~~**Red "out of stock":** when the stock is inferior or equal to 0.~~
## ~~Footer~~ #### ~~Footer wording~~ ~~In the footer's wording, the save button has two states:~~ * ~~**Save:** Saves your product when creating it or when the product is offline (not published) on your store.~~
* ~~**Save and publish:** Saves your product and publishes it on your store.~~
~~This helps you better understand whether your changes are live on your store or not.~~ ### ~~Dynamic footer~~ ~~The footer is **dynamic and reacts to your actions.**~~ ~~Modifications can be **canceled, previewed, saved, or published**:~~
~~For example, if you have unsaved modifications, any action that would make you leave the current page is disabled:~~ ![](https://2103090827-files.gitbook.io/~/files/v0/b/gitbook-x-prod.appspot.com/o/spaces%2Ff4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK%2Fuploads%2FLw9fc0qKGEHtfNUTztnz%2FProductScreen27.png?alt=media\&token=29b6b91e-6847-4109-9df8-c0ce719a1044) # Managing your Customers You have to take good care of your customers and it starts with making sure their profile contains all the information you need to have a package shipped to them. The "Customers" menu enables you to check on your customers' details and addresses. The settings for anything customer-related are in the "Shop Parameters" menu, on the "Customer settings" page. This chapter contains the following sections: * [Your customers](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-customers/your-customers) * [Customer addresses](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-customers/customer-addresses) * [Outstanding](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-customers/outstanding) # Your customers The first page under the "Customers" menu gives you a list of all the registered users on your shop. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/uB1JomBmJyLqXCiWuPZd/51839862%20\(3\)%20\(11\).png) This gives you a bird's eye view of your customers, with some details thrown in which you can use to sort and search accounts: * **ID.** The unique ID attached to the customer. * **Social title**. Customers can declare their social title, which are matched with a genre and can help you better customize your customers' experience. There are two default social titles (Mr. and Mrs.), but you can create more in the "Titles" page under the "Customers settings" page in the "Shop Parameters" menu. * **First name and Last name**. The customer's name. * **Email address**. The email address the customer used to register on your shop. * **Sales**. How much the customer has spent on your shop so far. * **Enabled**. Indicates whether the customer is active or not. You can disable an account by clicking on the green checkmark. * **Newsletter**. Indicates whether the customer is subscribed to your shop's newsletter or not. You can unsubscribe from it by clicking on the green checkmark. * **Partner offers**. Indicates whether the account has accepted to receive e-mails from your partners or not. You can unsubscribe it clicking on the green checkmark. **Do not subscribe a user to these e-mails without their consent, as this is considered spam**. * Registration date and last visit can always be useful when sorting user accounts. * **Actions**. You can edit the user's account, simply view it in full (with its messages, orders, addresses, vouchers, etc.), or trash it forever. When installed for the first time with sample data, PrestaShop has a default user, named John DOE. You can use this fake user to test some of your shop's features, and browse your shop and see it the way a regular user would. To log in to your shop using this public account, use these credentials: * E-mail address: * Password: 123456789 **Before you open your shop to the public, make sure to delete this default user, or at least change its credentials!** If not, malicious visitors could use it to make fake purchases and more. Below the customers table is the "Set required fields for this section" button. It opens a form where you can indicate if a database field is necessary or not by checking the appropriate boxes: this way, you can make it so fields such "partner offers" are mandatory when a visitor is creating a customer account on your shop. You can export a list of your clients by clicking on the "Export" button at the top.\ You can also import customers using the "Import" button. You will need your CSV file to follow this format: ``` ID;Title;Last name;First Name;Email address;Age;Enabled;News.;Opt.;Registration;Last visit; 2;1;Gorred;Francis;francis@example.com;-;1;0;0;2013-07-04 15:20:02;2013-07-04 15:18:50; 1;1;DOE;John;pub@prestashop.com;43;1;1;1;2013-07-02 17:36:07;2013-07-03 16:04:15; ``` More import options are available in the "Import" page of the "Advanced parameters" menu. ## Creating a New Customer Account To create a customer account manually, select "Add new customer". A form appears. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/umuDhTNZ9QSiE0ofw54o/51839855%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) Fill out the customer's information: * **Social title**. Choose between the ones available, or create another one in the "Titles" page under the "Customers settings" page in the "Shop Parameters" menu. * **First name**, **Last name**, **Email address**. Those are essential: the names are used in the confirmation emails that PrestaShop sends, and the email address is used for log-in. * **Password**. Choose a password, at least 5 characters long. * **Birthday**. This information can be used for birthday e-mails and temporary discounts.\
If you do not want to ask for the birth date when a customer creates an account, you can disable the birth date field in the "Customer Settings" page. Simply select "No" for the "Ask for birth date" option. * **Enabled**. You may wish to create an account, but not have it yet active. * **Partner offers**. Can be used by modules for sending regular partner promotions to those customers who requested it. **Do not subscribe a user to these e-mails without their consent, as this is considered spam**. * **Group access**. Having customer groups enables you to create group discounts. Many other PrestaShop features can also be group-restricted. * **Default customer group**. No matter how many groups that customer belongs to, s/he should always have one main group.\
If your customers are mostly companies, you should enable the B2B mode in order to get additional options: go to the "Customers settings" page of the "Shop Parameters" menu, and choose "Yes" for the "Enable B2B mode" option. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/ciXi42rOdLxdaAVbCKFC/23038650%20\(3\)%20\(1\).png) The B2B mode adds a few company-specific fields: * **Company**. The name of the company. * **SIRET**. Its SIRET number (France only). * **APE**. Its principal activity code (*Activité principale exercée* - France only). * **Website**. Its website. * **Allowed outstanding amount**. The amount of outstanding money that the company is allowed. * **Maximum number of payment days**. The number of days that the company is allowed. * **Risk rating**. Your risk rating of this company: Low, Medium or High. ## Viewing a Customer's Information In the case where you would like to have more information on a given customer, you can click on the "view" button, located at the end of the row in the customer's list. A new page appears. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/wF5du3SRTgbFnyyYoLZi/51839857%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) The various sections provide you with some key data on the user: * **Customer information**, first and last name, e-mail address, ID, sign-up date, date of last visit, rank. * Information regarding the subscription to the store's newsletter and subscription to ads from partnering companies, the age, date of last update, and whether or not the account is active. * **Private notes** from the store's employees (i.e. you or your team). * **Messages** sent by the customer to the shop's team (through customer service). * Available **vouchers** / cart rules. * **Previous connections** to the shop. * The **groups** to which the customer belongs. * Summary of the customer's past **orders**. Amount spent, type of payment, order status. For more information about each order, click on the order's date. * **Carts** that the customer has created (but not necessarily validated) since sign-up. When your customer is currently on your shop, you can see what is being added to the cart in real time. * Summary of the products that were purchased by a customer. Among other things, this enables you to know when a customer is very fond of a product, and maybe create a special discount for the 10th purchase. Clicking on a product directs to the order to which that product is tied. * A list of the **product viewed** by the customer. Likewise, you can see which product pages the customer visited on your website. If no order follows several visits of a product, maybe you can help the customer decide by sending him/her a targeted discount. * Registered **addresses**.\
## Searching for a Customer Searching for a customer on your PrestaShop shop can be done two different ways. **The first method** consists of entering the information you have into the PrestaShop search bar, which is found in the top center of your back office. By selecting "everywhere", "by name" or "by ip address", you can perform a search based on: * ID. The numbers that is assigned to the customer in the database. * First or last name. Note that you cannot search for both: choose either "john" or "doe", as "john doe" won't work. * E-mail address. * IP address. You can search using the IP of the latest connection to your shop. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/ysbAARdYTlqfsLIj5g0W/51839858%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) The results, if any, are then presented: the list presents you with the users' ID, social title, email, birth date, registration date, amount of orders and whether or not the user's account is active. From there on, you can view the whole user's page, or edit its details. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/XpF8JJCCGNgFQzydHleO/51839860.png) **The second method** consists of going to the "Customers" page, and listing all of your customers. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/36Ma3qirf4VippjIMMdJ/51839859%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) On this page, you can complete the fields at the top of the list, in order to filter it according to the following criteria: ID, social title, first name, last name, email address, age, account status (enabled or disabled), subscription to the newsletter, subscription to partnering ads, registration date, and last connection date. Enter your criteria and click the "Filter" button in the top right-hand corner of the table. You can then sort the list for some of the columns. Click the "Reset" button to go back to the complete list. # Customer addresses By clicking on the "Addresses" page, you will have access to the list of your customer's addresses (home, work, etc.). You can edit them using the "Edit" button, or delete them altogether. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/4bU9iawqIgCLWjAMBtCd/51839324.png) Below the addresses table is the "Set required fields for this section" button. It opens a form where you can indicate if a database field is necessary or not by checking the appropriate boxes: this way, you can make it so fields such as "company" or "phone number" are mandatory when a customer is registering a new address on your shop. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/N6TBwzFbNnh4HKMTgMk5/51839325.png) ## Adding a new address You have the possibility to create new addresses for a client yourself with the "Add new address" button. It opens a form with the kind of field you might expect. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/rIihfS50262SMHc9ySyl/51839326%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) Some fields, however, require special care: * **Customer email**. This field is essential: if you are adding an address for an existing customer, you MUST identify this customer using her/his email address. Otherwise, PrestaShop will not know who to assign this address to. * **Identification number**. The national ID card number of this person, or a unique tax identification number. This field is of course optional. * **Address alias**. A short description, in order to help the customer choose the correct address: "Home", "Office", "Aunt Beth's", etc. * **Company**. The name of the customer's company, if needed. * **VAT number**. The VAT identification number for the customer (or the customer's company). * **Other**. Some additional information that might be useful to the shipment. # Outstanding This page is only available when you enable PrestaShop's B2B features. To do that, go to the "Customer Settings" page, and choose "Yes" for the "Enable B2B mode" option. This page displays the outstanding report for some of your customers, meaning the amount of money you are allowing them to buy your products before they have to actually pay you. ## Enabling the Outstanding feature When the B2B mode is enabled (Shop Parameters > Customers Setting page), three fields are added to the customer creation form: ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/66QMTKb81vCwo97Ggbwf/51839331%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) * **Allowed outstanding amount**. The maximum amount of money this customer can use as an outstanding. * **Maximum number of payment days**. The maximum number of days the customer can go before having to pay his outstanding. * **Risk rating**. The risk factor for this customer: None, Low, Medium or High. It is up to you to decide if a customer is a risky benefactor of your outstanding feature, or if he will assuredly pay on time. You should fill these fields for all professional customers. ## Current outstanding screen Once a customer with outstanding allowance buys from your shop, it appears in the Customers > Outstanding page. This enables you to get an overview of your current outstanding invoices. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/roHGaWNVS4vQy8QcUGWL/51839332%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) # Managing the Customer Service ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/TjfTJeRzBHgXQl1i90jX/51839867%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) In PrestaShop 1.7, the Customer Service sections get a dedicated menu to give it the importance it deserves. Handling customer service is key to your success, so these pages make it possible for you to easily follow up on your customer's support requests and merchandise returns. This chapter contains the following sections: * [Customer Service](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-customer-service/customer-service) * [Order Messages](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-customer-service/order-messages) * [Merchandise Returns](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-customer-service/merchandise-returns) # Customer Service PrestaShop enables you to centralize all the customer requests within its confines. This helps you keep track of which discussion threads needs answering, rather than having to check with all the recipients of the mail to see if someone did answer it. In practice, the contact form of your shop, available under the "Contact us" link in the footer, presents the customer with two contacts by default: "Customer Service" and "Webmaster". The customer only has to choose who to contact, and then fill the rest of the fields. The message is then recorded in PrestaShop's customer service tool. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/eaWLxbAJyjUJoAdi7nCV/51839870%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) Discussion threads are only included in the customer service tool if the contact has the "Save messages?" option enabled. You can change this setting, or add more contacts, by going to the "Contact" page, under the "Shop Parameters" menu. You will find the option when editing the existing contacts. If the option is disabled for the contact that the customer chooses, the message is simply sent to the contact's email address, and is not stored in PrestaShop. You also need to properly configure your IMAP settings, so that PrestaShop can retrieve the customer's answers to emails that were sent from the customer service tool. This is done in the "Customer service options" section, at the bottom of the screen. On this page, each contact has its own box, where you can quickly see if a there are new messages (meaning, those that have not yet been read). By default, there are two boxes, and adding more contacts will move the "Meaning of status" and "Statistics" boxes further to the left and down. These two last boxes are handy when you need to handle new messages daily: * **Meaning of status**. A simple reminder of the color codes that your team can apply to a discussion thread. * **Statistics**. An overview of the global activity of your customer service since the beginning. Further below is the list of received messages, both old and new. You can edit a couple options at the bottom of the page, which apply to all contacts: * **Allow file uploading**. Whether the customer can attach a file to the message. This can be useful in case of visual issues on the front-page, as the customer can send you screen captures. * **Default message**. The default template for your employees' answer. Keep it simple, so that it can adapt to many situations, even if it needs a little editing for each case.\
You can contact your customers via each order's page too, where you can send pre-defined messages. These messages are managed in the "Order Messages" page, also under the "Customer service" menu. Finally, the bottom of the page features the "Customer service options" section, where you can set many options pertaining to your mail (IMAP) server. ## Handling Customer Service Messages Each conversation with a customer can be entirely handled through PrestaShop's complete interface, without having to use an email client such as Outlook or Thunderbird. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/ho4BVbEtLZ3kkLdDsLFd/51839871%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) In the conversation list, click on a row to view the conversation's details: * You can apply a handful of actions to a discussion, in order to quickly sort them and thus handle them quicker. There are 4 available actions:
* **Mark as "handled"** or **"Re-open"**. Changes the discussion's status to "Closed" or "Open". * **Mark as "pending 1"** and **Mark as "pending 2"**. These two statuses are internal: their meaning is up to your team. You may even choose to not use them, and only rely on "Closed" and "Open". * **Forward this discussion to another employee**. From the moment an employee has started replying to a customer message, he becomes in charge of the customer's request. If during the discussion it turns out another employee should handle, you can use that button to attribute it to another employee through a drop-down list. That other employee will receive a notification about it. If the person you want to forward this discussion to is not available in the list, choose "Someone else" in the drop-down list and two options will appear, enabling you to indicate the email address of the recipient and a comment about your message. * **Reply to the next unanswered message in this thread**. Takes you to the next unanswered message in the thread so that you can answer it directly. Essential details are available: * Customer name and email, which you can click on to access the customer's information (when it is a registered customer). * Number of orders, total amount spent and date of registration for the customer (when it is a registered customer). * Time and date of the message. * Finally, the message itself. To reply to this thread, simply use the form with your default message (as set in "Contact options" section of the "Customer service" page), and click "Send". At the bottom of the page, the "Orders and messages timeline" gives you a clear chronological view of the events pertaining to this discussion thread. When it is tied to an order, you will also have the order details. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/b9joCuiEArzN57gRx4d3/23789570.png) ## Customer Service Options This section basically enables you to precisely configure PrestaShop's access to your email server through its IMAP interface. You should make sure all fields are filled, in order for the customer service tool to work properly. Most of this information should be provided by your web host. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/Bf59qq9TZLTw1CbVF1XG/51839872%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) * **IMAP URL**, **IMAP port**, **IMAP user** and **IMAP password**. Essential details to access the email server using the IMAP protocol. * **Delete messages**. If enabled, messages on the server will be deleted as soon as PrestaShop has retrieved them. Use with caution: this would make your messages unavailable to other e-mail clients. * **Create new threads**. This will create new threads for unrecognized e-mails. * **/pop3**. If enabled, use POP3 instead of IMAP. * **/norsh**. If enabled, the connection to your email server will not pre-authenticated. Not recommended. * **/ssl**. If enabled, the connection to your email server will not be encrypted. Not recommended. * **/validate-cert**. If enabled, PrestaShop will force the validation of the server's TLS/SSL certificate. * **/novalidate-cert**. If enabled, PrestaShop will never try to validate the server's TLS/SSL certificate. Essential for servers with self-signed certificates. * **/tls**. If enabled, PrestaShop will force use of StartTLS to encrypt the connection. Servers that do not support StartTLS will be rejected. * **/notls**. If enabled, PrestaShop will not use StartTLS to encrypt the session, even with servers that support it. # Order Messages When you have to send a message to your customers using the PrestaShop interface (from the order page), you can choose to save this message in order to send it out again to other customers with similar questions, comments, or concerns. To do this, go to the "Order Messages" page under the "Customer Service" menu. One default message is already saved: "Delay". ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/bip6USppp1ZLMAc8MXMh/23038637%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) ## Creating a new message To add another pre-defined message, click on the "Add new order message" button. You can also edit the default message. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/OyJuXs4ubIUnAO18zOhs/23038638%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) The form goes to the essentials: * **Name**. Give your message a descriptive name so that you can easily find it again later. * **Message**. Write out the content that you wish to send to your customers. Once done, click on "Save". You can create as many messages as needed. ## Sending a message to a customer Once you pre-written messages are all set, you can send them by going directly into a customer's order: 1. Select the pre-written message. 2. Edit it if needed, in order to tailor it to the order or the customer. 3. Enable the "Display to customer?" option. 4. Click "Send message". ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/LXjKR8QjANACRrYiMZ1K/39125026%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) Your customer will receive the message on the email address associated with this account. To follow-up on the conversion, go to "Customer Service" page, in the "Customers" menu. # Merchandise Returns The "Merchandise Returns" page gives you a list of all the RMA process (Return Merchandise Authorization). At the bottom of the page, you have the possibility of enabling customers to send products back to you ("Enable returns" option). Simply make a choice, indicate the number of days during which a return request can be made, and save your settings: customers now have the ability to ask for a return authorization. You can also edit the prefix for the return number, or chose not to have any. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/wy2YB2tXJNZVZyi7pj1Y/38109196.png) ## Return process: how the customer sees it Once you have activated the returns option in your back office, the customer can choose to return an item (provided the order is still in the time of validity). In order to do this, he/she must do the following: 1. Access the "Orders history" section of his/her account. 2. Select the order from which he/she wants to return an item by clicking on "Details". 3. Select the product(s) that he/she wishes to return by checking the box next to its name(s). 4. Add the quantity that needs to be returned (in case more than one product need to be returned). 5. (optional) In the "Merchandise return" section, add an explanation, in order for the shop team to better understand why the customer wants to return this product. 6. Click on "Request a return". ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/Oldf7t2cVuNeAi3VNxPF/51839875%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) When is it possible to return an order? 1. Returns have to be enabled ("Enable returns" option). 2. The order has to be in the time of validity (= it is still time to return a product). 3. The orders need to have had at least the following statuses: * * At least two statuses: one with the condition "Set the order as paid" enabled and the second one with the option "Set the order as shipped" enabled.\ Or * One status which has both conditions ("Set the order as paid" and "Set the order as shipped") enabled. Statuses can be edited on the "Statuses" tab under the "Orders setting" page of the "Shop parameters" menu. Once the form is complete, the customer clicks on "Request a return", and the request is sent to the store manager (you). The request appears as "Waiting for confirmation" in the customer's "Merchandise Returns" page, accessible from the account page. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/0WRtq7sjmTdPjwn9bxCr/51839876.png) ## Return process: how you see it The return request appears in your back office in the "Merchandise Returns" page. At first, the return request has the "Waiting for confirmation" status. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/AzDdxpaNg9YzeQBupFNn/23038598.png) The refund process can take several steps, which are indicated by the return status. It can be either: * Waiting for confirmation. * Waiting for the package. * Package received. * Return denied. * Return completed. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/fpail3TLsvceU04S0cKd/51839877%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) It is now up to you to accept it or deny it: 1. Click on the return request ID to see more details. 2. Change the status to continue with the return process or stop it. * If you want to stop the return process (and deny the customer a refund), simply choose the "Return denied" status. * If you agree with the product being returned and the customer being refunded, follow each step precisely: 1. Choose the next step in the process: "Waiting for package". This will send an email to the customer indicating that the product can be sent back to you. 2. Once you have received the package, change the request's status to "Package received". 3. Finally, once the whole process is over (either the customer has been refunded or you have issued a credit slip), change the status to "Return completed". 3. Save. ## Refunding a customer An order can be refunded, either partially or totally. This is done using two actions buttons located in the top bar of the order's page itself rather than in the return page**.** The action buttons change depending on the order's status. For instance, once the order is in the "Delivered" state, the "Add a product" and "Remove products" turn into two new buttons: "Return products" and "Partial refund". Product returns are not activated by default. To activate it, go to the "Merchandise returns" page under the "Customer Service" menu, and activate the option in the options section at the bottom of the page. This will apply to all products and all orders. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/5eDxyLkDKuVgDG62wf6H/51839878%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) * **Return products**. To be used only when the customer has effectively returned products: once the returned product has been received, you can mark it as returned directly in the order form. \ Click the "Return products" button and a new column will appear in the product list, titled "Return". Check the box of the affected products, indicate the number of items that were returned, and click the "Return products" at the bottom of the table. * **Partial refund**. To be used when you need to refund only part of the order and not the whole order, either because the customer returned the ordered product, or simply as a sign of goodwill for a damaged product that the customer chose to keep anyway. Click the "Partial refund" button and a new column will appear in the product list, titled "Partial refund". Set the amount and quantity for each of the affected products, choose one of the options at the bottom of the list (see below), and click the "Partial refund" button at the bottom of the table.\
When you set a product as returned or to be refunded, four options are available below the list of products: * **Re-stock products**. When checked, PrestaShop will consider that the returned product is available for sale again, and will therefore increase the stock for this product. You should not click this when a product is returned due to it being broken... * **Generate a credit slip**. When checked, a credit slip will be created for the selected items. A credit slip is an acknowledgment from your shop that merchandise has been returned and that a refund has been issued. The customer can then use it as a credit slip for his or her next purchase. * **Generate a voucher**. When checked, a voucher will be created for the amount of the selected items. A voucher takes the form of a discount code that the customer can enter during the checkout process. You can edit the customer's existing vouchers by viewing the customer's page: from the current order's page, click on the customer's name in the "Customer" section; once in the customer's page, reach the "Vouchers" section. You can edit each voucher by clicking on the "Edit" icon. * **Repay shipping cost**. You can also choose to refund the shipping cost of the returned product, which is always an appreciated gesture.\
If the customer paid the order using a credit card, the payment system may refund the cart automatically, or you may have to do it yourself. If the order was paid using a check or a bank transfer, you have to issue the refund yourself, then mark the order as having been refunded manually in the back office (in the order's page). # Understanding your statistics This section presents in details the usefulness of the various available statistics. By clicking on each of the categories at your disposal in the sidebar of the "Stats" page, the main page reloads with the most up-to-date figures.\ For some of the stats, a complete explanation is given, helping you understand the data given to you so that you can use the information to improve your shop and its conversion rate. Video - 4 simple steps to optimize your online shop’s performance [![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/02giraa2mrEDxI9seK65/51839795%20\(6\)%20\(6\).png)](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0acJfI8fn-0\&list=PLyZYn1MMU7-xT-L_zUyGnRBJmAuP6uc-c\&index=23) ## Main interface By default, the page displays the Stats Dashboard, an overview of the main numbers gathered by PrestaShop stat system since you launched your online shop. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/vOlMtZbA4SkgyUcEuz5f/51839882%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) At the top of the page is a single bar which helps you choose the period of time for the currently displayed statistics. Three sets of options are available: * Current day, month or year. * Previous day, month or year. * Precise period selection (from and to dates). Click on "Save" to display the statistics for the period of your choice. The dashboard contains 8 sections: * The main statistics. This truly is the heart of your statistics. Within a single table, PrestaShop gives an overview of the most important numbers that were gathered for the selected period of time: visitors, new registrations, new orders, number of items bought for all orders combined, percentage of registration per visitors, percentage of orders per visitors, amount of used coupons, amount of all sales combined.\ You can change the granularity using the drop-down selector, at the top right of the section. The available period sizes are: daily, weekly, monthly, and yearly.\ The three lines at the bottom of the table are not affected by the selected period: total, average and forecast figures enable you to get a better estimate of where your shop is heading to. * **Conversion**. This section gives you an idea of how much a visitor or a registered customer are worth on your shop, based the number of orders they place, basically. It is a nice indicator of how your shop is doing.\ Note: the difference between a "cart" and "full cart" is that a cart is a visitor's cart, with products and not much else, while a full cart is a cart with products AND a shipping address AND a chosen carrier -- in short, the cart has been *almost fully* through the checkout process, all that's left to do is actually pay for it all. * **Payment distribution**. This section presents which payment methods are most often chosen by your paying customers. Based on these figures, you may wish to adapt your shop or your business in order to better cater for the most popular methods, or to push forward a specific method that you would prefer that your customers choose.\ Using the "Zone" drop-down selector at the top right of the section, you can limit the numbers to a specific geographical zone, and thus see which method works best or worst depending on the region. * **Category distribution**. This section gives category-specific information. For each category, it presents you with useful numbers: products, sales, percentage of product sold for the whole shop, percentage of sales for the whole shop, average product price. If you notice that a category is way more successful than others, you might want to push your promotion efforts on it. On the other hand, you could try bolstering the figures of disappointing categories by releasing vouchers or other doing other promotional actions...\ Using the "Zone" drop-down selector at top right of the section, you can limit the numbers to a specific geographical zone, and thus see which category is most successful depending on the region. * **Language distribution**. Your customers can choose their preferred language when browsing your site, and you can see the language distribution with this section. Make sure to have all your products correctly translated for at least the two most popular languages. * **Zone distribution**. You can filter other section by zones, and this section directly gives you a per-zone run down of your number of registered customers and placed sales (and their respective percentages). * **Currency distribution**. If you accept more than one currency, this section helps you see which one is the most used by your paying customers.\ Using the "Zone" drop-down selector at the top right of the section, you can limit the numbers to a specific geographical zone, and thus see which currency is most successful depending on the region. * **Attribute distribution**. This is more of an internal statistic, enabling you to see which attribute and attribute group is the most used within your products. ## Navigating the statistics Most of the statistical data can be downloaded as CSV files, by clicking on the "CSV Export" button at the bottom of the page. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/zMuy7gAktbIYwwLopKTg/23789935%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) * **Available quantities**. This section gives you an overview of the value of your current stock. * **Best categories**. This section presents your shop's performance by category. You can find out how many products in each category have been sold, the revenue generated, and the number of pages viewed. Make sure to regularly check the consistency of your results between different categories in order to adjust your shop's cohesiveness. * **Best customers**. This section lists the best customers of your shop. It displays their email address, as well as the number of times they have visited the website and how much they have spent so far. Keep an eye on this page in order to keep track of, and take care of, your best customers. By clicking on the buttons at the top of the columns, you can choose how you would like to sort this data. * **Best suppliers**. This section gives statistics on your suppliers by providing the quantities sold and the revenue generated. * **Best vouchers**. This section displays the most popular coupons, vouchers, cart rules and catalog price rules that you created and distributed, whether personally or through a promotional campaign. The table also displays the turnover, and the number of vouchers used. * **Best-selling products**. This section displays your best-performing products. You can view the turnover achieved, the average daily sales, the number of page views, and the quantity left in your current stock. With this table, you can identify your core products and decide whether to perform actions such as increasing or decreasing your prices or giving discounts on a specific product. * **Browsers and operating systems**. This section informs you of the web browsers that visitors and customers use to browse your shop. You should verify that your shop is perfectly compatible with these browsers, or at least the three most popular ones. It also tells you if visitors are browsing your shop from their mobile devices (such as smartphones). If this number is significant, you should think of having a mobile version of your shop.\ Finally, you can see what operating systems your visitors are using. Make sure that your shop is fully compatible with all of your visitors' platforms. * **Carrier distribution**. This page indicates which carriers are used most by your visitors. You can filter all results by order status. If you learn that a carrier is not often used, despite being fast and efficient, it might be appropriate to display it more prominently during checkout, to increase customer satisfaction. * **Catalog evaluation**. This section gives an overview of your catalog's performance. You can find out if each product is active, or if its description is correctly entered in all of your shop's active languages. You can also see if all your products have enough images, their sales performance, and current stock status. The overall score for each product is displayed using a colored icon. You can define your criteria by filling in the table at the top of the page, then saving your settings. * **Catalog statistics**. This section contains practical information on the products sold in your online shop, and your catalog as a whole. The figures can be filtered by category using the drop-down selector at the top of the section. You can act on your catalog's performance by considering the following indicators: * **Products available**.The amount of available products in this category (by default, all categories). * **Average price**. Average product price in the selected category. * **Product pages viewed**.Number of pages that were visited by your potential customers. Compare this data between different categories to see which has the most product views, or on the contrary which ones do not attract many customers. Use this information to make some improvements in your catalog. * **Products bought.**The amount of products purchased in each category. * **Average number of page visits**. The global number of visits for the products in the selected category. * **Average number of purchases**. The global return for the product sales in the selected category. * **Images available**. Indicates how many images are tied to the selected category's products. A quick way to know if some products lack images is when there are fewer images as there are products. * **Average number of images**.Number of images divided by the number of products in the selected category. * **Products never viewed**. Some of your products might never have been viewed by visitors. Check their pages to try and understand why. * **Products never purchased**. Some of your products have never been bought by customers. This is a serious issue, and you should take time to understand why. * **Conversion rate**. Indicates the relationship between the number of visitors and the number of purchases. It is important that this value should be as high as possible. * A table at the bottom of the page tells you what products in this category have never been purchased. You may want to consider changing their price or writing a more attractive description for instance. * **Customer accounts**. This page displays a graph with the number of customer accounts created in your online shop. With this information, you can measure the impact of your marketing campaigns. You can see the number of visitors who subscribed but actually never purchased anything, as well as the number of customers who created an account and bought an item immediately after registering. * **Newsletter**. This page displays newsletter subscription statistics. You can use this database to keep customers informed. The newsletters usually help increase traffic to your shop. If you want to improve subscription, consider adding voucher/cart rules codes to each newsletter. You can see all of your subscribers' addresses via the "Email subscription" module, in the "Modules & Services" page. * **Pages not found**. This page tells you which pages of your catalog people have attempted to access but could not find (resulting in what is called "HTTP 404" errors). This is useful for finding potential technical problems that may hinder your sales. * **Product details**. This page shows you all the products in your shop by reference number, name, and available stock. You can filter your results by selecting from the drop-down menu above the product category you want to view. Click on a product to access its statistics. You can then view a chart with two sets of data: sales made and number of visits to the product page. The conversion rate of the product will also be displayed. * **Registered Customer Information**. This section is divided into 5 charts. * **Gender Distribution**. You can see how your customers are distributed among the various social titles that you have set – by default, Mr. and Mrs., but there can be many others, such as Dr. or Sr. Therefore, you cannot trust this graph to show you the gender distribution... unless you have reduced your social titles to just two gendered ones. * **Age Ranges**. You can learn about the distribution of your customers according to their age, provided you request their birthdate. If you see that the age range of your customers is not what you imagined it would be, think about adjusting your marketing approach. * **Country Distribution**. You can quickly consult in which countries your customers are living. This can help you focus marketing efforts on a single country. * **Currency Distribution**. You can see what currencies are used to shop for items in your shop, and in what proportions. * **Language Distribution**. You can see in what languages your shop is consulted most often, and thus decide whether or not you should improve your shop's translations in a given language. * **Sales and orders**. Those two graphs present the evolution of your shop's sales and orders. They can be filtered by country, using the drop-down menu at the top right. * The first graph indicates the total number of valid orders, as well as the total number of products ordered. With this graph, you can analyze which periods gave you the biggest return in terms of quantity of orders. * The second graph helps you visualize your sales graphically. It can analyze the periods of time when you had the greatest sales. This enables you, for instance, to have a better idea of when to start your marketing campaigns. * **Search engine keywords**. This page tells you what keywords typed into a search engine brought visitors to your online shop. This enables you to know which terms make your shop easily identifiable. Conversely you can see which keywords are absent from this list, and are thus not effective. * **Shop search**. This section presents two indicators. * The first one is a chart which shows the distribution of keywords typed into your shop's search bar. This allows you to see which products your visitors are most looking for – and therefore, the one you should have plenty of stock of. * The second is a table summarizing your visitors' searches. You can see which keywords are being used, how often they were typed, and how many results were available. It is important that all of your customers' requests get a result. To improve your shop, be sure to add the products that meet the customers' demands (searches) or add additional tags to your products that are easily identifiable. * **Stats Dashboard**. This is the stats homepage itself. It presents a bird's eye view of your shop's stats. Clicking this last option simply takes you back to the global stats dashboard. * **Visitors online**. This section indicates the number of visitors currently on your shop. You can see their names and the pages that they are currently looking at. The data is updated live, as visitors browse your shop. The "Save page views for each customer" option in the "Data mining for statistics" (StatsData) module must be activated in order to see the pages that your visitors are currently viewing. * **Visitors origin**. This page uses a graph to give you the top ten sites and search engines that have sent visitors to you. Usually, search engines play a very important role. If you create a marketing campaign by publishing articles on other sites, you can see what impact it had on your shop. Below the graph are the names of the sites that brought you your audience, with the number of visitors from each on the right-hand column. * **Visits and Visitors**. This page gives you statistics on visitors to your shop and the number of times they visit. The larger the number, the more popular your shop is. The graph helps you understand the behavior of your visitors. Basically, you will see how many visits your shop gets, and you can compare it to the number of visitors (PrestaShop can recognize when the same person visits your shop multiple times, hence why the number of visits will be much higher than the number of visitors). The greater the difference between the two numbers, the more you are succeeding in creating a faithful base of core customers. # Managing your Orders As a store manager, you will have to deal with heaps of orders and their accompanying invoices and customer support requests – at least, that's what we wish for you. The daily task of handling numerous orders can be daunting. Fortunately, PrestaShop does its best to help you wade through them all and successfully handle your customers' purchases, along with credit slips and the unavoidable cart abandonment. This chapter contains the following sections: * [Order list management](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-orders/order-list-management) * [Order page management](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-orders/order-page-management) * [Editing an order](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-orders/order-page-management/editing-order) * [Creating returns and refunds](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-orders/order-page-management/creating-returns-and-refunds) * [Back office order](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-orders/create-back-office-order) * [Invoices](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-orders/invoices) * [Credit Slips](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-orders/credit-slips) * [Delivery Slips](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-orders/delivery-slips) * [Shopping Carts](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-orders/shopping-carts) # Order list management The order list has been designed to save you time, by avoiding back and forth between each order. On this documentation page, you will learn how to manage your orders, directly from the listing page. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/chabhnmFZHxPsFIHytS0/recent%20updates.png) :arrow\_right:[Contribute](https://prestashop.gitbook.io/howtocontribute/) ## **Finding an order** :mag\_right: The orders are organized by date, from newest to oldest. Use the filters at the top of the table to narrow down your search and click on the “Search” button.
## **Exporting an order** You can export a list of your orders. To do that, * Click on the cog symbol at the top right corner of the Orders section * Choose “Export” Please note that you cannot import orders. ## **Viewing an order’s details** You can preview an order’s details by clicking on the down arrow, next to the order’s ID. This will display: * The carrier * The invoice details * The products in the cart * The total amount To see more, click on the “Open details” button. This will redirect you to the order details page. You can also access an order directly by clicking on its line on the table, or on the magnifying glass in the “Actions” column. ## **Opening several orders in new tabs** Save time, by opening several orders in new tabs: * Select the orders you want to open in the list * Open the “Bulk actions” drop-down list * Select “Open in new tabs” Do not forget to allow the opening of multiple tabs in your navigator settings. ## **Opening the customer page in a new tab** To open the customer page in a new tab, make a right-click on their name, and click on “Open in a new tab”. ## **Changing the order status** On the “Status” column of the table, click on the order’s status and select the new status from the list. Changing the status from the order listing can also be very useful if you want to update the status of several orders. To do that, * Select the orders for which you want to update the status * Open the “Bulk actions” drop-down list * Select “Change order status {% hint style="info" %} You may have noticed a color change of the order status: you have a good eye! The color has been changed for better readability upon release of the 1.7.7 version of PrestaShop. {% endhint %} ## **Downloading the invoice and delivery slip** Once an invoice or a delivery slip is generated into the order, it is possible to download it in the action column. ![](https://lh3.googleusercontent.com/rmQ81g7g4TDlw4Wg_cP3cI8G3n9dC75cwqrLRy_1gENUCMZJyF6lkSL4wLsDIG7wViXZdAZLuTTfwuoDzFDA0wr00SImSsTnGkuWYYXxeRntnqx_ED4LNhK83fBkPweYyIcMfp1c) ## **Deleting an order** {% hint style="warning" %} You cannot delete an order. Implementing a “Delete” button would make PrestaShop illegal in Europe, as it is illegal to remove payment, ordering, or invoice information from a business. {% endhint %} If you want to cancel an order, change the order status to “Canceled”.
# Order page management Fully redesigned for PrestaShop 1.7.7, the order details page helps you save time when processing your orders. In this section, you will learn how to manage order details. ## ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/chabhnmFZHxPsFIHytS0/recent%20updates.png) :arrow\_right:[Contribute](https://prestashop.gitbook.io/howtocontribute/) ## Understanding the order page organization Divided into **6 sections**, the page provides you all the details about an order. :arrow\_up: At the **top of the page** is a **quick summary** of the order containing the: * order reference * customer’s name * total price * date and hour of validation ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/PEVGqJhOH0mIryqzpJbD/image.png) :arrow\_upper\_left: In the **top left-hand corner**, the **Customer section** gives you information about the customer and the private note, if any. You can even access the customer's personal file to see more details. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/k1k4sUTg5WxEShLiSGyK/image.png) :arrow\_upper\_right: In the **top right-hand corner**, the **Products section** gives you access to various details on the ordered products. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/BRGRTzNezQ6cYjDEtL10/image.png) :arrow\_down\_small: Just under the Products section, there is an **administrative section** that contains **four tabs** that give you access to the: * status and status history of the order * documents related to the order (e.g. invoice, delivery slip, etc.) * shipping information * merchandise returns ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/WcalKDf3rrxlojQDqB6u/image.png) :arrow\_lower\_right: In **the bottom right-hand corner**, the **Payment section** gives you information about the payment details (date of the transaction, method used, total amount, etc.) You can also add a new payment. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/cDePs2eWyIshi8QDta7T/image.png) :arrow\_lower\_left: Finally, in **the bottom left-hand corner**, the **Messages section** allows you to send a message to the customer about their order, or leave a private message for your team. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/iw9NqaXY67qiSo6Tp5TZ/image%20\(7\)%20\(1\).png) ## **In this section** {% content-ref url="/pages/-MUDGi0V5\_51KpizXdJl" %} [Editing an order](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-orders/order-page-management/editing-order) {% endcontent-ref %} {% content-ref url="/pages/-MUDHS1jAhccKJBGDZMY" %} [Creating returns and refunds](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-orders/order-page-management/creating-returns-and-refunds) {% endcontent-ref %} # Editing an order From the order page, not only can you access all of the order details, but also edit and update them. ## **Updating the order status** There are two places on the order page where you can update its status: * In the **top left-hand corner** of the page, next to the action buttons. * In the **Status tab** Select the status you want in the drop-down list and click on the “Update status” button. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/56UVt8qVfnLXfofOjJQ4/image.png) You can choose between the following statuses: ![](https://lh6.googleusercontent.com/6UrdsTFPXoizMX_PyjnMDRvnZ7yuqcdqRrboLt3v0W2XXalPe3lTD0Iuv4fbb-mVLzK0alGYtWtMQWmo7W5rlDsl03a42CyJjQgieEvfiV1c9ga1MXtFfiQGgkCLPXd-D9d1-tDa) {% hint style="info" %} Any module impacting the order monitoring might extend this status list. {% endhint %} In order to get a better view of the order's activity, every status change is recorded in the “Status” tab, as well as its author and the date/time of the update. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/xkz4HRNa3Xb8kZwfmLGp/image.png) {% hint style="warning" %} It is very important to **update a status only when it has been clearly confirmed**. For example, do not mark an order as “Delivered” when you have only sent the package, use “Shipped” instead. {% endhint %} :incoming\_envelope: For some status updates, an email is sent to the customer. You can resend this email by clicking on the button next to the order status, in the Status tab. If you have edited the order at some point, the customer will receive an updated email. ## Accessing the order documents You can get many PDF documents out of the order page. When available, they are listed in the Documents tab of the administrative section.‌ * **Print/Download the order** You can print or download the order as a PDF by clicking on the "**Print order**" button at the top of the order page. * **Download/Generate an invoice** You can download the invoice by clicking on the “**View invoice**” button at the top of the page. You can also access or generate the invoice in the Documents tab. ‌ :arrow\_right: In the Documents section, you can add a note to the invoice that will appear just below the tax table on the invoice. {% hint style="success" %} Here is a tip for tech-savvy merchants: You can **customize the invoice layout**: the PDF template files are located in the /pdf folder. These .tpl files are actually HTML files with Smarty tags for dynamic data. You can change the invoice's layout by editing the file named invoice.tpl {% endhint %} * **Download the delivery slip** If the order status is "Processing in progress", a delivery slip PDF is automatically generated. You can download it from the Documents tab or click on the “View deliver slip” button at the top of the page. ## Editing order items ### **Adding a product** ![](https://lh4.googleusercontent.com/pN61QdHvvYXsyffV5na9GBQpZ7Ak6mXf0U7wnr-UJopwjxxYLUAb9mKju2VgCfBbHutyW0AV8zpDC9J-sT-2A5-lBphPcKbmjol3jX49E6pIP5WXmzZx-xT-0vYM0NrzKR7rSk2f) At the bottom of the product list: * Click on the "Add a product" button * Enter the product’s name * Select the product you want to add * Set the quantity * Select the invoice on which you want this product to appear and click on the "Add" button {% hint style="warning" %} If the invoice has already been sent to the customer, you should not add new products to it. Instead, you should create another invoice: when adding a new product, choose "create a new invoice" in the drop-down list. {% endhint %} Note that you cannot add more products than available in stock. When you select a product, the number of items in stock appears in the “Available” column. :arrow\_right: To add a product that is already present in the order, click on the “Edit” button and modify the quantity. ### **‌Removing a product** **‌**To remove a product from the order, go to the product list and delete the product by clicking on the "Delete" button. :arrow\_right: If you only want to remove a certain quantity, click on the “Edit” button and modify the "Quantity" field. {% hint style="success" %} You can also cancel or edit the quantity of **several products at the same time**. \ \ To do so, click on the “Cancel products” button, at the top of the page and select the products, or the quantity you want to delete. This button is only available if merchandise returns are enabled in the Customer Service menu and if the order is not already paid for. {% endhint %} ## **Editing order details** ### **Editing shipping details** In the administrative section, click on the Carriers tab. Then, click on the “Edit” button to modify the tracking number and the carrier. :arrow\_right: Note that the carrier can only be modified if the order has not been shipped yet. ### **Editing the shipping address or the invoice address** The **shipping address** is the address where the package will be sent, whereas the **invoice address** is the address of the buyer. They might be different (in case of a customer ordering a gift for a friend, for example). If a customer asks you to modify one of these addresses, go to the Customer section and click on the hamburger menu next to the “Shipping Address” or the “Invoice address” label. You can edit the existing address or select another address, from the list of addresses that were provided by the customer. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/mxg9UFOoTCDfOWZ2GzVM/image.png) If the address you want to link to the order is not already registered in PrestaShop, you must create it first. To do this: * In the Customer section of the order page, access the customer’s personal file, by clicking on “View full details” * At the bottom of the page, click on the “+” in the Addresses section. * Fill in the form and save * Go back to the order details page and select the address in the drop-down list. ![Adresses section of the Customer page](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/NSIch7QVKoOClNuqWo97/image.png) ## **Managing payments and discounts** ### **Registering a new payment** To register a new payment, go to the Payments section of the order page. * Select the date of the payment and the payment method used * Enter the transaction ID * Enter the amount and select the currency * Select the invoice on which you want this payment to appear * Click on the "Add" button to save ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/ldxg7Hkvwb3su5rBJugX/image.png) ### **Adding a discount** ‌In the Products section, at the bottom of the order product list, click on the "Add a new discount" button, and fill in the form: ![](https://lh4.googleusercontent.com/1WozYkYNQW2M0NuruC-5SGI5zbVsYheWGOC8elIvG6X6V1Qmw2G2iP25y1rZsLqeJgfMPzWQ8sqUti1B6WNYOSwLSXU473WpLn4YAKWiCdnBpl5uiM_0SFEY1_6lfXRXNDZ6jhWy) * **Name:** Give the discount a short name. This will be visible to the customer. * **Type:** Choose the discount type: "percent", "amount" or "free shipping". * **Value:** For the "percent" or "amount" types, set the value of the discount. * **Invoice:** Select the invoice on which you want this discount to apply. When there is more than one invoice, you can check the box to apply the discount to all the invoices. {% hint style="warning" %} The discount is not applied to the shipping costs unless you check free shipping. {% endhint %} ## **‌Managing order messages and customer private notes** ### **Adding a private note** :lock\_with\_ink\_pen: In the Customer section, you can add a private note on a customer that will only be visible by you and your team. It can very useful to let your colleagues know about important information about the customer: he or she a regular customer? should special attention be paid because of a previous incident? ### **Attaching a message to the order** :e-mail: You might need to send the customer a message to keep them informed of their order’s progress or let them know about an unforeseen event. **Communication is key for a good customer experience!** And the good news is that you can do it very easily from the order page: Write your message in the message field and send it. * [x] If you want your customer to receive it, do not forget to check the "Display to customer?" box.
* [ ] You might want to keep this message available **for you and your team only**. That is also possible: just leave the "Display to customer?" box unchecked. #### **Send predefined messages** You can select a predefined order message from the drop-down list. You can then add further details to the pre-written message if needed. If you want to write custom predefined messages, click on the “Configure predefined messages” button. You will be redirected to the Order Messages page, under the Customer service menu. To know more: {% content-ref url="/pages/-MD-vw\_2IN9-\_8pznt7D" %} [Order Messages](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-customer-service/order-messages) {% endcontent-ref %} # Creating returns and refunds On this page, you will learn how to create returns and refunds directly from the order page. ## **Proceeding to a standard refund** :arrow\_right: It is possible to proceed to refunds when the order is paid, or when at least one payment is linked to the order. :arrow\_right:Standard refunds are accessible only when merchandise returns are enabled on the Customer service > Merchandise returns page. :arrow\_right:Once the order is shipped, you cannot proceed to a standard refund anymore. **Follow the steps:** * Click on the “Standard refund” button *A new column appears in the Products table, entitled “Standard refund”.* * Set the amount and quantity for each of the products you want to refund * Choose one of the refund options\ See “[Choosing a refund option](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-orders/order-page-management/creating-returns-and-refunds#choosing-a-refund-option)” below for more details. * Click on the “Standard refund” button to validate ## **Proceeding to a partial refund** You should proceed to a partial refund if you only want to refund part of the order, either because the customer returned one of the ordered products, or simply as a sign of goodwill for a damaged product that the customer chose to keep anyway. :arrow\_right:Partial refunds are only available when the order is paid, or when at least one payment is linked to the order. :arrow\_right:A partial refund is also possible after the order has left the warehouse. **Follow the steps:** * Click on the “Partial refund” button *A new column appears in the Products table, entitled “Partial refund”.* * Set the amount and quantity for each of the products you want to refund * Choose one of the refund options\ See “[Choosing a refund option](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-orders/order-page-management/creating-returns-and-refunds#choosing-a-refund-option)” below for more details. * Click on the “Partial refund” button to validate ## **Registering a product return** :arrow\_right: Registering a product return is possible only once the order is shipped and if requested by the customer. :arrow\_right:Merchandise returns should also be enabled on the Customer service > Merchandise returns page. Merchandise return requests from the customer are available in the Merchandise returns tab. ![Merchandise returns tab in the administrative section (Order page)](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/KdesbKGM8lvGBgRcU5R3/image.png) **Follow the steps:** Make sure that you have received the returned products. If everything is ok, you can mark it as “returned” directly from the order page: * Click on the “Return products” button *A new column appears in the Products table, entitled “Return products”.* * Select the products and quantity returned * Choose one of the refund options\ See “[Choosing a refund option](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-orders/order-page-management/creating-returns-and-refunds#choosing-a-refund-option)” below for more details * Click on the “Return products” button to validate ## **‌Choosing a refund option** When you set a product as returned or to be refunded, four options are available, depending on the order status: ### **Re-stock products** When registering a product return, you may choose to re-stock the products in question. If you select this option, PrestaShop will consider that the returned product is available for sale again, and will therefore increase the stock for this product. {% hint style="warning" %} You should make sure not to check the “Re-stock products” box if the returned product has a manufacturing defect or is broken. {% endhint %} ### **Generate a credit slip** When proceeding to a refund, you may choose to generate a credit slip. :arrow\_right: A credit slip is an acknowledgment from the store that the merchandise refund has been issued. This will be used for accounting purposes. Depending on your refund policy, you might pay the customer back or generate a voucher for their next purchase. ### **Generate a voucher** When proceeding to a refund, you may choose to generate a voucher. :arrow\_right:A voucher takes the form of a discount code that the customer can enter during the checkout process. \ \ In PrestaShop, vouchers are part of a special kind of discount feature: "cart rules". They can be created and edited from the Discounts > Cart rules page. You can also edit customers' existing vouchers directly from the Customer page, in the vouchers section.\ \ To know more: {% content-ref url="/pages/-MD-vwZd4sK13ve89UFp" %} [Cart Rules](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-discounts/cart-rules) {% endcontent-ref %} ### **Repay shipping costs** You can choose to repay the shipping costs of the returned products. It is always an appreciated gesture! # Creating a back office order On this documentation page, you will learn how to create an order from the back office. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/chabhnmFZHxPsFIHytS0/recent%20updates.png) :arrow\_right: [Contribute](https://prestashop.gitbook.io/howtocontribute/) Creating an order directly from the back office of your store can be very useful! Imagine that you are on the phone with a customer who wants to buy a product but, for some reason, does not succeed. You can offer to create the order for them. ## **Associating the order with a customer** ![](https://lh3.googleusercontent.com/XyUVQ0sOcGjUekkxPstTuT95okpOssMbA1pNoptGM6dp8t5Q0DvqIG9DbDMx9cPofCewLvtLsz4tZKWqGWaBF0nsDIcO-EgicnhG-oAv23Edn2QfHAdxAHuqwWnMjnWdHPElopCU) On the Orders page, click on the “Add new order” button and enter the first letters of the customer’s first name, last name, or email address to display the matching accounts. If you need more information about a customer, click on the “Details” button. :new: If the customer you are creating this order for does not have a user account already, you can create one by clicking on the “Add a new customer” button and filling in the form. Once saved, the customer is automatically suggested for your order. Click on “Choose” to start creating the order. ![](https://lh4.googleusercontent.com/RBsGvXDRFEuigb2Yo1ptZX9z9lNFOizeqflpdytdJ-j1E4Cp1HiPy3zs6gf2-Gyaolc39PmKGLpEoA7LcKH9PRbzotnHbJlntwZUiHxfOvZmjneTJvu4lQsQ5zVCDLGnQkr18h98) ## **Accessing abandoned carts and previous orders** In the Customer section of the order’s form, you can access and the customer’s abandoned carts and their previous orders if any, and select them. {% hint style="success" %} It can be very useful, and save your time! For instance, if it turns out you are dealing with a cart that a customer somehow could not validate, you can use that cart as the order basis by clicking on the "Use" button. {% endhint %} ## **‌Adding a product** If you do not want to use an abandoned cart nor a previous order, use the “Search for a product” field. * Type the first letters of the product’s name * In the Product drop-down list, choose the product you want to add * If the product has some, select a combination * If the product is customizable, add your text * Enter or pick a quantity * Click on the “Add to the cart” button to validate PrestaShop gives you an indication of the remaining stock, just below the “Quantity” field, this way, you can tell your customer on the phone if a product is out of stock, without having to open another tab. ## **‌Adding a voucher** Once the order is created, you can grant that order a voucher, and even create one by clicking on the "Add new voucher" button. To know more about how to create a cart rule, visit the corresponding documentation page: {% content-ref url="/pages/-MD-vwZd4sK13ve89UFp" %} [Cart Rules](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/selling/managing-catalog/managing-discounts/cart-rules) {% endcontent-ref %} ## **Editing/Adding an address ‌** The delivery address and the invoice address might be different if the person who is going to receive the package is not the one who paid for it. ### **Editing an address** In most cases, the address fields are already filled in. You can still modify the address by clicking on the “Edit” button to modify it. ### **Adding a new address** If you have just created the customer account, you will need to add their address at this point. Click on the “Add a new address” button and fill in the form. This step is mandatory in order to proceed with the order. ## **Organizing the shipping** ![](https://lh5.googleusercontent.com/92b4c-zKguIcKZEt4cgy8pQ2DQx-lhnEZiYWB_zMXKQBMNxIegbK22eGXjY3YIJqYUT29zRhEFWC9-uNi-1qt6vouCjyRYWFOl_-11WeQpw9d8QAcrDJhZJ-yhnHTFkHZvrd5riJ) In the “Shipping” section, you can choose the available delivery option. Your choice automatically determines the shipping price. If you want to offer your client the shipping, click on “Yes” to automatically set the shipping price to 0. ## **Organizing the payment** Check the order summary. Is everything ok? If yes, you can finalize the order by organizing the payment. ### **Send pre-filled order to the customer by email** One way to complete the order is to send the pre-filled order with the information you entered (items in the cart, delivery address, etc.) to the customer, so they can complete the order themselves. The customer will be able to double-check the information, change it if needed, and enter a payment method to finalize the order. ### **Proceed to checkout in the front office** Clicking on the “Proceed to check out in the front office” button redirects you to the front office checkout funnel, to complete the back-office-created order. # Invoices Each time an order from your shop is validated, an invoice is sent out to the customer. This page allows you to configure your invoices and makes it possible to download a selection of invoices. ## Generate invoice in PDF files You can download the invoices for a single order from the order's page. The "Invoices" page enables you to download a selection of invoices from past orders in PDF format, all at the same time (in the same PDF file). ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/VBHs83czt0zIdllQjBnd/51839182%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) You can get a PDF file containing several invoices depending on two main criteria: * **By date**. Very useful when you need to print all invoices for a given month or a given quarter. Select the start and end date, and click on the "Generate PDF file by date" button in the top bar. * **By order status**. A must-have when you need to print precisely which orders are canceled, refunded or on backorder. PrestaShop helpfully indicates the number of invoices tied to each status in parentheses. In both cases, the invoices are generated into a single PDF file, each with their own pages. You cannot get a single PDF file for each invoice of the given period or statuses using this page. If you want to customize the look of your store's invoices, you must change its template files. PDF template files are located in the `/pdf` folder. Open the `invoice.tpl` file and edit it to your likings: it is an HTML file with Smarty tags. When your customers ask for their invoices, you can redirect them to the "Order History" section of their user accounts, which keeps all of their invoices available for them. ## Invoice Options You can choose whether or not invoices should be available to your customers as soon as the order is made, as well as the Invoice prefix and the invoice number you want listed on the printed version of the invoice. This feature can help you simplify the management of your account. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/OQhajpzPJezgmrNWu7v7/51839180.png) * **Enable invoices**. When disabled, your customer will not receive an invoice after their purchase. You will be responsible for handling the invoices, if your customers ask for one. * **Enable tax breakdown**. When enabled, the invoice lists all the various taxes that were applied to the order, instead of just one percentage. * **Enable product image**. When enabled, it will add the product's image next to the product name on the invoice. * **Invoice prefix**. By default, PrestaShop has language-adapted invoice prefixes: "IN" in English, "FA" in French (for "*facture*"), "CU" in Spanish (for "*cuenta*"), etc. You could choose to have language codes instead: "EN", "FR", "SP", etc. Of course, you can also choose to have a single prefix for every language, or to not have a prefix at all.\ PrestaShop will then generate the invoices number according to you settings: "#IN000001", "#FA000002", etc. * **Add current year to invoice number**. In addition to the invoice number and prefix, the year will also appear in the invoice number. * **Reset invoice progressive number at the beginning of the year**. At the beginning of a new year, the invoice number is reset to start again at 0. * **Position of the year date**. Choose where to display the year date in the invoice number, before or after the progressive number. * **Invoice number**. If your business has already had orders and invoices before you started using PrestaShop, you can use this option to start your invoice number from a higher number. * **Legal free text.** This field allows you to add some extra content to the invoice, in case your local legislation require you to display additional information. On the invoice, it will appear below the payment methods summary. Of course, you can use this free text to display any text you deem necessary. * **Footer text**. You can use this to have a custom text at the bottom of all your invoices. The text will appear below the name of your shop in the invoice. * **Invoice model**. Depending on your themes, you might be able to use more than one style of invoice. Test them with a fake order, in order to choose the one you prefer. If you know how to code in HTML, you can add your own invoice models or edit the existing ones: they are located in the `/pdf/` folder of your PrestaShop installation. * **Use the disk as cache for PDF invoices**. You can choose to store generated invoices on PrestaShop's server disk rather than in its server cache. While it saves on memory usage, it slows down the PDF generation itself, so use it knowingly. Do not forget to save your changes. # Credit slips Following your agreement on a product return, you should receive a package from the customer. Once you have received that package, you **must** create a credit slip from the order's page. It can also be called "credit note" or "credit memo". Credit slips are not created in the "Credit Slips" page but only listed there. This page is also used to generate a PDF of your credit slips. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/18zPJ1bh1vcFvCpd7cDE/51839192%20\(3\)%20\(7\).png) ## Credit Slips Options ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/nCEuenFZKeaZTMhbIxmd/51839194%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) There is only one option on the page: * **Credit slip prefix**. You might like to have language-tagged delivery slips. Of course, you can also choose to not have a prefix at all. PrestaShop will then generate the credit slips number according to your settings. Do not forget to save your changes. ## Creating a Credit Slip In your list of orders ("Orders" page), click on the order for which the customer is returning some items for more details – this will only work if have already indicated that the customer can send products back. Below the "Products" table, do the following: 1. Check the returned item(s). 2. Check the box "Re-stock Products" if you wish to put the product back in your stock. 3. Check the box "Generate a Credit Slip." 4. To make a customer happy after committing an error in their order, consider giving him a voucher by checking the box next to "Generate a Voucher." 5. You can also reimburse his shipping costs by clicking next to "Include Shipping." Once you have selected all the options you want, confirm by clicking on "Return products." ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/st3271RKpjizPPXhtfja/57081971.png) The credit slip is now created and will be available in the Order Details well as in the "Credit Slips" page. From there, you can click the link to download the PDF file. The customer will see the slip in his or her "Account" section. If you have created a voucher, customers will see it in the "Vouchers" section of their account. If they click on it, it should look something like this: ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/wIixnxzHDC4raFk1nCb2/51839708%20\(3\)%20\(1\).png) The amount of the returned item(s) is added to the voucher. The customer can use the discount code (listed in the far left of the column) next time he or she places an order. # Delivery slips A delivery slip is a notification of delivery. It can also be called "delivery note" or "advice note".\ It is supposed to be put in the shipped package, along with the ordered products. It will have your shop's logo, and indicate the content. On receiving the package, the customer will be able to use the delivery slip in order to double-check the content of the package, see that nothing is missing from the order. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/P6LCRyhBDFJfMVMXVSuQ/51839199.png) Getting a delivery slip is exactly like getting an invoice. Select the dates, as well as the options you would like, and then confirm them to create your documents. You can get a PDF file of several delivery slips depending only by date, which is very useful when you need to print all delivery slips for a given day or a given quarter. Select the start and end date, and click on the "Generate PDF" button. ## Delivery Slips Options ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/yc2MAAK0Ayy0xBO81uw8/51839200%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) The three options are the same as for the invoice options: * **Delivery prefix**. You might like to have language-tagged delivery slips: "DE" in English, "LI" in French (for "livraison"), "EN" in Spanish (for "entrenga"), etc. Or you could directly choose to have language codes: "EN", "FR", "SP", etc. Of course, you can also choose to not have a prefix at all. * **Delivery number**. If your business has already had orders and delivery slips before you started using PrestaShop, you can use this option to start your delivery slip number from a higher number. * **Enable product image**. When enabled, it will display a product's image in front of the product name. PrestaShop will then generate the delivery slips number according to your settings: "#DE000001", "#LI000002", etc. Do not forget to save your changes. # Shopping carts PrestaShop contains some very powerful marketing features that enable you to see the products that customers are adding to their carts in real time. There are two ways to achieve this: 1. Go to the "Customers" page in the "Customers" menu, find the customer you are looking for, and view his or her customer profile. In that profile, scroll down to the "Carts" section, where you can see all the carts created by this customer. 2. Go to the "Shopping carts" page in the "Orders" menu. The carts are sorted by ID. Find the customer you are looking for. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/e2XvA4UsdokUqQAgrlVR/38469730%20\(3\)%20\(3\).png) In both cases, you can click the "View" icon to see the content of your client's cart, and use this information to improve your commercial performance. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/JspLUx7UY6xuX3wU01Qv/23038782%20\(3\)%20\(1\).png) In the cart's page, the most important information is in the "Cart Summary" section, where you can see what products the customer chose to purchase, the price of each item, the quantity they put in their cart, and the total value of their cart. Managing abandoned carts Cart abandonment often means that a sale has been lost. The "Shopping cart" page indicates the carts that have not been turned into proper orders, and it is up to you to remind the customer that they can still come back to finish their purchase. Abandoned carts (or "ghost carts") will have a delete link at the end of each row, while carts without delete links are processed carts, i.e. the purchase has been confirmed and you are supposed to send the products. By default, it is up to you to contact the customer about his abandoned cart. You can install the Reminder module, which is available in the default installation and enables you to send vouchers to those who have abandoned their shopping carts, or to those who you want to thank for their order, to the best clients to thank them for their purchases and for being faithful... Note that this can lead to abuse: some customers might abandon carts on purpose in order to receive a voucher... You can also buy PrestaShop's Abandoned Cart Reminder module for a complete tool: . # Improving your store As your store and your business evolve, you will want to add new functionalities or explore new markets. This section is all about customizing your shop: shaping an online store that matches your current business, and scaling it with new modules, new countries, languages, payment methods or carriers, as time goes by. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/6pSzh1oIlaMVPvkndkPo/51839884%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) This chapter contains the following sections: * [Managing your Modules](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/managing-modules) * [Customizing your store design](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/customizing-store-design) * [Managing Shipping](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/managing-shipping) * [Managing Payments](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/managing-payments) * [Going International](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/going-international) # Managing your Modules PrestaShop comes with a set of modules that can be installed/uninstalled and configured as desired, in order to customize and complete your shop. The range of actions is virtually unlimited: the extensibility of PrestaShop makes it possible to turn your shop into exactly what you intend it to do, instead of you having to comply with constraints that you did not choose – provided you can find the module that does exactly what you need. This chapter contains the following sections: * [Modules and Services](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/managing-modules/modules-and-services) * [Modules Catalog](broken://pages/-MD-zRvG737YZi-tN_Qu) The "Modules" section of the back office is currently being reworked. Changes are expected from PrestaShop 1.7.5 to the next minor versions, and that is why we would rather not document it right now but wait for the whole rework to be over. Don't panic, as we want it to remain intuitive, you probably won't need help! ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/gQZgirx5cZ0oBCL2JdY6/51839886%20\(7\)%20\(7\).png) # Modules and Services In PrestaShop 1.7 the Modules and Services page is divided into three tabs to help you perform easily what you want to do regarding your modules: * Selection: this is where you can discover and install new modules to improve your store when you’re beginning or growing with PrestaShop, * Installed Modules: where you can manage your modules on a daily basis, * Notifications: review modules notifications, when you need to take action (updates or configuration) to guarantee the good functioning of your modules. At the top of the page, you will also find two important features: the connection to Addons and the "Upload a module" option. Follow the links for more details on these tabs: * [ Modules Selection](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/managing-modules/modules-and-services/modules-selection) * [ Installed modules](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/managing-modules/modules-and-services/installed-modules) * [ Module notifications](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/managing-modules/modules-and-services/module-notifications) # Module notifications It is important to keep your modules up-to-date, whether some setting is missing or a new version is available. This page helps you review the actions you need to perform on concerned modules. Modules to configure You will at times get notifications from installed modules. Most of the time, the notification help you complete the configuration of modules that are installed but are not yet ready to be used: updating their settings should make the notification disappear... and your module work properly. ## Modules to update When one of your modules has an update available on the Addons site, PrestaShop will let you know about it, and an "Update" button will appear. Click on this button to update your modules. Before updating your module, you can have a look at its changelog to review what's new with this new version. It is useful to check your modules after the update: are these new features working properly? # Modules Selection You can discover and install new modules to improve your store when you’re beginning or growing your activity. * [Explaining modules and services](#what-is-the-difference-between-a-module-and-service) * [Uploading and installing a module manually ](#modulesselection-uploadingamodulemanually) * [Installing using the upload form](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/managing-modules/modules-and-services/modules-selection#ModulesSelection-Installingusingtheuploadform) * [Installing using an FTP client](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/managing-modules/modules-and-services/modules-selection#ModulesSelection-InstallingusinganFTPclient) ### What is the difference between a module and a service? On the one hand, **a module** allows you to add features to your store, such as new means of payment, a synchronization of inventory and orders with your logistician, an export to smart shopping guides, and many tools for you and your customers. Modules come with a file that must be installed on your store. On the other hand, **a service** is intangible: you do not have to install anything in your store for the service to work. Instead, you may have to sign a contract with the service provider. #### **What is a built-in module?** Built-in (or native) modules are available within your store from its setup. Some modules are already pre-installed to help your store run (you will find them in the "Installed modules" tab), and some you can upload and install manually. You can choose to keep them or not, depending on your needs. They cover the basics of e-commerce and come for free. ## Uploading and installing a module manually #### Installing using the upload form To install a new module automatically, click on the "Upload a module" button at the top of the page. A pop-up window will open. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/LFlwSiJozKJ16bPT4xns/51185188%20\(4\)%20\(2\).png) This block enables you to upload the archive file of the module, as downloaded. You can either upload a `zip` file, or a `tar.gz` one (tarball). Simply drop the module's file here, or browse to the file that you downloaded by clicking on "select file". Do not point to the module's uncompressed folder or any of its unpacked files: only the archive file! Once the file is detected, the installation will start automatically: the software will upload the module from your computer to its server, unpack it, place the files in the correct location, and update the page, all this in a handful of seconds. The software will then display a "Module installed!" message. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/dJbyOY7zZ4BnVCPAgFnN/51185193%20\(6\)%20\(9\).gif) Modules are not installed by default: you still have to click the module's "Install" button, and then possibly configure its settings via the "Installed modules" tab. Once the configuration is complete, be sure to test the module immediately to confirm that it works as planned. #### Installing using an FTP client You can also choose to install a module by yourself, using an FTP client. To install a new module manually: 1. Unzip (decompress) the module archive file (`.zip` or `tar.gz`). This should result in a new folder. 2. Using your FTP client, connect to the PrestaShop web server, and place the unpacked module folder in your installation's `/modules` folder.\ Pay attention NOT to upload that folder in another module's folder (which can happen when drag-and-dropping items). **Upload both the folder and the files it contains, not just the files.** 3. Go to your back office, in the "Selection" tab. 4. Locate the new module in the modules list. You might have to scroll down; you can also use the list's search engine, which should give you a dynamically updated list of matching module names. 5. In the row for the new module, click the "Install" button. 6. Your module is now installed and should be activated too. If necessary, click on the module's "Configure" link. Also, pay attention to any warning message that might be displayed on your screen. Once the configuration is complete, be sure to test the module immediately to confirm that it works as planned. Modules can come from many sources, and not all of them are reliable. This is why PrestaShop software sometimes displays a warning window for "Untrusted" modules – that is, modules that have not been verified by PrestaShop. This screen window lets you choose whether to proceed with the installation with no further notification or to stop the installation process. # Installed modules On this page, you can install, uninstall, configure and update each of your modules. This chapter simply explains how you can manage your modules from the "Installed modules" tab. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/0iRiTd9D1LBGnU4g9pvc/51185201%20\(5\)%20\(3\).png) ## The modules list This list enables you to quickly find the module you want to configure or edit the settings of. It is divided into 3 sections: * **Installed modules**. These are all the modules you’ve added to your shop, either by buying it from PrestaShop Addons, or by uploading it directly. * **Built-in modules**. These modules from PrestaShop are preinstalled when you set-up your shop. They cover the basics of e-commerce and comes for free. * **Theme modules**. Each theme you install will come with its own set of modules. You’ll find here all the modules related to your active theme. If you want to quickly find a module, you can search for a specific module, or filter down modules until you find the one you are looking for. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/nmRoCyAgLiJtTSewB5Cc/51185200%20\(5\)%20\(2\).png) * **Search field**. Search for a module with its name, author or with keywords. * **Sort selectors**. The list automatically reloads when you make a selection, and displays modules according to all the current settings. * **Categories**. On the left is a list of all the module categories, with the number of modules for each in brackets. Click on a category in order to display the modules for this category. * **Show all modules.** Allows you to choose between enabled and disabled modules. Enabled modules are the only ones that can be configured, hence the importance of this selector. * **Installed & Not Installed**. Most of the time, you will want to perform an action on an installed module or install a new one. This filter is the most commonly used. * **Last access.** If you often use the same modules, this option will make it easier to find the latest modules you have been working on. * **Name**. Sorts modules by alphabetical order, from A to Z. Modules can have one of 4 statuses: * Non-installed. * Installed but disabled * Installed and enabled. * Installed and enabled, but with warnings.\
Difference between disabling and uninstalling When you do not have a use for a module anymore, you can either disable or uninstall it. The results of both actions are seemingly the same: the module is not available anymore, its options do not appear in your back office and any element it added to your front-end have disappeared. The difference is that disabling a module keeps its configuration safe for later re-enabling while uninstalling it removes all of its configuration and database data. All the module's files will be deleted. Therefore, you should only uninstall a module if you do not care about its data or if you are certain that you would not need it. It is like deleting it for good. ## Performing Actions on Modules Here are the available actions, depending on the module's status: * Uninstalled modules: * **Install**. This will trigger the installation of the module on your installation of PrestaShop. The module will be automatically enabled.\
* Installed modules: * **Upgrade**. Your PrestaShop installation regularly checks with the Addons server if there is any update for your modules. If so, the action button becomes "Upgrade" for the affected modules. Simply click it, and PrestaShop will take care of downloading and updating the module. * **Enable**. For modules which have been formerly disabled. Once enabled again, it might add new options to your back office. * **Enable on mobile**. This will enable the front office view of the module only for mobile devices (smartphones, etc.). * **Configure**. Some modules have a configuration page. In that case, they offer a "Configure" link to access a new interface where the user will be able to adjust all its settings. * **Disable**. When installed, a module is enabled by default. You can disable it, which will remove its options from your back office but will keep its settings for a later re-enabling. * **Disable on mobile**. This will disable the front office view of the module only for mobile devices (smartphones, etc.). * **Reset**. This will restore the module's settings to their defaults. * **Uninstall**. This will disable the module. To also delete all its files and data, you should select the option "Delete module folder after uninstall." These actions can be performed either individually on each module, or in mass thanks to the "Bulk actions" menu on the right. ### Uninstalling a module **Do not ever delete a module by directly trashing its folder using your FTP client!** You must let PrestaShop take charge of it. When you need to temporarily stop using a module, but still wish to keep its configuration, you can simply disable it: just click on the "Disable" link. The actions will turn into "Enable" and "Delete", but the "Uninstall" button can still be seen. If you do not care about the module's configuration, click on the "Uninstall" button: your module's folder will still be in the `/modules` folder, but the module will not have any impact on your shop anymore.\ If you wish to entirely remove the module from your server, click the "Delete" link: PrestaShop will get rid of its folder and all its files. Make sure that the disabling or removal of the module does not break the theme. # Customizing your store design ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/CfG6GHQ7WTtnF4i0C0t7/51839891%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png)How your shop looks plays a big part in shaping your brand's identity and is essential for the experience of your customers. More than just shapes, fonts and colors, the design of your online shop is also about the content you offer and how it's all organized. This chapter contains the following sections: * [Theme and Logo](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/customizing-store-design/theme-and-logo) * [Theme Catalog](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/customizing-store-design/theme-catalog) * [Email Theme](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/customizing-store-design/email-theme) * [Pages - Managing Static Content](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/customizing-store-design/pages-managing-static-content) * [Positions](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/customizing-store-design/positions) * [Image Settings](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/customizing-store-design/image-settings) * [Link Widget](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/customizing-store-design/link-widget) # Theme and Logo Its title says it all: the "Theme & Logo" page enables you to efficiently manage your themes, and this is where you go if you want to update your logo. ## Adaptation to Right-to-Left (RTL) languages PrestaShop software supports Right-To-Left (RTL) languages. Not only the back office and its themes are now fully RTL compatible, but we are also introducing RTL stylesheet generation for front office themes. This means that any front office theme can now be automatically converted to be RTL-compatible. This is extremely important for selling in countries that speak in RTL languages like Arabic, Hebrew, or Persian. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/wznuLJ2NEjB0hLQKtXNU/64225586%20\(2\)%20\(1\).png) ## Logos Changing your shop's logo is often one of the first steps performed when customizing the design of your store. You can modify your shop's main logo but not only, thanks to these three different tabs: * **Header logo**. The logo that will appear on all the pages of your shop. * **Invoice & email logos**. The logos that will respectively appear in your shop's email notifications and invoices. * **Favicons**. Your shop's favicon. It is the small image displayed at the left of the web browser's address bar and on the browser's tabs.
The default theme uses a "Classic" logo and PrestaShop's logo as a favicon. It is strongly recommended to change all of the instances of these logos and use yours instead! In multistore mode, you can apply these changes to all your stores or a group of stores at one time, using the multistore menu. ## Your current theme The first section of the page serves as a reminder of which theme you are currently using, with its details: * Theme name and version. * Theme author's name. * Thumbnail for the theme.\
![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/YvUI6wmtnqHj9nnbFFwp/64225588%20\(4\).png) ### Configure your page layouts Depending on your theme's options you can customize each kind of page layout: whether it should have columns or not, how many, with different sizes, and so on. By clicking on "Choose layouts", you will see a new page listing all the kinds of pages available on your site (category, product, cart, etc.). For each page, you can change the default layout. For the default software theme, "Classic", the available options are: * Full width - No side columns, ideal for distraction-free pages such as product pages. * Three Columns - One large central column and 2 side columns. * Two Columns, small left column - Two columns with a small left column. * Two Columns, small right column - Two columns with a small right column. Click "Save" to keep your changes. In case you want to revert your modifications and go back to the default settings, simply click the "Reset to defaults" button on the "Theme & Logo" page. ### Select a theme for your "\[name]" shop This section is only displayed if you have at least two themes installed. It presents you with the other available themes on your software installation besides the already-enabled one. This section simply shows the thumbnails of the available themes, with their names. Move your mouse cursor over the thumbnail to display a menu with two options: * **Use this theme**. This will replace your current theme with this theme. * **Delete this theme**. This will delete this theme's files from your web server.\
In multistore mode, you cannot apply a theme to all your stores or a group of stores; you must select a single store in the multistore menu, then pick a theme. ### Adding a theme You can import a theme and install it (and its attached modules) thanks to the "Add new theme" button. By clicking it, a new screen will open. This screen presents you with 3 methods to install a new theme. A final button leads you to the theme creation form, presented in the next section. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/7IlP5hoSRAJ7tHnJAVbC/64225589%20\(4\)%20\(2\).png) Whatever the method, the process remains the same: indicate the location of the theme's Zip archive, then click on the "Save" button. Here, the only thing that changes is the source of the Zip file: * **Import from your computer**. Use the file explorer to find the archive. * **Import from the web**. Indicate the direct public URL to the archive. * **Import from FTP**. Using your FTP client, upload the archive in the following folder: `/themes/`. Click "Save" to validate your choice: the theme is now installed. Click "Save" one last time. A final confirmation page presents you with all the changes applied to your software installation. Click "Finish" to end the process. ### Exporting a theme This section is only available when there is at least one theme installed on your site. Exporting a theme is very useful when you want either to back the theme up for safety or create an archive of the theme for a friend Not only does it generate a complete Zip archive of your theme, but it also adds the custom modules that your theme requires, which is very useful when importing to another site. The export option works only for the current theme. Click "Export current theme" to export the theme used by your shop. Your theme will be compressed in a .zip file and the confirmation message will tell you where to find it in your theme folder. Save the archive on your hard-drive to be safe. From there on, you can easily share this theme. ## Pages configuration The "Theme Customization" module allows you to easily customize the front office pages of your store. You can customize the **homepage**, the **category page**, and the **product page**. On the left side of your screen is displayed a simplified illustration of the selected page. On the right side, a mirrored view shows the module selection you need to configure for the modification. Click on the part of the page you want to modify to know which module(s) need to be configured to make the change. Then, click on "Configure" to access the module page and proceed with the modifications. See the GIF below to see an example of how to modify your homepage slider. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/6d5zZHxQShoItKuW5DwD/Pages%20Configuration%20%E2%80%A2%20Les%20chaussettes%20de%20l'archiduchesse%20\(2\).gif) {% hint style="info" %} Please note that the "Theme Customization" module only works with the software's default theme and with built-in modules. {% endhint %} ## Advanced customization: parent/child theme This is a feature introduced with PrestaShop 1.7 and it is only useful if you want to slightly modify a theme (to add a block for example), but still make sure you can update it easily. Indeed, if you modify a theme directly in its folder, the risk is that when the theme is updated, your changes could be incompatible with the update. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/qunv7wUWpILQcrbydOFj/64225591%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) Thanks to the child theme, you are able to customize the parent theme and at the same time, you can benefit from its updates. Using a child theme can be a bit technical. To see how you can use a child theme in details, please refer the developer documentation: ### Creating a child theme First, you need to have the theme you want to use as a parent in your store `/themes` folder. Then you can create a new folder with a very minimal theme, containing only the following files, which you can copy directly from the Parent theme: ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/84OYJfZTTDPboyyfRW2e/51839422%20\(6\)%20\(7\).png) Once you have this, you will specify in your child theme `theme.yml` which theme should be used as a parent (in the example below, we chose the software's default theme, Classic). The value must be the theme technical name (ie: the theme folder name). Add the following information the `theme.yml` file: ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/mST7nUhtYHHHsEb6r44P/64225412.png) You can now use this theme in your back office and edit it as you wish. # Theme Catalog ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/aw6Bn8SGHeGUSjSaYok5/51839899%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) If you are looking for a new theme, PrestaShop Addons is where you should go! Thanks to this page, you can browse through most popular designs available on Addons to get inspired. If you wish to see more themes, click "Discover all of the themes" to be directed to the full selection of PrestaShop themes, as available on our official marketplace, PrestaShop Addons. By clicking "Discover" for a given theme, a new page from PrestaShop Addons will open, with more details are this specific theme. You can also use the search bar at the bottom of the page to find the theme that best suits your store. # Email Theme Emails hold an important place in e-commerce: an efficient communication, relevant information, all that help to keep in touch with your customers. Following this idea, a new page appeared in 1.7.6 to allow better management of your email themes. Your "Design" menu now has a new entry with the "Email Theme" page! You are now able to handle all themes at the same place. *New in 1.7.6!* Before emails were retrieved from your server, they are now generated from this new page, or automatically when installing your store and/or a localization pack. ## Configuration This page is divided into three parts. The first parameters to indicate is the email theme you want to have by default. Natively, there are two templates available: "Classic" and "Modern" (available since version 1.7.6 only). It means that depending on the template you select, your next emails will look different. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/8dGrNMpFNEVu6HbYV1zW/64225568%20\(4\)%20\(3\).png) ## Generate emails Creating your emails is as easy as pie... just follow these few steps! Pick the email template you want, as well as its language. In order to benefit from email translation, make sure you have added the language you target before. In case you have not, go to the "International" section to do so. If you need to replace emails from your current theme, you should first select the theme you want to overwrite and then activate the following option ("Overwrite templates") to confirm this action. Indeed, to prevent from deleting your work by error, existing files cannot be modified. It means that you will have to force the overwrite to perform your action. ## Email themes Here, you can find all existing email themes. By default, you already have the two native themes "Classic" and "Modern". Click on the icon to access the full emails list each theme contains. Once on the page, several actions can be performed: * **HTTP.** Allows you to preview your email as it will be sent, in the selected layout. * **Raw HTML.** Allows you to preview the HTML code of the email as it will be sent. * **Text**. Allows you to access its text format. * **Send a test email.** Useful to check if the layout is the one you want. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/pZe5Zp6M7H0AHPr59hLD/64225583%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) # Pages - Managing Static Content PrestaShop enables you to create content pages as easily as you would create product pages. You can add static pages in the top menu using the "Main menu" module (which you can configure from the "Modules" page), or anywhere with the "Link Widget" module. If you have been using PrestaShop previous versions, pages and static content are what we used to call CMS (Content Management System). This page presents you all the content pages that were previously created on your shop, for the currently selected page category (by default, the home page is the only category). ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/tNJyV20jZZsLKLGmXMcZ/46170138%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) Do not forget to translate each page for each of your supported languages! As usual, click on the language selector for each field in order to change the language. ## Creating a new page category Click the "Add new page category" button to create a page category – actually, a sub-category of the root category, "Home". You can create as many categories as needed. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/iCqaGyNK7YnRp6JCc5oa/57082049%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) The form is quite basic: * **Name**. Make sure to use a short and straightforward word. * **Displayed**. Whether the category and its pages are available to the public, or hidden. * **Parent category**. The category under which this category is placed. By default, "Home". You can have an unlimited number of levels of sub-categories. * **Description**. Do fill this field in all languages, as some theme can display that information to customers. * **Meta title**. The name of the category, as displayed in the browser. * **Meta description**. Used to describe the content of this category for search engines. * **Meta keywords**. Used by search engines to understand what type of information the category is composed of. * **Friendly URL**. Makes it easier for search engines to index your content, and for visitors to understand what they will find in the category. This field is automatically filled as you enter the category name, but you can still edit it manually.\
When you save the category, PrestaShop takes you back to the tables, this time using the newly created category as its base. Therefore, you will not see any sub-category or sub-pages in here unless you create some. In order to go back to the root category, click on "Home" at the top left side. You can then edit each page from the root category and move them into your newly created category if you feel like it, or create a new page to go with your new category. In order to create sub-categories, simply change the "Parent category" option from "Home" to the wanted parent category for the category you are creating. ## Creating a new page *New since PrestaShop 1.7.6!* You can now benefit from the dynamic preview of your search engine results. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/VHTWQtRBe6sIQ6qHXmCy/64225645.gif) Click the "Add new page" button to reach the page creation form: * **Page Category**. The default category is the home-page of your shop. If you want to have this page in another category, you must first have created it. * **Title.** For SEO purposes, you need to add a title tag value. * **SEO preview.** You can now get a real-time preview of your search engine result to help you see how your page would be displayed. * **Meta title**. The name of the page, as displayed in the browser. * **Meta description**. Used to describe the content of this page for search engines. * **Meta Keywords**. Used by search engines to understand what types of information the page is composed of. * **Friendly URL**. Makes it easier for search engines to index your content, and for visitors to understand what they will find in the category. This field is automatically filled as you enter the page name, but you can still edit it manually. * **Page content**. This is the main content of your page. In this WYSIWYG editor, you can put as much text as necessary, even images or videos using the "Insert image" or "Insert video". * **Indexation by search engines**. Indicates whether search engines should register this page or not. * **Displayed**. You can choose to have your page public only once you are done proofreading it and keep it as a draft for the moment. A draft is invisible to the public.\
Once all the fields are filled out, click "Save." If activated, you can then view the result directly on your online shop. # Positions * [Front office Positions](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/customizing-store-design/positions#Positions-FrontofficePositions) * [Moving a module within a hook](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/customizing-store-design/positions#Positions-Movingamodulewithinahook) * [Attaching a module to a hook: Transplanting](https://docs.prestashop-project.org/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/customizing-store-design/pages/-MD-zRvQyEvKWDO4gtoJ#Positions-Attachingamoduletoahook:Transplanting) * [Editing an attached module](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/customizing-store-design/positions#Positions-Editinganattachedmodule) * [Removing a module from a hook](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/customizing-store-design/positions#Positions-Removingamodulefromahook) * [Transplanting a module by modifying its code](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/customizing-store-design/positions#Positions-Transplantingamodulebymodifyingitscode) * [Widgets](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/customizing-store-design/positions#Positions-Widgets) A module can have two views: one on the back office (its options, or even a configuration screen), and one on the front office. The front office view is how and where the module is displayed within your shop's theme. The position of a module in your theme can be changed, because you might want one module's block to be placed much higher (or lower) in the page that others. In PrestaShop's parlance, this is called "transplanting", and is done using the tool available in the "Positions" page, under the "Design" menu. In effect, this enables you to attach a module to one of the many available hooks in the current theme, without writing any code. The "Positions" page displays all the available hooks and their attached modules. Many are empty by default, but some of the most useful ones can have a dozen of modules. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/9zbe0k09Klvb0YN8TKSw/64225563.png) At the top of the page, a drop-down menu enables you to only display the module in which you are interested. Alternatively, you can also search for a specific hook. By default, this page only displays the hooks on which you can position functions. Checking the "Display non-positionable hooks" box below displays all the hooks, even the invisible ones, that are linked to an action for an instance. The header of the table for each hook displays the hook's name, a quick description (when available), and its number of attached modules. The table lists the modules that are attached to that hook. The modules are displayed in the order in which they appear in the hook. ## Moving a module within a hook You have two ways of changing a module's position within a hook: * Click the up or down arrow. The page will reload and display the new order. * Drag and drop the module's row itself: 1. Place the mouse cursor on the position number to have it change into a "move item" cursor. 2. Click and hold while moving the cursor over the row/position where you want the module to be: the module's row changes position accordingly. 3. Release the mouse button: the current position for the module is saved. For most modules, transplantation can easily be done directly via the back office. Some modules require you to alter their code in order to transplant them. ## Attaching a module to a hook: Transplanting In PrestaShop, "transplanting" is the action of attaching a module to a hook. You can add a module to more than one hook. Two things to know before transplanting a module: * Some modules are written to only be attached to a given set of hooks. * Some hooks are written to not accept some specific kinds of modules. Therefore, be aware that you cannot always transplant any module to any hook. Make sure to disable the cache when testing the effect of a new module on the front-end. You can do this in the "Performance" page, under the "Advanced Parameters" menu. The transplanting process has its own interface: 1. Go to the "Design" menu, and its "Positions" page. 2. Click the "Transplant a module" button at the top right. The transplanting interface appears. 3. In the "Module" drop-down list, select the module you want to transplant. 4. In the "Transplant to" drop-down list, select where you want to transplant the module to. There are many hooks available. You can change your settings later if needed. 5. In the "Exceptions" field, type the name of the file(s) of the pages in which you do not want the module to appear.\ You can perform multiple selections simply by clicking on the file names while keeping the Ctrl key pressed. You can deselect files in the same manner: Ctrl+click. 6. Do not forget to save your changes.\
![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/qqMDeCDN0fxraT4BG2ah/51839907%20\(4\).png) The "Transplant to" drop-down menu gives you a good idea where modules can be placed. Even though the "Transplant to" drop-down list gives a comprehensive overview of the available hooks, it might not always be clear which is the one to which you want to attach your module. Do not hesitate to try another hook if the result of your selection if not what you expect. The list gives some details: some hook have a description after the hook's name, for instance, "Add fields to the form 'attribute value'" for `displayAttributeForm`. Peruse them all in order to choose your hook correctly. ## Editing an attached module Each module has an action button on the right side of its row, with two possible options: one to edit its settings, the other one to delete the module. Editing a module's setting uses the same interface as the one used for transplanting a module. The only difference is that you cannot change the "Module" field, as it is disabled, and thus grayed out. You can edit both the "Transplant to" setting and the exceptions, which works just as described in the "Attaching a module to a hook" method above. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/wOBPA02Fnsb2XJ62Gcnj/64225504%20\(4\)%20\(5\).png) Always check your front office to make sure the module is indeed where you intended it to be. ## Removing a module from a hook There are two ways to remove a module from a hook: * Removing a single module: click the trashcan icon on the right of the module's row. * Removing a batch of modules: select the modules by checking the box on the left of their row, and then click the "Unhook the selection" button, found at the top and the bottom of the list of hooks. ## Transplanting a module by modifying its code This is for experts only: you must have a good knowledge of PHP and HTML before attempting anything with the code of a module. Some modules cannot be transplanted into other sections of the front office simply because they lack the necessary code. For example, some modules contains templates for both column display and header display, whereas others have one template file which only works with the header section. If you want to display simple modules in a position for which it was not built, you will have to edit its template files. More complex modules can also be made to be displayed in other sections of the page, but they might have to be partly rewritten in order to have their design work with that new location. To customize the transplantation ability of a module, you must give it the correct PHP function for the new target hook. For example, for a module that has this function: ``` function hookTop($params) { ... } ``` In order to transplant its block into the right column, for instance, you need to add the `hookRightColumn()` function: ``` function hookRightColumn($params) { ... } ``` Afterward, you must write the code that displays the content on the front page. At best, that means copy/pasting the content of the `hookTop()` function; at worst, you need to rework the content of `hookTop()` function into something that will work for the new location. ## Widgets PrestaShop 1.7 has introduced a new system to hook modules: widgets. Thanks to widgets, a module can be used and transplanted to any display hook. Widgets work with 1.7 modules only (for PrestaShop modules, their technical names start with "ps\_"), and cannot be used on all the modules. Read more about widgets here: [https://devdocs.prestashop.com/1.7/modules/concepts/widgets](https://devdocs.prestashop.com/1.7/modules/concepts/widgets/) # Image Settings The "Images settings" page enables you to configure the various image sizes that your customers will see in your shop. By default, all images settings are already installed in your store. Do not delete them, you will need it! When you upload an image on PrestaShop, PrestaShop automatically generates various sizes of this image, including thumbnails and other smaller versions of your image. Therefore, you only have to upload one "master" version of your image, big enough to be resized into all the images sizes. If you want to make sure your image is correctly resized, you should upload an image that fits the size ratio of the various image sizes. If your uploaded image does not have the same width-to-height ratio than the settings in place, you are taking the risk to see whitespace on the resized image. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/pwOdAYEz7zi6Kk975UCL/64225495%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) You can enable image size for specific types of content, directly in the image sizes list. When you add a new theme to your store, the theme will add itself the image sizes it needed. By default, the page displays image sizes from the default Classic theme. ## Add New Images Type You can easily add a new image size, and even set to which type of content it applies. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/Uw8r2QxtE3NQxj93n42B/51839910%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) Click the "Add new image type" button, then: 1. Type the size's name, width, and height. 2. Choose to which type of content it applies. 3. Save. ## Images preferences ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/LsOOselOE4N7Jir6T827/38469761%20\(4\).png) * **Image format**. You have the choice between two of the major file formats: JPEG and PNG. Both are well established among browsers. JPEG has a good compression ratio but can result in visible artifacts. PNG's compression algorithm is not as good as JPEG's, but there are comparatively fewer visible artifacts; nonetheless, older browsers might not recognize this format.\ Choosing between one and the other is often a matter of taste. That being said, JPEG remains the recommended choice. If you would rather prevent information loss because of a format change, choose the second option, "Use PNG only if the base image is in PNG format". * **JPEG compression**. Do not choose anything below 80 or at worst 75, for fear of visible compression artifacts. * **PNG compression**. Do not choose anything over 6 or at worst 7, for fear of visible compression artifacts. * **Generate images based on one side of the source image**. This feature allows you to position the product image in its pre-established space: * Choose "*Height*" in order to fill the frame height (the width is then recalculated to maintain the same height/width ratio as in the file of origin). * Choose "*Width*" so that the image fills the width of the frame (the height is then recalculated to maintain the same proportion). * Choose "*Automatic*" so that the width and height are calculated to maximize the space it can occupy in the frame. * **Maximum file size of product customization pictures**. Your customers can upload pictures for customized products. By default, PrestaShop sets this value to the PHP maximum setting – this can mean several megabytes: for instance, 8,388,608 bytes means 8 Mb. You can expand this value if necessary, but make sure that your PHP installation is able to take file uploads of this size. * **Product picture width**. By default, customers can upload image with a maximum width of 64 pixels. * **Product picture height**. By default, customers can upload image with a maximum height of 64 pixels. * **Generate high-resolution images**. The most recent screens with high pixel density (Retina and similar technologies) require high-resolution images. You can enable this feature to make sure your images will display correctly on this kind of screens. It will generate a new file for each of your images, with a resolution twice higher. This will double your number of image files, so use it wisely if you have limited storage space. ## Regenerate Thumbnails You may be dissatisfied with your shop's current thumbnails size. This section makes it possible for you to regenerate them all – or only those for a specific type of content: ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/yEJ8MvcGfli1ORuA6hLI/46170135%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) 1. Change the image size settings in the table at the top of the "Images" preference page. 2. Select which content's images should be regenerated. 3. Indicate whether the previous thumbnails should be kept or not. 4. Click "Regenerate thumbnails". Manually-uploaded thumbnails will be erased and replaced by automatically-generated thumbnails. # Link Widget This page is tied to the module "Link list", which allows you to manage the various links and blocks of links available on your shop. It works with blocks that are attached to hooks and provide links to your static pages (from the "Pages" section). This page is closely related to hooks, so it is recommended to be at ease with hooks before attempting any modification. ![(smile)](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/vj6f0HYtv01ftqbb7n6M/smile%20\(6\)%20\(6\).svg) By default, and if you are still using the default theme Classic, you have one block for the footer: ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/voR4Stm3zxbJwPTQLBTE/64225498%20\(2\).png) There are two child blocks in the footer block, "Products" and "Our company" and they represent to the first two columns of links displayed in the footer of your shop. The block names are the titles of these two columns. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/B4DcS4l4xh3WzgwxEkFP/51839456%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) ## Managing blocks Within a parent block, several actions are possible * **Sort blocks**. You can change the position of a block: simply drag and drop its row. * **Edit a block**. If you click "Edit", a new screen will open and you will see which page links are active for each block (selected with a tick), and where it is hooked. * **Delete a block**. The action button at the right of a row allows you to also delete a block. ## Creating a new block If you need a new set of links within your shop, click "New block" to create a block. It will open a creation form which you should fill out. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/SApuGrWqrT3zbhRyuwfx/64225499%20\(3\)%20\(1\).png) * **Name of the link block**. This is the title of your link block, as it will appear on your shop. Make it simple and clear. * **Hook**. Select to which hook the block should be transplanted. All the available hooks are displayed. * **Page links**. Below are different sections with all the available pages for which you can create links. Select each page individually, or select a group of pages by ticking the checkbox at the top of the section (next to "Name"). By default there are three existing sections: * *Content pages - Home.* All the pages existing under the page category home. * *Product pages.* Pages displaying new products or discounted products. * *Static content.* The static content pages linked to your theme. If you have other page categories, they will be displayed accordingly, with the pages they contain. * **Custom content.** You can even add a custom link, just fill the following fields:
* *Title.* Add here the title of the link you want to display. * *URL.* Add here the URL of the link you want to display. When you are done with your page selection, click "Save". A new block will appear on the main page. # Managing Shipping ## Managing Shipping How you choose to ship your products is a key element to the management and success of your store. You must account for the great variety of available methods, which can mix carriers, regional and international taxes, package weight and the price of a product itself. Luckily, PrestaShop makes it easy for you to handle it all in just a few screens. A product's shipping price is basically calculated using either of two methods: the total price of the order, or the total weight of the order. This is how most carriers calculate their shipping fees, and this is why you should fill-in the weight setting when creating a product in the catalog, and also why you absolutely must indicate the per-weight and per-price costs for each carrier in the "Carriers" page. PrestaShop computes shipping price according to a system of either weight ranges or price ranges. That system can only work for one or the other of these types of range. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/yFf5JS9FKqfTqNeUDqeJ/51839913%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) The shipping settings work closely with the local settings of your PrestaShop installation, thanks to the "International" menu. With pages like "Localization" and Locations", you will be able to edit geographical zones, countries, currencies, etc. Therefore, make sure to have a serious look at the "International" menu, which is explained in the chapter "Going International". For instance, in order to create a complete carrier in PrestaShop, you must have clearly defined your geographical zones before; this is done in the "Zones" tab under the "Location" page. This chapter contains the following sections: * [Carriers](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/managing-shipping/carriers) * [Shipping Preferences](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/managing-shipping/shipping-preferences) # Carriers You must have carriers added to your PrestaShop installation – that is, a clear indicator of who will deliver your products. It might be just yourself or your shop (for instance if you are selling downloadable products, or only work locally), but as soon as you are actually sending packages using stamps and a 3rd-party delivery such as your local postal service, or FedEx, UPS and such, then you must have their details added to your shop's database. This will enable your customers to better choose which carrier to use, based on their delivery ranges, fees, and dates. The "Carriers" page presents you with a list of all your current carriers. From there, you can directly change their status, indicate why shipping is free or not, and change their position when presented to customers. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/IsXLSsUKsZDxa0s31H3f/51839919%20\(4\)%20\(2\).png) By default, you have two carriers in your database: * Your own shop: This represents your physical store, where customers can supposedly come and pick up their products themselves. It has no price range or weight range set. * "My carrier": This is a sample carrier and should not be used in production. It has one price range (from $0 to $10,000) and one weight range (from 0 kg to 10,000 kg). It is up to you to remove these default carriers and add new ones for your customers. At the very least, you should edit the "My carrier" carrier and replace its data with that of a real carrier: name, details, and ranges. We do recommend that you delete the "My carrier" carrier, and that you use an existing carrier module in order to register your shipping partner. Video - 6 tips for creating a delivery policy that attracts customers and builds loyalty [![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/efajzymsMNiAPvXoZDHD/51839792%20\(7\)%20\(7\).png)](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=QhTU_eSrm7o\&list=PLyZYn1MMU7-xT-L_zUyGnRBJmAuP6uc-c\&index=26) ## Adding a new carrier using the Carrier Wizard If you cannot find a module for your shipping partner in the native modules, then you should register your carrier yourself using the Carrier Wizard: click on "Add new carrier" to open this tool. In this section, we are going to create a complete carrier, from A to Z, using the Carrier Wizard. You can create as many carriers as you wish.\ If one carrier has different shipping services, you should create a carriers for each of your needs, and differentiate them with their names: Many of the details asked in the software forms should be provided by your carriers once you have set up an account or are under contract with them directly. Check with them in order to make sure everything is configured correctly. To create a new carrier, click on the "Add new" button in the "Carriers" page. This will open the Carrier Wizard on the first of its four panels. ### Panel 1: General settings This is where you describe the carrier, giving information that the customer will need in order to recognize and choose the carrier she/he prefers. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/irrdVn7oeRos2cAzhGFx/51839920%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) Let's examine all of the information you need to enter: * **Carrier name**. The name is public, so you should use the official name. If you have created onen carrier per shipping service from a single carrier, the name will help you differentiate them. \ You could also add a description of the service. For instance, you could fill in "PrestaShipping – 500 lbs and over". * **Transit time**. The estimated time it takes this carrier to deliver your products, is written in plain language. This is displayed to customers during checkout. It will help them select their carrier according to the amount of time they are willing to wait to receive their shipment. Customers can often accept to pay more for a faster carrier.\ You must fill this field in all the available languages, especially the default one. * **Speed grade**. Since the "Transit time" field can contain any text, it cannot be used to compare the carriers' transit times. The "Speed grade" setting enables you to give the carrier a grade, from 0 (very slow) to 9 (very fast). This is then used to sort carriers by their speed grade and help customers choose the one they prefer. * **Logo**. Having a logo helps customers choose between different carriers more easily. Your image will be automatically resized to fit on the checkout page.\ The logo will appear in each panel of the Carrier Wizard, as a reminder of which carrier you are editing/creating. * **Tracking URL**. This field must be filled with the tracking URL provided by your carrier (if there exists one). Indicate "@" where the tracking number will appear. For example, France's postal service (La Poste) offers this URL: [`http://www.colissimo.fr/portail_colissimo/suivreResultat.do?parcelnumber=@`](http://www.colissimo.fr/portail_colissimo/suivreResultat.do?parcelnumber=@). When customers finish their purchase, they will receive that URL with the "@" replaced by the tracking number provided by the carrier, making it possible to click that link and see where the delivery process is at. Click "Next" to reach the second panel. ### Panel 2: Shipping locations and costs ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/Bo20QieUVIomua4cACi0/51839921%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) First, this panel presents a handful of settings: * **Add handling costs**. Include or exclude shipping & handling costs in this carrier's price, as set in the "Preferences" page ("Handling charges"). * **Free shipping**. If enabled, you will not be able to indicate shipping prices.\ If disabled, you will be able to edit the ranges and per-country costs in the form below. * **Billing**. When billing the customer, PrestaShop software can apply one of two behaviors, which you have to set depending on how your carrier handles billing (so make sure to check their documentation about this):
* **According to total price**. Billing depends on the total price of the order. * **According to total weight**. Billing depends on the total weight of the order. * **Tax**. Indicates if this carrier requires a local tax in order to deliver, and if so, which one. The tax must already exist in the software (which can be done in the "Taxes" page of the "International" menu). * **Out-of-range behavior**. In case the chosen carrier has not set any shipping cost for the required zone or weight, you can indicate how the software should react. You have two options: * **Apply the cost of the highest defined range**. This will take the most costly range and apply its conditions. * **Disable carrier**. This carrier will not be suggested, since it probably cannot deliver this order. Then comes the important part: the creation of the carrier's range. This is a very important step, as the software needs this information to present the customer with carriers that can actually deliver the ordered package. Indeed, depending on the order's total price or total weight, some carrier options will not be available while others will only appear at a certain value. You must be very precise when filling in these values, and preferably those suggested by each carrier's documentation. This is where the whole Carrier Wizard takes its name. Here, you will build your carrier's price or weight ranges (depending on your choice for the "Billing" option above), one range after the other, applying your prices for each zone along the way. Zones must have been defined beforehand. For this, go to the "Locations" page in the "International" menu. For each range, you only need a couple of steps: 1. **Fix the lower and upper limits of the range you are creating**. Depending on the "Billing" choice, it will display either "Will be applied when the price is" or "Will be applied when the weight is" for the lower limit, and either "Will be applied when the price is" or "Will be applied when the weight is" for the upper limit. Note that the lower limit is inclusive (>=) whereas the upper limit is exclusive (<). This means that a range's upper limit can have the same value as the next range's lower value, as the two will not overlap. 2. **Fill in the prices**. As soon as both lower and upper limits are filled, the "All" field can be edited. This is a special field: any value you enter in it will be copied into the field for all the available geographical zones, without any action on your part. To edit it, tick the checkbox then enter your value. You can then edit the values of each zone field separately.\ Check the checkbox for each zone the carrier delivers to at this range. If this carrier does not make deliveries in a given geographical zone for this current range, make sure to uncheck its checkbox. 3. **Create the range**. To create another range, click the "Add new range" button. This will add a new column of zone fields. Start again by fixing the lower and upper limits of this range, then filling the prices per zone. The weight and price units are the default ones automatically set during software installation, and the ones your products use. You can change these units in the "Localization" page of the "International" menu. Click "Next" to reach the third panel. ### Panel 3: Size, weight and group access ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/8WJyZtXii6WlMJg0Roqd/51839922%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) This panel presents two sets of options: * **Maximum package height/width/depth/weight**. You can now indicate the minimum and maximum package height and weight, which are an essential part of choosing a package carrier. The value is to use the default weight and dimension units, as set in the "Localization" page of the "International" menu. * **Group access**. You might want only some user groups to be able to use a carrier. This option serves this purpose. Click "Next" to reach the fourth and final panel. ### Panel 4: Summary ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/iranJZbv4zUeYM1GCLy2/51839923%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) This last panel gives you an overview of your settings for this carrier. If some settings are wrong, you can go back to any previous panel by either using the "Previous" button or directly clicking on the panel's tab. \ If you want to save this carrier as a draft for now, then come back to it later, disable the carrier using the "Enabled" option at the bottom of this final panel. \ Either way, click on the "Finish" button to save your work, and create the carrier. When using multistore mode, another panel is available, and the panel order changes slightly: 1. General settings 2. **MultiStore** 3. Shipping locations and costs 4. Size, weight, and group access 5. Summary All the panels are as described above. The new one, "MultiStore", makes it possible for you to limit this carrier to a selection of your stores. # Shipping Preferences The more general settings of your shop's shipping configuration are found in the "Preferences" page, under the "Shipping" menu. This page provides handling charges settings: ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/Qud3EWheT7Ow6xrxkBWY/64225548%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) * **Handling charges**. Enter the per-order handling expenses, which will be added to the final purchase price. This is separate from your shipping costs: it is really the cost of you or your employee having to fetch the products, package them and have them shipped. If there is no such cost, leave it at 0. * **Free shipping starts at**. Enter the *price* and/or *weight* after which your customers will receive free shipping. For instance, you might choose to offer free shipping when the order exceeds $250. A message will appear to your customers indicating how much more money they need to spend in order to receive free shipping. If you do not want to offer free shipping and you do not want this message to appear, leave these values at 0. The "Carrier options" section gives you access to 3 settings, which impact the front office in order to help the customer make a choice: ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/qJioSd5ps9lLKQiCL8a6/64225549.png) * **Default carrier**. If you have more than one carrier in your system, you might want to promote one to your customers. Besides the carriers themselves, this drop-down list has two contextual options: * *Best price.* Depending on the amount of the order, on its weight and its delivery zone, PrestaShop will choose the cheapest price for the customer. * *Best grade.* Speed grades make it easier to identify the fasted carriers. PrestaShop will display the carrier which, within the context of the order, will have the shortest shipping delay. * **Sort by**. When customers are presented with a choice of carriers, you can choose to either sort the list by shipping price or by their position, as set in the carrier list on the "Carriers" page. * **Order by**. This enables to set the order in which the carriers are sorted: * If sorted by shipping fee and with an ascending order, then carriers will be displayed from the cheapest to the most expensive. * If sorted by position and with a descending order, then carriers will be displayed from the top position of the list, to the bottom position. # Managing Payments ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/7ZUuAmROlLSCgHEGA0BL/51839930%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png)With PrestaShop, you can accept your customer's transactions using several different payment methods, such as checks, bank wire, cash on delivery, and through several partner modules such as PayPal, Moneybookers, HiPay, etc. The "Payment" menu is where you should head is you want to change anything regarding your payments. This chapter contains the following sections: * [Payment Methods](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/managing-payments/payment-methods) * [Payment Preferences](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/managing-payments/payment-preferences) # Payment Methods The "Payment Methods" page is pretty straightforward, with two sections. **Active payment**. The payment methods currently enabled on your shop. An action button allows you to manage the modules, with the same options that the ones available on the Modules page. **Recommended payment gateways**. Depending on your location and shop settings, PrestaShop will show you the available payment methods for your country or the markets you are targeting. You can then choose to add payment methods that are relevant to your customers' expectations. Some modules can be installed for free, while others are paying. In that case, you will be redirected to Addons, to buy the module, before you can install it. ## Installing a Payment Module Installing a payment module is fundamentally no different from installing a regular module: simply click the "Install" button, and all that is left to do is to configure the module.\ You should pay a lot of attention to the settings, and make sure they do point to your address or bank account. Configuring payment modules often means you must first be known by the payment service provider, meaning having an account on their service. Video - 4 ways to improve conversion with payments [![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/wBpI6hY9GOK2woIiclUH/51839799%20\(7\)%20\(7\).png)](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=i_wwnGt7JKM\&list=PLyZYn1MMU7-xT-L_zUyGnRBJmAuP6uc-c\&index=19) # Payment Preferences The payment preferences are meant to help you decide which payment method should be available to your customers depending on the currency, the country, the group or the carrier. Do pay attention to this page if you want no suprises! ## Payment module restrictions on currencies Depending upon the payment, the customer's choice of currency can differ. You can limit the choice of available payment methods depending on the available currencies: you may want customers to be able to pay with any currency when using PayPal, but those paying through Moneybookers should only pay using dollars, for instance. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/5ZlD9T45rNr86FCAGcma/64225552.png) By default, only your shop's default currency is available. If you need more, follow this process: 1. In the "Localization" page under the "International" menu, import the localization pack for the country which has the currency in which you are interested. For instance, USA for US Dollars, United Kingdom for UK Pound, etc. 2. In the "Currencies" page under the "Localization" menu, enabled the currencies you just imported. If you need to restrict payment module usage according to the user's currency, simply check the boxes that apply and click on the "Save restrictions". Note that currency restrictions work in different ways depending on the payment module: * For some, such as Cash on delivery, you cannot change their default setting. * For others, such as Wire payment, Check Payment, Skrill, Ogone, etc., you can change any of their currency settings, except for the "Customer currency" and "Shop default currency", which stay at their default state. * Then, for other modules such as Hipay or PayPal, you can change any of their currency settings, but you can choose only one option between "Customer currency" and "Shop default currency", not both. The customer can set his or her currency using the drop-down menu at the top of each front office page. You can set the shop's default currency in the "Localization" page, under the "International" menu. If you change the default currency after having configured some first products, you will have to reset the price of all these products. You should set the default currency once and for all before adding any product. ## Payment module restrictions on groups You can limit the choice of available payment methods depending on the group of customers: you can have a set number of customer groups where people can have access to more payment methods than regular customers. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/iKRAjWF41YdUzaJqhT9E/64225553%20\(2\).png) For instance, you could choose to have regular customers pay with PayPal, Skrill, and Hipay, while professionals would only be able to pay by bank wire. Depending on the type of customers and on your choices, customers will only pay using the methods that match with your decisions. ## Payment module restrictions on countries You can limit the choice of payment methods according to your customer's country of origin. For instance, you could choose to accept all payment methods for customers from France, Spain and Germany, while customers from Italy, the United Kingdom and Switzerland would only be able to pay by bank wire. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/Qc7U91P6YseAN9dTjQvd/64225554%20\(3\).png) The table lists all the known countries. If one is missing, you can add it using the "Countries" page, under the "Zones" menu. Here again, just as with currency limitations, the available options vary depending on the payment module: * For some, the only option is your own country. * For others, the only options are the set of countries supported by the service: Austria, Belgium, France, etc. * All the others native payment modules should work with all countries. Find the country you are looking for in the alphabetical list, and check the boxes to select or unselect the payment methods you want to make available to customers from that country. Once all of your settings have been configured, click on the "Save restrictions" button, found at the bottom of the table. By default, all installed payment methods are enabled for the shop's country. ## Payment module restrictions on carriers You can limit the choice of available payment methods depending on your carriers. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/Qc7U91P6YseAN9dTjQvd/64225554%20\(3\).png) # Going International As obvious as it might seem, this is the Internet, and people from all over the world will certainly visit your shop, and order your products. As a shop owner, you must cater for as many customers as possible. This means having your website fully translated in as many languages as necessary, with local taxes, weights and currency units, local geographical zones, etc. This chapter contains the following sections: * [Localization](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/going-international/localization) * [Locations](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/going-international/locations) * [Managing Taxes](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/going-international/managing-taxes) * [Translations](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/going-international/translations) # Localization **Localization is the adaptation of software content from one specific language or culture into another one.** This means that components specific to locales (such as languages, currencies, or units of measurement) are entirely adapted and translated in your store, providing customers with a localized store that best fits their needs. This localization section is about making sure your shop is adapted to your target markets. If you are targeting a specific country, you need to support its language, its currency, etc. * [Localization settings](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/going-international/localization/localization-settings) * [Languages](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/going-international/localization/languages) * [Currencies](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/going-international/localization/currencies) * [Geolocation](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/going-international/localization/geolocation) # Localization settings The main page under the "Localization" menu enables you to configure the units used for your products. ## Import a localization pack This section provides you with an extensive list of existing localization packs which you can import. Not only does it set your PrestaShop install with your proper local units, but it also adds many other data: * **States**. When shipping product to a country, knowing which state it is sent to can prove important, as this might have an impact on local customs and taxes. The added states can be viewed and edited in the "States" page under the "Locations" menu. * **Taxes**. The real importance of localization is local taxes, and they can be numerous and varied depending on the country or the state. PrestaShop provides you with a basic support for the major taxes and tax rules. The added taxes and tax rules can be viewed and edited in the "Tax" and "Tax rules" pages under the "Taxes" menu. * **Currencies**. Foreign customers will appreciate being able to convert the prices in your shop into their own currency. You should at least have US dollars and Euros available along of your country's own currency (if not one of those two). Once added, you must activate a new currency using the "Currencies" page under the "Localization" menu, and make sure the conversion rate is correct. The added currencies can be viewed and edited in that "Currencies" page. Make sure you also set your payment methods regarding these new currencies. * **Languages**. All the public fields on your shop can be created in multiple languages, and it is important you do so for your products name and description, at the very least. Note that importing a language also imports its date format (d/m/Y, m/d/Y, d.m.Y, etc.), among other things. The added languages can be viewed and edited in the "Languages" page under the "Localization" menu. You can add a single language, without the currency, taxes and other data depending on the country, thanks to the "Translations" page. * **Units**. Weight, dimension, volume, distance: these units are essential in order to correctly describe a product to your customer, and for your own packaging information. They can be viewed and edited on this very page, in the "Local units" section. * **Change the behavior of the taxes displayed to the groups**. This is not data to import but a setting that you can change when doing the importation. It will replace the price display method for your customer groups (e.g. displaying price with tax included or not according to each customer group, as found in Shop Parameters > Customer Settings > Groups, when editing or creating a group) and activate instead the tax behavior generally applying in the country, for all groups and all countries. For example, if you are importing the localization pack for the United States and you select this option, the prices will be displayed tax excluded. You should select this option only if you are importing a localization pack for the default country of your shop, as it could change the tax display methods for all groups and all countries. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/L0KfsY1DUoXOkdjHYa9A/64225597%20\(2\).png) As you can see, these additional data are optional: you can choose to import the currency and language for a given country, and not its taxes, for instance. While you should not add too many local data for fear of overwhelming both yourself and your customers with it, it may be useful to import the localization pack for your most visited countries (according to your stats). Apart from the default units, **you cannot automatically remove all the data for a given country**; if you need to remove data, you will have to do so manually, in their respective pages under the "Localization" menu. ## Configuration This section groups four default local settings, of prime importance: * **Default language**. This is the main language for your shop. This setting will influence your back office's language (including the main language for your products), as well as the front office. Note that the front office's language might adapt to the setting of the customer's browser. * **Default country**. The location of your business. If you have headquarters in many countries, use your main or original country. * **Default currency**. The currency in which your product's prices are first set. Currencies are added by importing and activating a country's currency. Note that if you change currency after having already set a few product prices, you will have to manually update all the existing prices. Make sure to set that value once and for all. * **Time zone**. You own time zone. This is useful for daily discount for instance: you know exactly when it starts and ends. The "Default language" and "Default country" settings each have an additional setting: * For "*Default language*": **Set language from browser**. PrestaShop will set the store's language depending on the language of the visitor's browser's locale code (for instance: fr\_CA gives French) * For "*Default country*": **Set default country from browser language**. PrestaShop will set the store's country depending on the territory of the visitor's browser's locale code (for instance, fr\_CA gives Canada). ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/OxeoN5I18GdaToQPW17H/64225598%20\(3\)%20\(1\).png) ## Local units The physical units presented in this section (weight, distance, volume, dimension) are used both in your product sheets and for your own packaging needs – and ultimately, is essential in your relationship with your carrier. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/axSpq0VWhmTAlKOwzi8s/64225599%20\(4\).png) These values can be set when you import the localization package for a country, but you can edit manually them afterwards. For instance, if you would rather have centiliters instead of liters for the volume unit, change the default "L" to "cL". The values should be unit symbols from the International System of Units: . ## Advanced This last section asks you to set your server's local language and country, as ISO code: * For the language: ISO 639-1 code (). * For the country: ISO 3166-1 Alpha 2 code ().\
![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/mj6YQDoEpY8LG6MN3eA8/64225600%20\(4\)%20\(2\).png) These values can be set when you import the localization package for a country, but you can edit them manually at any time. # Languages PrestaShop comes multilingual out of the box: there is one default language (the one you used to install it), and many more are available to download. Take part in PrestaShop translations If PrestaShop is not fully translated in your language, you can help to translate it by joining our open community of translators on [Crowdin](https://crowdin.com/project/prestashop-official) and contribute in your language! The "Languages" page manages the languages you will see in your administration panel and your shop. The page displays the languages already installed in your shop, along with some information: ISO code, language code, date format (short and full). You can enable or disable a language by clicking on the icon in the "Enabled" column. Adding a new language is simply a question of importing the localization pack from a country which uses that language (in the "Localization" page). If it turns out this does not work, or that you need something customized, you can add a new language manually, using the form behind the "Add new" button. You can also add a new language from the "Translations" page, "Add / Update a language" section. Contrary to a localization pack, this will only import the language, and no localization settings (units, currency, etc.). ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/Pdcdy26EDHFmBIz8NLle/64225603%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) ## Adding a new language Before creating a new language, you should check if this language is available in the "Translations" page in "Add/Update a language section". Indeed, even if it isn't fully completed, it will import official PrestaShop translations and will provide a basis for your translation work. Creating a new language means you will have to translate all of the text for PrestaShop's front office, back office, modules, etc., or risk using the default English strings. To complete its translation, you should use the "Modify translations" option in the "Translations" page, under the "International" menu. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/guGyNX4NMba4vvVsS2bw/64225604%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) In order to create a new language, you must fill as many of the form's field as possible: * **Name**. The name is public. If you are creating that language for a regional purpose, you may indicate that in the name: "French (Quebec)", for instance. * **ISO code**. Enter the adequate 2-letter ISO 639-1 code. See for more information.\ If you are importing a language pack, this code should exactly match the one of the pack. * **Language code**. Enter the adequate 4-letter language code, in the form `xx-yy`, `xx` being the language ISO code (same as above), and `yy` the country ISO code, using ISO 3166-1 alpha-2 (). See for more information. * **Date format**. Countries do not always share the same date representation (See ). Hence, when your shop displays 02/08/12, a customer from France will understand "August 2nd, 2012" whereas one from the US will understand "February 8th, 2012" – and a customer from Japan might even read it as "August 12th, 2002". This is why it is important to indicate the date format tied to your language. The letters used should be that of PHP's `date()` function: . * **Date format (full)**. Same as the date format above, but including the hour-minute format. * **Flag**. Upload an image of the flag which best matches the language you want to add. It should be 16\*11 pixels. You recommend you use the free FamFamFam Flags image set: . * **"No-picture" image**. Upload an image which will be displayed when a product does not yet have a picture. That image is simply a blank image, with "No image" or "No image available" in this language. The picture should be 250\*250 pixels. You can find existing "No-picture" images in the `/img/l` directory of your PrestaShop installation. * **RTL language**. Some languages are written from right to left, most notably those using Arabic script or the Hebrew alphabet (). When a PrestaShop theme is well-coded, it can handle RTL languages - provided it is set as such. * **Status**. You may disable a new language until you are ready to translate everything. * **Shop association**. You can make the language only available to a selection of your shops, for instance, shops that target a specific locale. Once your language is saved and enabled, you can import its language pack. This is done in the "Translations" page, under the "Localization" menu. Use the "Import a language pack manually" tool. Finally, make sure everything works: go to your shop's front office and click on the flags at the top. Similarly, customers can now select an additional language by using these icons. Sharing your translations with the community You might have fully translated a new language directly through your PrestaShop interface. You can share it with the PrestaShop community by sending an export to We will upload your contribution to our [translation project](https://crowdin.com/project/prestashop-official) so that other merchants from your country can also benefit from it! To see how you can export your translations, go to the "Translations" page of the "International" menu, in the "Export a language" section. # Currencies PrestaShop supports a large number of currencies. By default, only one currency is registered for your store, i.e. the currency of your store’s default country. However, you can add and configure new currencies to better meet your customers’ needs. Indeed, customers will appreciate being able to shop in their own currency! ![](https://lh5.googleusercontent.com/iiCDXDmk8RoXR0En6n_bc03N-lLM3NmuJJCktD4wGN_G0vAFoJdNmynUY0heLJxRmX2ZNB8OVTQmmZhMUv5ExaS6gFdijTpYZajM5ibWlcUN4rbUg2GLQfgIK1iAmem1KkpeX2Z6) ## **Changing the default currency** All the exchange rates of the added currencies (official or alternative) are calculated from one unit of your store's default currency. That's why the default currency should be the currency in which you are most comfortable. To change the default currency of your store: 1. Go to the International > Localization page 2. See the ‘Default currency’ feature in the Configuration section 3. Select the currency you want to set as default ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/hQoKbMywzQAuSmycBjPC/image.png) If the currency you want to set as default is not available, you must add it whether by importing the localization pack of a country using this currency or by completing the “Add a new currency” form (See “Adding a new currency”). ## **Adding a new currency** There are two ways of adding a new currency: ### 1. Import the localization pack of a country using this currency This can be done in the "Localization" page of the "International" menu. ![](https://lh3.googleusercontent.com/khKRlRUevgK7s0Vrznpy4RAt0O70EdqiilLjnssnmus_4O8DVTqbTTomkKpDgkMtZCDvADgceWhHr_Cv7FO7r2oQV5dPe906WQxnNSC6B2fTyc4V-QX8SGwrpAY3X4DHEjhxdqR6) For example, if you want to add the Algerian Dinar, you can import Algeria’s localization pack. When importing a localization pack, the language and the currency will be enabled by default. Once imported, you can manage the status of the currency on the “Currencies'' page. ### 2. Add the currency manually Click on the "Add a currency" button. Select the currency you want to add from the list. The fields will be filled in automatically. By default, the currency is disabled. To activate it in your store, do not forget to switch the Status button to “Yes” and save. ## **Creating an alternative currency** You may need to add a currency that is not included in any of the localization packs or that is not available in the list of currencies. Use this feature to add any cryptocurrency, local currency, etc. that meet your customers’ needs. 1. Click on the “Add a new currency” button 2. Check the box “Create an alternative currency” 3. Complete the fields: ![](https://lh5.googleusercontent.com/dkP6rZ9vf1_NUob3_0PH4xvFiYbvvcIvQdwm2kFdWzi124hGirkclA_um9eH99CZU24LLLGjk_C5QFn8SQAip-DCFCIlFCuWTq58r42Bx1P_NL4zRou6SDHd8M7FIX7vgkl23Jxb) * **Currency name.** Enter the name of the currency. * **ISO code.** Enter the currency 4217 ISO code. See [Wikipedia ](https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_4217#Active_codes)for more information. You will also be able to find unofficial ISO codes of alternative currencies, such as Bitcoin. * **Exchange rate.** This rate is to be defined according to your store's default currency. For example, if the default currency is euros and your chosen currency is dollars, type "1.20" (1€ = $1.20). * **Decimals.** Number of digits following the decimal point for the prices on your store. * **Status.** Any currency can be disabled at any time, both from the edit page, and the currencies listing on the "Currencies" page. When you create a new currency by using the “Add a new currency form”, it is disabled by default. ## **Editing symbols and format** You can customize the format and the symbol of each currency depending on the languages of your store (both the activated and deactivated ones). When editing a currency, at the bottom of the page, choose the language for which you want to modify the currency symbol and/or format and click on “Edit Symbol/Format”. Enter the currency symbol and choose the format: * just in front of the amount, e.g. □999.99 * in front with a space between the symbol and the amount, e.g. □ 999.99 * just after the amount, e.g. 999.99□ * after the amount with a space between them, e.g. 999.99 □ The white square will be replaced by the currency symbol once the “Symbol” field is filled in. Please note that this feature is only available when editing a currency. ## **Updating currency rates** A currency exchange rate, or conversion rate, is the rate at which one currency will be exchanged for another. For example, a conversion rate EUR/USD of 1,22 means that 1 euro equals 1,22 dollars. If a product costs 15 euros, it will cost 18,30 dollars. (15\*1,22 = 18,3) On the contrary, if a product costs 15 dollars, it will cost 12,30 euros. (15/1,22 = 12,3) {% hint style="info" %} Rates on PrestaShop are provided by Fixer () and are updated every day. However, note that they might slightly differ from the current ones as these rates can fluctuate greatly in a short time. {% endhint %} Do not forget to regularly update the rates, by following these steps: ![](https://lh5.googleusercontent.com/qopylC5ZST5Xkv9RgCaVWMfCeX9ckAEqJyNolSM8iat18FGsMn7LG7KYhqrUEyTwXw-ufLYQRg9U_YGBn-Bk8iD5JJRtdwlFzlaluNnDAeDWQtOIbx_gdiTnm7Nn0OaWm6xMr5nF) Clicking on the “Update” button will automatically update the exchange rates of your store’s currencies : 1. Go to the “Exchange rate” section of the “Currencies” page 2. Click on the “Update” button {% hint style="warning" %} Custom currencies’ exchange rates will not be updated automatically, so you will have to manually update them. For example, if you added Bitcoin and want to update the exchange rate, click on the pencil to modify the currency in the Currencies listing, and enter the exchange rate in the corresponding field. Therefore, for high volatile alternative currencies, it is highly recommended to use a module that can automatically update the currency rate. {% endhint %} \ A simple search on the internet is usually sufficient to find a currency exchange rate. There are a lot of converters online that you can use, such as XE.com: For cryptocurrencies, you can visit the following websites:
# Geolocation Geolocation is "*the identification of the real-world geographic location of an object, such as a radar, a mobile phone or an Internet-connected computer*" (read more on [Wikipedia](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Geolocation)). In our case, geolocation is used to discover the location of a visitor, using his or her computer's IP and other tools. One of the uses of geolocation is to block visitors from certain cities/countries. As indicated the first time you open the "Geolocation" page, in order to use geolocation, you need to download a special file first: . This file is the GeoLite City database from MaxMind, an accurate database of cities and locations. Download it by clicking on the link, and then decompress it into the `/tools/geoip/` directory of your PrestaShop installation. Once the file in place, enable the "Geolocation by IP address" option, and you are set. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/LrISptvozfeayoKBCVHa/64225610%20\(4\).png) ## Options You can choose which countries can access your shop (by default, all of them), and set PrestaShop's behaviors for restricted and unrestricted countries (or "other" countries). You choose between these three options: * Visitors cannot see your catalog. * Visitors can see your catalog but cannot make an order. In effect, your store is in "Catalog mode". * All features are available (only for unrestricted countries).\ \ ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/zsPn0pJe3tST9IkBLcZX/64225611%20\(4\)%20\(2\).png) You can select or deselect all countries at once by checking the box at the top of the list (next to "Name"). When selecting countries that can access your online shop, make sure to not block any country by mistake, as you would lose all potential sales to its inhabitants! ## Whitelist of IP address This section enables you to accept specific IPs address despite a blockade. It can be useful in case of spammers, bots or attacks. It is already filled with a list of known good IPs. Add as many as needed, one per line, and click "Save". ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/yspQSlXgQVX07y9b44yG/64225612%20\(4\).png) # Locations Locations are the geographical zones (states, countries, or even bigger zones including many countries) that are used for shipping. It's important it should be accurate, and that all the regions you want to deliver to should be included and enabled in these pages. This section contains the following chapters: * [Countries](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/going-international/locations/countries) * [Zones (EN)](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/going-international/locations/zones) * [States](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/going-international/locations/states) # Countries Your PrestaShop installation must know all existing countries in order for your customers to clearly indicate where in the world they live. There are roughly 200 countries in the World, but PrestaShop has 244 registered. This is because some countries include overseas regions are part of the country proper. For instance, the French departments formerly known as DOM (Guadeloupe, Martinique, Mayotte, Reunion, and French Guiana) nowadays have equal status as the French metropolitan region. Likewise, Alaska and Hawaii are US States proper. Still, sending a package to Guadeloupe does not mean sending it to France, if only for the shipping fees. Therefore, the list of countries in PrestaShop actually separates the country from the mainland. By default, only your own country is enabled in the country list. You should enable them one by one, as needed for your customers. If you are unsure which to enable, check your stats to see the countries with most visitors. At the bottom of the list, the "Country options" section makes it possible to only display on your front office the countries that your carriers cover. We recommend that you enable this setting as it prevents customers from having to scroll through all the country names to find their own. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/a1iUUsNNiauHMzSsfWSa/51839946%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) ## Adding a New Country Normally, PrestaShop comes with all current countries in the database. But in the case new ones are created, you would need to add a new country. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/7ANQnQ2clym8OoM2za11/51839947%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) * **Country**. The official name of the country that you would like to add, in all supported languages. Check the country's Wikipedia page if unsure about the name. * **ISO code**. The country's ISO-3166 code, which you can find on the official ISO page: . * **Call prefix**. Its international call code, which you can find on [Wikipedia](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_country_calling_codes). * **Default currency**. You can use your shop's default currency (as set in the "Localization" page, under the "Localization" menu), or one of the other installed currencies. Remember that if needed, you can add a new currency to your shop using the "Currencies" page. * **Zone**. The world's subregion to which this country is attached. If necessary, you can add new zones using the "Zones" page, under the "Location" menu. * **Does it need zip/postal code?**. Indicates whether a user living in this country must give a zip code or not when signing up to your shop. * **Zip/post code format**. You may also give more detail on the format of the postal code (or zip code). If you do not put anything, PrestaShop will not verify the validity of the zip code when given a new address for this country. Use the following codes for the postal code: "L" for one letter, "N" for one number and "C" for the country's ISO code (the one which you entered in the ISO field above).\ If you do not know the country's postal code format, you can rely on [Wikipedia](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_postal_codes). Make sure you do NOT copy/paste the notation from Wikipedia, but to adapt it! For instance, Wikipedia indicates "AAA 9999\*" for Malta, so the notation for PrestaShop becomes "LLL NNNN" (without the final \*). * **Address format**. Give details about the address layout, when displaying it to customers. You can click on the various helper links on the side of the text-field in order to add more fields. In live usage, they are automatically replaced by PrestaShop with the data from the customer's account. Your changes are only saved when you save the whole page. If you have made a mistake, you can make use of one of the four helper buttons at the bottom of the form, depending on your situation. * **Active**. A disabled country will not be suggested as an option when a visitor wants to register and create a new account. * **Contains states**. Indicates whether the country has "states" or not. This adds a new field to the PrestaShop address form. Note that "states" can be regions, provinces, departments... anything that makes sense to that country's postal service. * **Do you need a tax identification number?**. A Tax Identification Number is an identification number used by the country's revenue service in the administration of tax laws. Not every country needs of even has such a number for business. Inquire about this with the country's revenue service. * **Display tax label (e.g. "Tax** incl**.")**. Choose whether the tax status (included or excluded) should be displayed next to the prices or not. * **Shop association**. You can make the country only available to a selection of your shops, for instance shops that target a specific locale. # Zones PrestaShop's zones are a list of the world's subregions (). It helps categorize countries. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/ezBsmKMwGWls2udGM1UH/51839950.png) If needed, you can create more zones: click on "Add new zone" to display the creation form. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/Ex7WokAmIUz2AJKC7jYA/51839951.png) All you need is a name and a status, for instance indicating that you do not allow deliveries in Oceania. \ When in multistore mode, you can also associate a zone with a selection of stores. # States By "States", PrestaShop calls first-level administrative divisions of a country. In the United-States, they are called *states*; in Italy, it is *regioni* (singular: *regione*); in France, it is *régions*; in the United-Kingdom, it is *regions*. \ By default, PrestaShop provides you with a set of states: 54 US states and territories, 31 Mexican *estados*, 13 Canadian provinces and territories, 34 Indonesian *provinsi*, 24 Argentinian *provincias*, 47 Japanese *todōfuken*, and 110 Italian *province* (singular: *provincia*). ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/UKqDq7pKMx94e9uVdFCv/23789709%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) Having states properly defined in your database helps better represent the delivery possibilities of your carriers. These states can also be essential for tax rates calculation, depending on the country. It is therefore important to enter all of a given country's administrative divisions if they are important to your carriers. You can find a list of such divisions on this Wikipedia page: . The PrestaShop address form currently only lists states which are available for the customer to choose. Therefore, make sure to use a sensible list when adding content to your states list. That is the reason why, for instance, the list contains Italian *province* (second-level administrative divisions) rather than *regioni* (first-level administrative divisions). ## Adding a New State Let's create a new state. Click the "Add new state" button to get to the creation form. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/m1ajBF16M7lFLAo8vDv5/23789711%20\(4\)%20\(3\).png) * **Name**. The name of the state, as it should be displayed on invoices and the package. It should therefore be in the language of the state's country. * **ISO code**. The state's ISO-3166-2 code: 1. Go to this Wikipedia page: , 2. Click the state's country two-letter code (in the "Entry" column of the main table of the above mentioned Wikipedia page), 3. On that same page, find the state's code (it should be in a list on the page, or in the text for the smallest countries), 4. If there is one, remove the country's prefix in order to keep the code under 4 characters. For instance, the full ISO 3166-2 for Devon, in the United Kingdom, is "GB-DEV". Simply use "DEV" as the state's ISO code – it already is attached to the country using PrestaShop's "Country" drop-down list (see next step). * **Country**. Indicate its country using the drop-down list. * **Zone**. Indicate its geographical zone using the drop down list. Pay attention not to use the wrong zone, as this can mix up PrestaShop's country and zone settings. * **Status**. A disabled state will not be suggested as an option when a visitor wants to register and create a new account. # Managing Taxes Taxes are a complex subject, which should be fully understood as it can have a significant impact on your product prices or your shipping fees. While this user-guide is not meant to teach all the ins-and-outs of taxes, we will try our best to give you pointers. Taxes are a "*compulsory contribution to state revenue, levied by the government on workers' income and business profits or added to the cost of some goods, services, and transactions*". In short, every product you sell is subject to sales taxes, which depend on your state's tax laws. In effect, you contribute to your state or government functioning (public goods and services) with a percentage of all your sales, as defined by local tax rates. There are hosts of tax rates in the World, and they vary considerably from one country to another, and even within a single country if it has federal states (USA, Germany, Spain, Russia...). You should therefore make sure to strictly conform to your country's tax laws, and even those of your state or town if they apply to you. Check with your local tax representative as soon as possible in order to get all the official details. By default in PrestaShop, a tax applies to all countries/states/zones. If order to apply a specific tax rate for a single country or a set of countries (and not some others), you must create a tax rule. The tax rule is then applied on a per-product basis, during the creation of the product ("Prices" tab). You cannot directly apply a tax to a product; you can only apply tax rules. Therefore, you must first register all relevant taxes, and then create a tax rule for that tax in order to specify the countries where the tax applies, and finally set the tax rule to the product. * [Taxes (EN)](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/going-international/managing-taxes/taxes) * [Tax Rules](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/improving-shop/going-international/managing-taxes/tax-rules) # Taxes This page lists all the taxes already created in your shop. It allows you to also create new taxes if needed. For each tax, you will see its name, rate, and status. You can activate or deactivate it right from the tax list, or you can edit or delete a tax using the action button at the far right. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/bTeq24QN98KQpiFzqLHR/64225614%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) ## Tax options At the bottom of the page is the "Tax options" section. These options apply to the whole shop and to all of the orders. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/NkUmjZEP15JRd6S3TQci/64225615%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) * **Enable tax**. Whether or not taxes are included in each purchase. * **Display tax in the shopping cart**. You might prefer the customer not to be aware of the taxes that are applied to the order. In that case, disable this option. * **Based on**. The customer can choose to have the product not delivered at the same address as the one the order invoice should be sent to. This can have a great impact on taxes. By default, PrestaShop bases its tax rates on the delivery address, but you can choose to have them based on the billing address. * **Use ecotax**. The ecotax refers to "taxes intended to promote ecologically sustainable activities via economic incentives". It is a tax that shop owners pay in order to "feel the social burden of their actions". Learn more about ecotax on [Wikipedia](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Ecotax). Once you have enabled the use of ecotax, all your products' back office page will feature an "Ecotax (tax incl.)" field in their "Pricing" tab. You should fill that field with the exact value of the tax, which depends on your country's tax laws (it is probably based on the product's price). * **Ecotax**. If you have enabled the use of the ecotax, a new field will appear with a drop-down list. Indeed, depending on your country's tax laws, the ecotax might be subject to VAT, hence this field to allow you to choose the associated VAT rate. If you decide to enable the ecotax after having added products, you will have to edit them all in order to set the tax properly for each product. Note that if you have set ecotaxes for your products already, and that you choose to disable ecotax, then all your products will lose their ecotax settings. Re-enabling the ecotax will mean having to set all your products' ecotaxes again. The ecotax will also appear to the customer, on the product's page. ## Adding a new tax Adding a new tax is very easy because tax rules take out all the burden of having to specify the countries where the tax applies. The tax creation form is therefore very short: * **Name**. Be very specific, as this will help you build tax rules faster. We recommend adding reminders within the name, such as the country/group/zone the tax applies to, and its rate. It helps you remember which tax is to be used in a tax rule. * **Rate**. The exact rate, in the XX.XX format. * **Enable**. You can disable and re-enable a tax at any time. # Tax Rules Tax rules make it so that taxes are only applied to selected countries. By default in PrestaShop, a tax applies to all countries/states/zones. In order to apply a specific tax rate for a single country or a set of countries (and not some others), you must create a tax rule. The tax rule is then applied on a per-product basis, during the creation of the product ("Pricing" tab). You cannot directly apply a tax to a product; you can only apply tax rules. Therefore, you must first register all relevant taxes, then create a tax rule for that tax in order to specify the countries where the tax applies, and finally set the tax rule to the product. A few sample taxes rules are already in place, which depends on the country you chose for your shop during the installation of PrestaShop. The tax rules are set for each tax: the rules actually serve as a kind of country filter, limiting the use of that tax to a specific set of countries. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/F8NPJREwCVCCcPYxFiRl/51839958.png) You should edit a couple of the presented rules in order to get a better grasp of how tax rules can be set. ## Adding a new tax rule You can add as many tax rules as needed to your PrestaShop installation. Not only that, but you should make sure that all of the needed tax rules are registered in your shop. Creating a new tax rule is done in two steps: 1. Create the tax rule: * Click on the "Add new tax rules group" button. * In the form that appears, name the rule. Use a telling name: use the tax rule's country code, its name, maybe even its rate, so as to find it again easily. If PrestaShop already has tax rules for the target country, use their name as inspiration so as to have some consistency.\ \ ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/EpnA26KjBMRh2R9ruaBG/51839959%20\(1\).png)\
* Select whether the rule should be enabled from the get-go or not. You can enable it later if needed. * Click the "Save and stay" button. The page reloads, with a table header at the bottom and a new form.\
2. Specify the country and behaviors: * Fill in the fields from the "New tax rule" section:\
![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/CjomwUKbwR8nr8xyj4Z0/51839960%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) * * * **Country**. The target country for the rule you are creating. * *State.* Some countries have federal states registered in PrestaShop (see the "States" page, under the "Localization" menu). In that case, you can make the tax even more specific, or choose to have it applied to the whole country. You can select more than one state by pressing the Ctrl key when clicking on state names. * **Zip/postal code range**. Whether the country has registered states or not, you can further specify the tax application using the customer's zip code. This field enables you to define zip codes in which the tax should be applied: either enter a single zip code or define a range using the dash. For instance, use "75000-75012" to create a range for all zip codes between these two. * **Behavior**. Some customers might have an address that matches more than one of your tax rules. In that case, you can choose how this tax rule should behave: * *This Tax Only*. Will apply only this tax, not any of the other matching taxes. * *Combine.* Combine taxes. For instance: 100€ + (10% + 5% => 15%) => 115€. * *One After Another.* Apply taxes one after another. For instance: 100€ + 10% => 110€ + 5% => 115.5€. * **Tax.** The tax to be used for this tax rule. That tax must already be registered in PrestaShop. If not: choose "No tax", disable the tax rule, save it, go create a tax on the "Taxes" page, then come back to edit the tax rule. * **Description**. You may add a short text as a reminder of why this tax rule exists for this country. * Click on "Save and stay". The country is added to the table below, and you can start adding another country to this tax rule group by clicking "Add a new tax rule". Note that the default rate applied to your products will be based on your store's default country. # Translations The official PrestaShop translations are retrieved from [Crowdin](https://crowdin.com/project/prestashop-official), a localization management platform on which a community of volunteer translators works on no less than 80 translation projects. {% hint style="success" %} If you would like to contribute to the translation of PrestaShop in your language, feel free to [join the project](https://crowdin.com/project/prestashop-official). {% endhint %} On the **International > Translations** page, you can adapt these official translations to your needs. For example, you can change the wording chosen by the translators to something less formal and customize the text to better suit your audience and make your store even more unique. ## Selecting the type of translations to modify Translations have been organized into 5 sections, depending on where strings appear on PrestaShop software. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/YoiIe3gMPxMaRDYogBst/Untitled%20\(3\).png) {% hint style="info" %} *A string is a series of characters. It can be one character long or contain several words. When a new minor or major version of PrestaShop is released, all the new strings associated with this version are added to* [*Crowdin*](https://crowdin.com/project/prestashop-official) *to be translated by the community.* {% endhint %} * **Back office translations:** the strings that are visible to you and your team from your store's administration panel. * **Theme translations:** the strings visible to your customers when browsing your store. * **Installed module translations:** the strings present in a module. Only installed modules will be listed. * **Email translations:** the strings used in the default email templates. * **Other translations:** the strings that haven't been identified as being from the theme or the back office yet. Some categories have a second drop-down list to narrow your search. Once your selection is done, select the language in which you want to modify translations and click on "Modify". A new page opens, where you can search for translations to modify. ## Searching for a specific string ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/WDSECSoAAtZ7N2Xi5Mn7/Untitled%20\(4\).png) At the top left of the page, there is a search bar that allows you to search for a specific word or string. You can also quickly find the untranslated strings. At the top right is displayed the total number of strings in the section and the number of missing translations. The categories that contain missing translations are displayed in red in the menu on the left of the page. ## Browsing translations ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/Dy9MBDksMs9BAIgTVAop/Untitled%20\(5\).png) The menu on the left of the page allows you to browse all the strings of the category. All the strings are organized into what are called "translation domains". Translation domains aim to give more context to translators, by indicating where the string appears on PrestaShop software. To know more about translations domains, check the dedicated page on the PrestaShop project's [Content style guide](https://zeroheight.com/80a6c5a61/v/latest/p/738e72-manage-translation-domains). ## Modifying translations To modify an existing translation or fill out a missing one, edit or add text in the field just below the string and click on one of the "Save" buttons at the top or at the bottom of the page. Some strings use a special syntax, with variables such as `%s`, `%d`, `%product%`, etc. If a string contains a variable, it will be replaced with a dynamic value. For example, in the string "The product (`%product%`) is no longer available.", `%product%`will be replaced with the product's name. For example, "The product (Hummingbird printed t-shirt) is no longer available." So, you should always keep the variables in your final translation. If a string contains a variable, you should make sure that the content of that variable will be placed in the correct flow of the sentence, and avoid literal translation. Numbered placeholders (`%1$s`, `%2$d`, etc.) enable translators to rearrange the order of the variables in the string. For example, "This is a `%1$s` `%2$d`", with `%1$s` standing for "red" and `%2$d` standing for "pen", could be translated by "C'est un `%2$s` `%1$s`" = "C'est un stylo rouge" in French. ### Translating modules To translate a specific module, select the "Installed module translations" option and the desired module. A new page opens, with all the module's strings. Depending on the module that is selected, the interface could be different. Some modules are using a translation system specific to the 1.7 version, while others are still using the former system from the 1.6 version. In the end, it doesn't change anything for you, as you will be able to translate your modules in the same way. ### Translating email templates There are two ways of modifying the translation of an email: * **Edit the HTML version** With this editable preview, what you see is what you get. Click on the "Edit HTML version" button. You'll be able to edit the text and the design of your email. When you're done, save. * **Edit the text version** You can edit the text version of your email directly in the text field. {% hint style="info" %} Make sure to keep the variables (for example `{lastname}` or `{shop_name}`) in your translations. They will be replaced with the right value when the email is sent. {% endhint %} ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/GzEZZYAsfjrXfeHhP8pq/image.png) ## Resetting translations ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/d8uxzlXT296n91fbVVwb/Untitled%20\(6\).png) To replace a custom translation with the official PrestaShop translation, click on the "Reset" button next to the string. If the field is empty, it means that no official translation is available at the moment. Don't hesitate to [contribute to the translation project](https://crowdin.com/project/prestashop-official) if you want to make your translation available to other merchants. ## Adding or updating a language ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/tRdGJ6gjMPBSOa0JWerB/Untitled%20\(7\).png) To add or update a language, select the language you want from the list and click on the "Add or update a language" button. If you added a new language, you can then manage it in **Localization > Languages.** ## Exporting a language ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/ImYxST1dzlgNmz6CEubI/image.png) You can create your own language pack using this tool, either as a way of making a backup of your translations or sharing them. First, select the language in which you want to export translations. Then, select the type of translations you want: * PrestaShop translations * Theme translations * Installed module translations Each category has a second drop-down list or checkboxes to narrow your selection. Once you are done, click on the "Export" button. ## Copying translations from one language to another ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/4ctucCF6R7jsrSPOTajv/image.png) You can copy the content of one language to another. This is especially useful when you want to replace a theme's language with the same language from another theme. Select the source language and theme, then the destination language and theme, click on the "Copy" button. In most cases, the language should remain the same in both drop-down lists. If there is already a language folder for that language in the destination theme, it will be overwritten with the language and theme files you are copying. You may want to create a new language for the destination theme before copying the source language to it. # Configuring your store The "Configure" section enables you to configure and fine-tune some of your store's details. These include a lot of different aspects of the store, from technical settings to the customer's shopping experience. Therefore, all of these parameters should be carefully examined, and you should consider each option, as enabling or disabling any of them can have a real impact on your store, and ultimately, your sales. This chapter contains the following sections: * [Configuring your Shop Parameters](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/shop-parameters) * [Configuring Advanced Parameters](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/advanced-parameters) # Configuring your Shop Parameters The shop parameters are centered around the customer's shopping experience. This is where you will define all the options regarding your customers, the orders and the general behavior of your shop. Check each of these pages before launching your shop: there are lots of choices you need to make before going live and each one can impact your customers' experience in a way. This chapter contains the following sections: * [General settings](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/shop-parameters/general-settings) * [Order Settings](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/shop-parameters/order-settings) * [Product Settings](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/shop-parameters/product-settings) * [Customer Settings](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/shop-parameters/customer-settings) * [Contact](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/shop-parameters/contact) * [Traffic](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/shop-parameters/traffic) * [Search](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/shop-parameters/search) # General settings In addition to the general preferences, this page also includes the maintenance settings, of prime importance if you want to temporarily deactivate your shop: * [General parameters](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/shop-parameters/general-settings/general-parameters) * [Maintenance](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/shop-parameters/general-settings/maintenance) # General parameters The "General" page features a handful of specific settings that could not fit in the other menus. They are nonetheless essential: * **Enable SSL**. SSL means "Secure Sockets Layer", and includes TSL (for "Transport Layer Security"). Both are cryptographic Internet protocols which secure Web communications. You can read more about these protocols on Wikipedia: .\ Providing an SSL connection to your shop is not only excellent for any Internet exchanges, but also a great way to reassure your customers about the safety of their own data (authentication, credit card, etc.) on your shop, as modern browsers now display visual cues showing that the connection is secured. If your hosting provider does support SSL, make sure to activate PrestaShop's SSL support, by clicking on the link. This will reveal a selector, where you should choose "Yes". SSL will be enabled on all checkout and account pages. * **Enable SSL on all pages**. This option is only available if you have enabled SSL. When active, all the pages of your shop will be SSL-secured (and not only the checkout and account pages). * **Increase front office security**. This adds security tokens to your shop in order to improve its security. In effect, each URL is specific to a customer's session, and cannot be used as-is on another browser, thus protecting whatever information they might have stored during that session. * **Allow iframes on HTML fields**. The option enables you to put iframes in text fields, such as product description. Iframes are HTML elements that make it possible to load an external content into the page's own content. We recommend that you leave this option disabled unless necessary. * **Use HTMLPurifier Library**. Customers can send information to your shop using text fields (for instance, product descriptions or customer information), but hackers can also try to use these fields to send malicious code in order to try and hack your shop. This option guarantees that any data sent to your shop is safe. You should only disable it if you know very well what you are doing. * **Round mode**. Once taxes and discount are applied, a price can feature too many decimals, such as $42.333333333. The round mode is used throughout PrestaShop, in the front office price display as well as during the price calculation process (taxes, discount, etc.). In and off themselves, they change little to the way things are calculated, but the impact is much bigger once taken into account in the invoice total, when many items are added up to taxes and discounts.\ There are six modes: * **Round up away from zero, when it is half way there**. This is the recommended mode. 42.55555555 becomes 42.56. * **Round down towards zero, when it is half way there**. 42.55555555 becomes 42.56. * **Round towards the next even value**. 42.55555555 becomes 42.56. * **Round towards the next odd value**. 42.55555555 becomes 42.56. * **Round up to the nearest value**. 42.55555555 becomes 42.56. * **Round down to the nearest value**. 42.55555555 becomes 42.55. * **Round type**. This option enables you to choose the type of rounding, which can greatly impact the calculation of the total. There are three available types, in progressive order: * **Round on each item**. Each item price will be rounded before calculation of the total. If there are more than one of the same item, each of those will be rounded separately before calculation. * **Round on each line**. Each line of items will be rounded before calculation of the total. If there are more than one of the same item, the rounding will be done on their total value. * **Round on the total**. The rounding will only be done on the final calculation, after the values of all items have been added up. * **Number of decimals**. You can choose the number of decimals that the value should be rounded to. For instance, if you choose "3", 42.333333333 becomes 42.334. * **Display brands and suppliers**. Enable the suppliers and brands pages on your front office even when their respective modules are disabled. * **Display best sellers**. Enable the best-sellers pages on your front office even when the "Best-selling products" module is disabled. * **Enable Multistore**. This little option has major implications: it turns your single-shop installation of PrestaShop into a multiple stores installation. This gives you access to the new "Multistore" page in the "Advanced parameters" menu, and every administration page can be contextualized to apply its settings to either all stores, a specific group of stores, or a single store.\ You can read more about PrestaShop's multistore feature by reading the "Managing multiple shops" chapter of this guide. * **Main Shop Activity**. You might have set the wrong shop activity when installing PrestaShop. You can choose the correct activity here.\ \ ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/W8xoSzHMZBZoBN1iTfN8/51839963%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) # Maintenance This very simple preference page will be invaluable when you want to make changes to your shop without your customers noticing. For instance, when you are adding several new products at once, or when you want to change the theme and make several tests before making it available to the world. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/OPJh2643QMy7Rz4rLmRW/51839965.png) This page only has three options: * **Enable Shop**. You can use this option to disable your shop temporarily, for instance when you need to perform maintenance on your shop. The webservice will still be active, so your data will still be available to those with a key. If you want to also disable the webservice, go to the "Webservice" preference page, in the "Advanced parameters" menu. * **Maintenance IP**. The maintenance IP allows people to access the shop even if it is disabled. This means that you can prevent everyone on the Internet from accessing your shop, but still allow access to the computers used by your team members and yourself. To discover the IP address of a machine, go to from that machine. Click "Add my IP" if you only want to add the IP of your current computer.\ If you want to add more IP addresses, separate them with commas ",". * **Custom maintenance text**. *New in PrestaShop 1.7*. You can display a message of your choice on the maintenance page, to let your customers know why you are on maintenance, and most importantly when your shop will be back to life. # Order Settings The order settings are divided into two tabs. The first one includes all the parameters related to the orders, while the second lets you customize the order statuses. * [Orders preferences](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/shop-parameters/order-settings/orders-preferences) * [Statuses](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/shop-parameters/order-settings/statuses) # Orders preferences The settings from the "Orders" preference page apply to the orders that your customers make, but also to some other details, such as gifting. ## General preferences ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/pxCLyPP5U474xFaxVEMt/51839967%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) * **Enable final summary**. As required in some European countries, you might have to display an order summary (cart, address, delivery method...) just before the order confirmation button. * **Enable guest checkout**. Allows non-registered visitors to place an order, without having to create an account. * **Disable reordering option**. If set to "Yes", customers will not be able to reorder something in one click by going to their order history (this is requirement in some European countries: you must disable this option – and thus put this option on "Yes"). * **Minimum purchase total required in order to validate order**. Indicates the minimum amount that must be in the shopping cart to submit an order. If the amount in this field is not reached, your customer cannot complete their purchase. If you do not want to set a minimum amount, enter "0" in the field. * **Recalculate shipping costs after order edition**. *New in 1.7.* This will automatically recalculate the shipping costs when you have edited an order (added a product, changed the delivery address, etc.). It also makes it possible to change a carrier for an order that hasn't been confirmed yet, and thus update the shipping costs. * **Delayed shipping**. If you enable the "Allow ordering of out-of-stock products" option (in the "Products settings" page), you can allow order items to be dispatched as they become available, in as many shipments as needed (depending on how your team sees it fit). Initially, PrestaShop will split the order in two: the available items are sent right away, while the other items become a second order, waiting to be validated. * **Terms of service**. Makes your customers have to accept your terms of service before they can validate an order. * **Page for the Terms and conditions**. Your shop's "Terms and conditions of use" are to be stored in a static page (see "Design > Pages"). Select which page to use so that PrestaShop can point to it correctly. ## Gift options ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/kww1tLMia7SRmcmXhA4E/43614325%20\(2\).png) * **Offer gift wrapping**. Have PrestaShop suggest gift-wrapping to customer, and the possibility of adding a printed a message. It is always a nice feature for people who want to send gifts through your shop. * **Gift-wrapping price**. Sets the price of your gift-wrapping service. * **Gift-wrapping tax**. If needed, indicates to which local tax the gift-wrapping is tied. You can add more taxes in the "Taxes" page, in the "International" menu. * **Offer recycled packaging**. If you can offer this service, many customers will appreciate it. # Statuses Having different order or return statuses enables you to easily manage your orders and returns, and keep your customers informed of the evolution of their purchase. The various available statuses are visible and editable in the "Statuses" page, under the "Order settings" menu. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/FQ0s3W6tZ6iwUXIwLXTz/38109199%20\(2\).png) The page displays a list of the currently registered order statuses, along with: * Their distinctive colors: existing statuses have colors that help quickly decide if there's an issue with the order or if it all goes well. * Their icons. * Their ties to three PrestaShop behaviors (more are available): * Should the customer receive an e-mail when the order gets this status? * Is this a delivery status? * Does this status allow the customer to download and view a PDF version of the order's invoice? * The name of their e-mail template: you can edit these templates, language by language, in the "Translations" page under the "International" menu. In the "Modify translations" section of that page, choose "E-mail template translations" in the drop-down menu, and then click on the language code of the language in which you wish to edit these templates. * Their action icons: "edit" and "delete". The return status list features less information because those statuses are merely labels with no impact on the order. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/THcOzkpdoP4qWlqUXbD3/23038627%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) ## Creating a new order status You can create a new status with the "Add new order status" button at the top. The creation form opens. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/ue1xz0p335oG0dUhYiqF/51839969%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) Fill out the form: * **Status name**. Keep it very short and distinctive. * **Icon**. You can use any 16\*16 icon; for instance, the free FamFamFam Silk icon set: . * **Color**. You should strive to have the status' color match the existing colors (if relevant). The default color usages are: * Red/Orange: canceled or refunded orders, * Crimson red: payment error, * Blue: orders which are still awaiting payment, * Light green: paid orders, * Dark green: delivered orders, * Purple: shipped orders, * Pink: back ordered orders. * Options: * **Consider the associated order as validated**. If enabled, this status marks all associated orders as "paid", and puts them in this same status. * **Allow a customer to download and view PDF versions of their invoice**. If disabled, you will have to send customers their invoice yourself. * **Hide this state in all customer orders**. This enables you to create internal statuses, for you and your team. Customers will never see this in their order status page. * **Send an e-mail to customer when his/her order status has changed**. When enabled, a drop-down menu appears to let you choose which mail template to use. * **Attach invoice PDF to email**. Send an email to the customer with the invoice in PDF format attached. * **Attach delivery slip PDF to** email. Send an email to the customer with the delivery slip in PDF format attached. * **Set the order as shipped**. Be careful: once an order is set as "shipped", it cannot be set back to the previous status. * **Set the order as paid**. Same here: once an order is set as "paid", it cannot be set back to the previous status. * **Show delivery PDF**. Displays the delivery PDF. ## Creating a new return status You can create a return status with the "Add new return status" button at the top. The creation form opens. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/Qh6gtcb7jNRbSMvqKG0V/23038630%20\(4\)%20\(2\).png) It only features two fields: * **Status name**. Set your desired status name. * **Color**. Set its color Finally, save your creation. # Product Settings This page contains the preferences pertaining to how your products are to be handled and displayed by PrestaShop. ## General preferences
* **Catalog mode**. Enabling catalog mode turns your store into a simple gallery of products, with no way to buy the items whatsoever. * **Number of days for which the product is considered 'new'**. When you add a product to your store, it is considered new and it is available on the "New products" page. The field allows you to specify how many days the product will remain visible on this page. With this feature, you choose how to display and update your store's novelties. The "New products" page is usually most accessed by your regular customers. * **Max size of product summary**. Your product has two descriptions: a "summary" and a regular description. The summary, which appears in search engines and in the category description for your product, is limited to 800 characters by default. * **Quantity discount based on**. This setting indicates upon what PrestaShop should base quantity discounts: per-product, or per-combination (which can feature multiple products). * **Force update of friendly URL**. By default, the friendly URL of a product page is generated from the product title, and it stays the same even though the product title changes – because in order to be well referenced, your URLs should be stable. By enabling this option, PrestaShop will update the friendly URL every time you change the product's name or page's title. * **Enable by default**. If you enable this option, new products will automatically be activated when you create them. ## Pagination preferences
* **Products per page**. Indicate how many products are displayed on the pages of your categories. * **Default order by**. Indicate the order of products in your store's categories. 6 choices are available: * *Product name.* Displays your products based on alphabetical order. * *Product price.* Displays your products according to their prices. * *Product add date.* Displays your products according to the date it was added to your store. * *Product modified date.* When you edit a product, its modification date is changed. This option makes them appear in the order of modification date. * *Position inside category.* Displays your products as they are positioned in the categories in your catalog. The position of the products can be modified directly in the catalog of your store using the position arrows. This way you have your products in the most attractive fashion for your customers. * *Brand.* Displays your products in alphabetical order of their brands' names. * *Product quantity.* Displays your products based on their available quantity. * *Product reference.* Displays your products based on their reference number. * **Default order method**. The above options can be sorted by ascending or descending order. ## Product page preferences
* **Display available quantities on the product page**. By enabling this feature, your visitors can see the quantities of each product available in stock. Displaying this information can be used to stimulate sales in the case where the quantity in stock is low. The quantities displayed are the selected attributes and combination. * **Display remaining quantities when quantity is lower than**. You can choose to display an alert when the remaining available stock for a product gets below a certain level. This option is particularly useful for promoting purchases. The text and placement of the alert depend on the theme; in the default theme, it is "Last items in stock", and is placed next to the "Add to cart" button. * **Display unavailable product attributes on product page**. Your products can be composed of many different combinations or attributes: color, size, capacity, etc. Attributes can be edited in the "Attributes" page of the "Catalog" menu. When one or several attributes are not available anymore, you have two possibilities: * *First possibility:* Leave this preference active. Example: The "iPod Shuffle" is no longer available in "Blue" in our store. By keeping this option enabled, the product's combination will remain visible in the store. A message will indicate that the product is no longer available in the chosen option, and invite customers to choose another combination. If you enabled the "Allow ordering of out-of-stock products" option (see below), then they will be able to add the unavailable combination to their carts. * *Second possibility:* Disable this preference. If the "Blue" combination of the "iPod Shuffle" product is no longer available, that selection is not displayed in the front office and the customer cannot select it. This feature helps to clearly display the availability of your products. * **Display the "add to cart" button when a product has attributes**. This option prevents customers from adding a product to their cart directly from the category page if that product has combinations. This forces customers to visit the product's page and pick a combination, instead of only adding the default one to the cart. Note that products with no combination will still have an "Add to cart" button in the category page. * **Separator of attribute anchor on the product links**. Choose the separator, between "," and "-". * **Display discounted price**. When using the volume discount board, show the discounted price rather than the discount percentage. ## Products stock preferences
* **Enable stock management**. This option gives you access to basic stock management options and features: you can set the current quantity of product, have PrestaShop lower it for each order, and "re-stock" for each canceled or returned order. By default, you should leave this feature enabled, as disabling it affects the entire inventory management of your store. Only if you do not have any physical inventory should you disable it – for instance, if you only have virtual products. * **Default pack stock management**. When you sell packs of products, the way your stock is updated depends on this option. You have three possibilities: * *Decrement pack only.* When a pack is sold, only the stock for the pack will be impacted. * *Decrement products in a pack only.* When a pack is sold, only the stock for each product will be impacted. * *Decrement both.* When a pack is sold, both the stock for the pack and the stock for each product will be impacted. This setting can be changed for each one of your packs on its own product page, in the "Quantities" tab. * **Display unavailable attributes on the product page.** This applies to products that only have a single combination or when an attribute has no product in all possible combinations. * For example, the white attribute won't be displayed on the product page in the following case: |

S - White => 0
S - Black => 1

| | --------------------------------------- | |

M - White => 0
M - Black => 1

| * **Display remaining quantities when the quantity is lower than.** You can choose a starting quantity for remaining products message to be shown to customers. * For example, if set to 3 and your product stock is 2 or lower, then the warning "Last items in stock" will be displayed under the "Add to cart" button in your front office.
If set to 0 however, the remaining quantities will not be shown to customers and the feature will be disabled. This will not show the "Last items in stock" message anymore. * **Allow ordering of out-of-stock products**. If a product does not have any available stock anymore, the customer can still order it. * **Label of in-stock products.** Display a label for in-stock products. * **Label of out-of-stock products with allowed backorders**. Display a label for out-of-stock products with allowed backorders. * **Label of out-of-stock products with denied backorders**. Display a label for out-of-stock products with denied backorders. * **Delivery time of in-stock products.** Recommended to European merchants in order to comply with the legislation. The feature will be disabled if left empty. * **Delivery time of out-of-stock products with allowed backorders**. Recommended to European merchants in order to comply with the legislation. The feature will be disabled if left empty. * **Display out-of-stock label on product listing pages.** This feature helps your customers to see at first glance if a product is available in your store by displaying an out-of-stock label next to your product's listing.
# Customer Settings Like for the orders, this section gathers everything related to the management of your customers. When launching your shop, you should think about how you want to organize your customers in groups, which social titles should be available, and other specific settings. This is where it takes place. * [Customer Preferences](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/shop-parameters/customer-settings/customer-preferences) * [Groups](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/shop-parameters/customer-settings/groups) * [Titles](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/shop-parameters/customer-settings/titles) # Customer Preferences The "Customers" page bring together specifically customer-related options, most notably the B2B mode. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/mNwvKBwiveulhHWAMUSj/51839976.png) * **Re-display cart at login**. If the customer had a cart that was not checked-out, display it once he or she logs back in. * **Send an email after registration**. You can have PrestaShop send an e-mail to any newly-created customer with a summary of his account information (email, password) after registration. * **Password reset delay**. You can choose to limit the frequency at which a customer can generate a new password for his or her account. By default, it is set at 360 minutes – 6 hours. * **Enable B2B mode**. The B2B mode brings a handful of new features to your store. Customers are no longer considered as individuals but as companies, and therefore some new options appear:
* The customer profile has new fields related to professional information (Duns number in the USA, SIRET number in France, CNPJ number in Brazil, etc.), * Prices can be masked to specific groups, * Prices can be managed on a per-customer basis for the whole catalog or per category, * Invoices can be generated manually, * etc. * **Ask for birthdate**. You can choose to request the customer's birth date at registration, or not. If you do, it is a good practice to let customers know why, and to really use it (by sending a discount or a small gift for example). * **Enable partner offers**. You might have an agreement with one or several business partners to suggest the subscription to their newsletter to your customers. If it is the case, then you should enable this option. At registration, a check box will appear: "Receive offers from our partners". # Groups PrestaShop enables you to give your customers certain privileges, by assigning them to groups. You can create as many customer groups as needed, and assign a user to as many groups as you like. This is all done from the "Groups" tab, under the "Customers settings" menu. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/Wqlx7kfCCpyjlaPXyl5U/51839979.png) By default, three special groups are available: * **Visitor**. All persons without a customer account or unauthenticated. * **Guest**. All persons who placed an order with the Guest Checkout – that option needs to be enabled. * **Customer**. All persons who created an account on your shop, and are authenticated. These three groups cannot be deleted. To create more groups, click the "Add new group" button: you will get a creation form. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/vkZ9O0Q49sQ6e5Uab0aa/51839980.png) * **Name**. Use a short and descriptive name. * **Discount (%)**. The discount that you can set for members of this group applies to all products on your shop.\ You may prefer not to set any discount value, and create cart rules instead. * **Price display method**. PrestaShop is frequently used in the Business to Business (B2B) sector. You can create a group of customers who can buy products without paying taxes. The drop-down list gives you a choice between "tax included" and "tax excluded". * **Show prices**. By default, all users of your shop can view the prices. You may prefer some to not have access to your product prices. For instance, you could make it so users can only view prices if they have an account. In that case, you should edit the "Visitors" group so that "Show prices" is set to "No". Once these settings are in place, you can save the group as-is, or add per-category and/or per-module settings. In that second case, after the group has been saved, open it again: the form will load with two more options: * **Category discount**. Click on the "Add a category discount" to bring up a new window, which contains a list of all your categories. You can pick one, and apply a specific discount which will apply for that group of customers only, and to that category only.\ Note that: * Only products which have this category as their default category will be affected by the discount. Products which have this category as a secondary category will not be affected. * This category discount will replace any other discount that members of this group would otherwise enjoy on this category. * You can add as many category discounts for this customer group as you need – thereby enabling to entirely give this group a whole set of different discounts if you feel the need. * **Authorized modules**. This section enables you to block members of this group to access and use some of your shop's modules. For instance, you might prefer some customers not to be able to see your top-sellers or your specials. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/ENI8rf5TV5O5zLWwvlKj/51839982.png) You can add a customer to a group of your choice by editing the customer's details: from the list of customers (in the "Customers" page under the "Customers" menu), click on the Edit button on the customer's row. Then, in the "Group access" table, select the group(s) to which you want your customer to belong. If you assign the customer to more than one group, remember to set their main group with the "Default customer group" option. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/g0LoWXEG6Z2K2QyzIU9f/51839981%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) # Titles The social title tool helps you better define your customers: in the customers list, you can choose to only display customers having a given social title. Modules may also rely on social titles for certain features. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/izVIXImH3x7JF10vHzWP/23789579%20\(4\)%20\(3\).png) Clicking on the "Add new social title" button brings you to a form: ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/woKm8G6TAyM32ADKAlPm/30670853%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) * **Social title**. You can choose anything, from the very common ("Sir", "Lady", "Gentleman", etc.) to the very unusual ("Jedi", "Magnificent One", "Money carrier"...). The important thing when departing from the commonly accepted titles is to reflect your shop's true identity. * **Gender**. Some titles may apply to both male and female customers, or to neither. In that last case, be sure then to set that option to "Neutral". * **Image**. A 16\*16 image file representing the title. Classic gender symbols are the Mars and Venus ones (♂ and ♀), but there are many other possibilities. PrestaShop enables you to characterize your creation with a unique image. * **Image width** and **Image height**. PrestaShop works best with 16\*16 image, and will resize your image if it bigger than that. Nevertheless, you might feel necessary to use bigger images, and these two options enable you to set the exact size required by your image. If you enter "0", PrestaShop will simply use the image's original size. # Contact Your shop offers several points of contact to your customers, from a contact form to a list of your physical stores (if any). These pages are where you configure anything related to your contact details. ## Contacts The "Contact us" page on your store displays a contact form to get in touch with you. According to your customers' needs, their messages can be sent to different services so that the right person will handle the requests. You can create multiple contact accounts to better dispatch their requests. For example: customer service, technical support, sales department, etc. On the "Contacts" page, you can access the existing list of contacts. In order for the message to be redirected to the intended recipient, you must configure the contacts in your shop. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/bOq7fbXXpTyROdPs4Gkl/23789574.png) ### Creating a new contact Click the "Add new contact" button to access the contact creation form: * **Title**. The name of the contact: either a person's name or the name of the service itself. You could also choose to use a sentence, such as "I have a problem with my order", "I want to return a product" or "I want to become a partner". Indeed, this information is displayed in the "Subject" drop-down menu of the contact form, and this is what your customer will see when contacting you. * **E-mail address**. The address can be the same as another contact. In fact, all contacts can share the same address if you don't really have a team – customers will never know, but having many contacts helps them trust your shop, as it means there are many people working for your shop. * **Save messages?**. Indicate if the e-mail is to be saved in the "Customer Service" tool, or simply sent to the e-mail address. If disabled, PrestaShop will not help you handle customer service for this contact. This might be useful for "Partner e-mail", as you might not want your customer service employees to have access to these. * **Description**. Make it short, no more than a single line, as it can be displayed to the customer in the contact form (depending on your theme). ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/Kb4NxKgWXjKWdHT0XLhS/30670852.png) ### How the customer can contact you To contact the appropriate team of employees from your shop's front office, the customer clicks either on the "Contact us" link at the top of the page, or one at the bottom of the page. The contact form appears. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/tsvIQ043d4MlmABain1A/51839985%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) The customer is then asked to choose the service to contact, enter the e-mail address and then complete the message. A drop-down menu makes it possible to choose which order is being discussed, and even which product from that order. The module "Contact Information" also allows you to display your contact details in the footer and the "Contact Us" page on your shop. Your contact details are managed in the "Stores" page. ## Store Contacts Preferences PrestaShop provides a list of your physical store to your customers, with detailed contact information. Obviously, this feature is only useful if you do have physical stores, where customers can come buy products. Customers can reach the "Stores" page from the footer of your shop. You cannot disable this feature, but you can make it inaccessible to customers: * Disable or delete all the stores listed in the "Stores" administration page. * Disable the link in the footer: in the "Link Widget" administration page, remove the "Stores" link from the "Our company" block. At this point, the page will still exist and it will still be accessible to search engines. To delete it for good, you should: * Go to "Traffic > SEO & URLs" * Find the "stores" page * Delete it If some day you want to have the "Stores" page back, you should create a new page in the "SEO & URLs" page, with the following information: * Page name: Select "stores" * Page title: "Stores" * Rewritten URL: "stores" ### Store list You can choose how these stores are displayed in the front office. The customer can access them through the "Stores" link (depending on the theme) ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/h1AeShysV4xhoUV0r3RC/51839987%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) In your interface, all your stores are listed in a handy list, giving every store's information as well as an indicator telling whether the store is currently active or not – you might for instance want to gather the information for a new store in advance, in order to have its page ready for the launch. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/xZTgbU500Ppa2Z0jxR3M/45580496%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) #### Adding a new physical store As usual, click "Add new store" to reach the store creation form. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/7oTlULHAbUgJgnUs7T3J/45580497%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) Fill as many of the fields as possible, as they will be displayed to your customers. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/rtK8I59p6cyVtvlX509c/51839988%20\(5\)%20\(5\).png) One important field is the "Latitude/Longitude" one, as this is what your theme might use to indicate the location of your store. You can use Steve Morse's online tool to get the lat/long coordinates of a given address: . Make sure to add a picture of the store front, as this is how your customers will be able to find it once in the street. Finally, the business hours are an essential part of any physical store, and you should be as precise as possible about them. ## Contact details This section enables you to give the main details of your company, rather than those of a specific shop. You should fill all the fields with information on your headquarters, as this is certainly the address customers will use to contact you, or even visit you. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/cU4Oxx7ROOpdxSu9aIKF/45580500%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) These fields should be carefully filled: * **Shop name**. The name of your store. Keep it short, as it will be used in all your correspondence and page titles. * **Shop email**. The official contact address for your business. Use the general contact e-mail address that the customers should see when they receive an e-mail from your shop. * **Registration number**. Indicate your company's legal registration numbers, which depends on your country's legal system (Duns number in the USA, SIRET number in France, CNPJ number in Brazil, etc.). This shows that you are a fully registered business, thus giving a more reassuring opinion of your shop to your potential customers. * **Shop address line 1** / **Address line 2** / **Postal code/Zip code** / **City** / **State** / **Country**. Use the official contact address of your business. The "State" option only appears when the selected country has states set in your database (through the "States" page in the "Localization" menu) * **Phone**. The official contact phone number for your business. If you'd rather customers not call you, do not put anything in there. * **Fax**. The official contact fax number for your business. Do not use a colon (":") in your store's name, as it might prevent some features from working (for instance, e-mail sending might fail). You can replace the colon with a dash if you need to have two sections in the title. For instance, use "MyStore – The best place for items to buy" instead of "MyStore: The best place for items to buy". # Traffic The traffic section is here for you to handle the settings that can influence the traffic coming to your site, most notably, everything related to search engine optimization (SEO), but also your affiliate programs. This chapter contains the following sections: * [SEO and URLs](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/shop-parameters/traffic/seo-and-urls) * [Search Engines](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/shop-parameters/traffic/search-engines) * [Referrers](/v.9-documentation/user-guide/configuring-shop/shop-parameters/traffic/referrers) # SEO and URLs The tools on this page help you improve the presence of your PrestaShop site on web searches and therefore reach more potential customers. SEO means "Search Engine Optimization". It represents a set of techniques and best practices aimed at improving the visibility of a website on search engines. You can read more about this on [Wikipedia](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Search_engine_optimization). URL is short for "Uniform Resource Locator" or, simply put, the online address of a web page. You can read more about what a URL is on [Wikipedia](http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/URL). By default, PrestaShop's deep URLs (that is, specific pages rather than online the domain name) are uninformative to both customers and search engines: a URL such as does not help visitors know what product is on that page. Friendly URLs are the way to achieve that and get for instance . As you can see in the second example above, both categories and products can have a friendly URL: in the example above, `id_category=2` becomes `2-music-players`, and `id_product=27` becomes `27-ipod-nano-green`. While the ID number cannot be removed by default, the words can be either generated from the category/product name or written by hand. This is done directly in the configuration page for the product or the category (in the "Catalog" menu): the "Friendly URL" field can be found directly on the main configuration page of a category and under the "SEO" tab of the configuration page of a product. There are other individual pages in your PrestaShop install that would certainly benefit from friendly URLs: CMS pages, user account pages, pages with automatically generated content. The "SEO & URLs" page presents you with a list of these pages and enables you to edit their friendly URLs as well as their meta tags (title, description, keyword). ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/dmGDKVeTzqwhQupPrOTs/64225659%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) Friendly URLs only work with a server setup that supports URL rewriting (through the Apache Web Server `mod_rewrite` feature, for instance). Make sure to check that your server does (if needed, ask your hosting provider!), as it can make your shop completely unavailable to customers if you enable friendly URLs and the server does not support it! ### Homepage SEO settings In order to change the homepage meta tags, you simply need to open the "SEO & URLs" page and click on "index" to reach the page's settings and freely edit its important SEO information. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/8ttEctNKbMXBybHRoy9b/64225660.png) A few tips: * The default homepage title is the name of the store, and therefore the index' title field is empty. If you put content in the field, the homepage's full title will be replaced by your input. The name of the store itself is set during the installation of PrestaShop and can be changed from the "Contact Details" tab, available in the Shop Parameters > Contact section of the back office. * Keep your description short: a paragraph of text is enough. * To add a meta keyword, click on the field and validate by pressing "Return". You can remove tags by clicking the cross. * You do not have to add a rewritten URL if there is already one. Note that if your store has already been indexed by Google or any other search engine, it might take a while for your changes to appear in the search results... you might have to be patient! ## Adding a new friendly URL Friendly URLs are to be set in the configuration page of each product, category, or static content page. This creation page is only useful for some automatic pages, and most of the time you won't have to worry about these. Make sure to fill the fields for all the available languages on your shop: not only is it immensely useful to local users, but some search engines can even make use of this local information. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/8ttEctNKbMXBybHRoy9b/64225660.png) Click the "Add new page" button to reach the friendly URL creation form. It has a handful of fields: * **Page**. The drop-down list gives you all the pages that can benefit from a friendly URL. * **Page title**. The title that will appear in search engines when a request is made. * **Meta description**. A presentation of the page in just a few words, intended to capture a customer's interest. It will appear in the search results. * **Meta keywords**. Keywords that you must define in order to have your site referenced by search engines. You can enter several of them: type the words, press the "Return" key, and see how the tag gets encapsulated in a blue block, with a tiny cross icon to delete it. * **Rewritten URL**. This is where you set the friendly URL. Make it short and descriptive, use only letters and numbers, and replace spaces (" ") by hyphens ("-"). ## Set up URLs The main options for friendly URLs: * **Friendly URL**. Change this option *if you know that your server* can support URL rewriting. If not, leave it at "No". You may see a message such as "*URL rewriting (mod\_rewrite) is not active on your server or it is not possible to check your server configuration. If you want to use Friendly URLs you must activate this mod*". In this case, PrestaShop cannot detect your server settings, but that does not mean the feature will not work. You must test it yourself. * **Accented URL**. PrestaShop can produce URL with special characters, for products with non-ASCII names. You can disable that option here. * **Redirect to the canonical URL**. A given PrestaShop page can have many URLs, most often when there are parameters to consider: for instance, [`http://example.com/product.php?id=5&option1`](http://example.com/product.php?id=5\&option1) and [`http://example.com/product.php?id=5&option2`](http://example.com/product.php?id=5\&option2) point to the very same product, only one difference. Since you want your product to have a single URL and not many duplicate ones, you should enable canonical URLs.\ \ Canonical URLs are a way to eliminate self-created duplicate content – which can dramatically bring your search engine rank down, as this is considered spam. To avoid search engines thinking you are spamming their index, PrestaShop uses standard `rel="canonical"` link tag to indicate which is the one base URL for a given content. While it is highly recommended to enable this option, it also depends on your theme implementing correctly the `` header tag. If needed, ask the theme designer for more information. \ *New since 1.7.6!* By default, it is the canonical URL of a product that is called and, in case of combinations, the canonical URL points towards the default combination.\ \ There are three options: * *No redirection.* You might get duplicate URLs. * *301 Move Permanently.* Returns the HTTP 301 status code, pointing to the main URL and notifying search engines that this is the only URL to take into account. We recommend this option once your modifications are done. * *302 Moved Temporarily.* Returns the HTTP 302 status code, pointing to the main URL and notifying search engines that the main URL might change later. * **Disable Apache's MultiViews option**. Apache is the most popular webserver and is most likely the one your web host uses for your site (although you should check this for yourself). Multiviews is a content negotiation system: when enabled, the web server tries to serve the user a page in what it thinks is the best matching language version, under the same URL. Unfortunately, this might bring trouble to PrestaShop's friendly URLs feature. If this is the case, you can try to disable multi-views with this option. * **Disable Apache's mod\_security module**. `mod_security` is a module of the Apache web server, which acts as a firewall, protecting your server from intrusions. It can, however, block some key features, or even produce errors in some configuration. In such case, disable that firewall here.\
![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/ByPLEMHhEl2EF6adWPok/64225661%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) ## Set shop URL In this section, you can view and edit some of the default server settings: * **Shop domain**. Your store's main domain name or IP address. * **SSL domain**. Your store's secure domain name (`https://`) or IP address. * **Base URI**. The folder where you installed PrestaShop. If it is at the root of the domain, use "`/`". Most of the time, we recommend not to touch these fields without knowing exactly what you are doing. Indeed, a single mistake can sometimes break your shop. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/Gk837fsIrZcx80zBe9wh/64225662.png) ## Schema of URLs *Is displayed only if friendly URLs are enabled.* You can change the way friendly URLs are generated, by changing the route to a resource in your shop. For instance, the default route to display a product's page is `{category:/}{id}-{rewrite}{-:ean13}.html`, which results in `/summer-dresses/7-printed-chiffon-dress.html`. You could change that route to `{manufacturer:/}{id}-{rewrite:/}` to obtain `/fashion-manufacturer//7-printed-chiffon-dress/` Eight fields are available by default, and each is accompanied by a list of available keywords. Some keywords are mandatory and are indicated with a "\*". ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/JU93XVqe2KwsOb7SdClf/64225664%20\(3\).png) Once your fields updated, do not forget to save your changes! ## SEO options *New since 1.7.5.1!* PrestaShop now allows you to enable the display of your product's attributes in its meta title. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/axZXz7u0m1ENons1XFDb/64225663%20\(2\)%20\(1\).png) ## Robots file generation A `robots.txt` file enables you to block specific automated bots and web spiders which crawl the Web in order to find more web pages to add to their company's servers. Some bots you want to have full access to your website, such as Google's or Yahoo!'s, and some others you would rather not, such as spam bots, content thieves, e-mail collectors, etc. Note that the worst of bots do not respect this file's directives, as it is purely advisory. PrestaShop's `robots.txt` generation tool simply creates a file with exclusion directives for files and directories that are not meant to be public, and should not be indexed. These directives apply to all bots, good or bad: the generated file uses the "User-agent: \*" string. Clicking on the "Generate robots.txt" button replaces any existing `robots.txt` file with a new one. Therefore, if you want to add your own rules, do it after PrestaShop has generated its version of the file. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/rqEhR03jIpg2sepK72Pt/64225665%20\(4\).png) Video - 4 Tips to Well start SEO for your Ecommerce site [![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/8TCXJ0uZ9tPVzMpEJc3M/51839782%20\(6\)%20\(6\).png)](https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=NnPEoE3MuHk\&index=13\&list=PLyZYn1MMU7-xT-L_zUyGnRBJmAuP6uc-c) # Search Engines A lot of you visitors will come from search engines. In order to know what they were looking for, and how you can improve your shop for their search queries, you need to know their queries. This page presents a table of all the search engines that your installation of PrestaShop supports – meaning that PrestaShop is able to recognize it, and to extract the query that the visitor from that given search engine used to find your shop. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/4LbS4u62gK9Sws3mMjtf/23789937%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) While Google has the biggest share of search engines users, there are many other search engines that people could use to find your website. Therefore, you have to be able to retrieve their search requests too. When an unknown search engine is starting to bring regular visitors, it is high time that you add it to your database – otherwise, those visitors would be marked in your statistics as coming from "Other search engines", which is not helpful at all. ## Adding a Search Engine It is very simple to add a new search engine to your list. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/igAGb8UIrf2WCsBTN6DY/23789939.png) Let's say you want to add DuckDuckGo, a search engine that emphasizes its respect for data privacy: 1. Get the full referrer URL for the search. For instance, 2. Take the domain name, which is specific to that search engine, and put it in the "Server" field. In our case, "duckduckgo". 3. Find the query variable: 1. Find the query string. It should be a set of letters, followed by an "=" sign, followed by the query itself, closed by a "&" or the end of the string. In our case, it is "q=kids+shoes". 2. The query variable is the set of letters before the "=" sign. In our case: "q". Put that in the "$\_GET variable" field. 4. Click the "Save" button, and from now on, PrestaShop will be able to recognize visitors from DuckDuckGo. # Referrers A referrer means a website that brings you at least one visitor. This website features a link to your shop, and thus it helps you build an audience and eventually make more sales. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/CQvJmWYkNr2gJIBWTAog/43089936%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) Some referrers are more important to you than others: you might have partners that have links to your shop on their own website, and both you and your partners would certainly want to know how many visitors those links brought you. You could even pay your partners to display a link to your shop, depending on how much you value your traffic.\ This, in effect, is called affiliation, and the "Referrers" page helps you build a complete affiliate program, to which even your partner can connect to see the number of visits and sales their links have generated. Registered affiliates generate traffic to your shop, you want to reward them for those visitors, and the affiliate program is how both of you can access the figures the reward is based on. PrestaShop's referrer tool can be likened to that of a statistical dashboard open to others than only your staff members. When you create an affiliate campaign for a site, you can grant that site access to all of the activity it will have made for your site, through a password-protected URL: . In the list of referers, the Click, Base and Percent values are calculated depending on the actual clicks, sales and percent of sales from the referer site. ## Adding a new referrer The affiliate space enables you to create privileged access for your partners. They will have access to all statistics on the flow of visitors from their site to your online shop. To create their privileged space, you need to create their account in your affiliation program, then define how you will pay based on traffic and sales generated. To create a new affiliate partner, click on the "Add new" button, which will take you to the affiliate creation form. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/dloX0XnsiCGkDqLmdjd9/43089930%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) Each section is important: * **Affiliate**. The account of the partner in your affiliation program. * **Name**. To connect to your affiliation back office, your partner needs a login name; you can use a simple name or an e-mail, but make sure to use something both you and your partner can remember easily. * **Password**. The first time you create the account, PrestaShop saves the password along the login name. When you need to edit the account (for instance, when needing to change the commission), the password will be blank. This does not mean there is no password; if you fill the blank field when editing the account, it will change the password. * **Commission plan**. This is where you indicate the fees of your affiliate – meaning the money you will owe your partner for actions of visitors from their site. * **Click fee**. This defines how much you estimate a visitor from this partner's site is worth. Every time a visitor from your partner's site comes to your shop by clicking on their link, the partner earns the marked amount. * **Base fee**. You can also reward your partners if visitors from their sites do buy one of your products. Note that this is only valid if the purchase is made during the browsing session that follows the click on the partner's link. * **Percent fee**. In addition to the base fee, or as a replacement, you can reward partners with a percentage of the sales made during the browsing session of visitors from their sites. * **Technical information - Simple mode**. This is very important, as this is what will make the system differentiate this partner from other referrer links. Once configured, you should make a couple of test in order to make sure that you are indeed tracking the affiliate correctly. * **HTTP referrer**. In the "Include" field, set the partner's domain name that you want to track as your affiliate domain. * **Request URI**. In the "Include" field, set the last part of the query string. The system will track referrers that use a special query string. For instance, you can track referrers that use the `?prestaff=` argument in their URL. This can help you further differentiate referrers. * **Technical information - Expert mode**. While the simple mode matches words using MySQL's "LIKE" function, the expert mode enable you to use MySQL regular expressions. This can prove very powerful but also very hard to maintain. Be sure to master the subject of regular expressions before putting anything in these fields. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/njUwpN2t3fII40N0E9HL/43089933%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) The "Help" section gives you some precious indications on how to best configure your affiliate. Read it through. ## Settings The referrer settings are mostly tools to help you make the best of your affiliate program. ![](https://content.gitbook.com/content/f4jUT8dUfW1PrFTeHOkK/blobs/29FJWu898lpOuDela4D3/43089934%20\(4\)%20\(4\).png) There are three possibilities: * **Indexing**. You must click once on the "Refresh index" button when you add a new referrer and you want to analyze your past traffic for this new referrer. * **Cache**. PrestaShop caches the data it gathers. You can use the "Refresh cache" button to regularly refresh your data cache. * **Save direct traffic?**. Direct traffic represents visitors who arrive on your shop directly, by typing your URL in their browser. While these are important because they are visitor who really know about your shop and are interested in your products (contrary to visitors with referrer, who might have simply stumble upon your shop by chance), saving this traffic can put a huge toll on your database. This is why this traffic is not saved nor analyzed by default. Only enable this option if you know what you are doing. --- [Next Page](https://docs.prestashop-project.org/v.9-documentation/llms-full.txt/1)